-I

I
I
I
I,
I

CDC2000wiN
OPERATION MANUAL

I
I
I

I
CHEN HSONG MACIDNERY TAIWAN CO., LTD.

AUEust 27. 2010 Revision:2.0 Categer'y: Document

..L.--...,...--------- -

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

Content
1 Computer Panel 1-1
I 1.1 Operational Panel 1-1
1.2 Power operation button 1-2
1.3 Manual operation buttons 1-2
1.4 Alphanumeric keys 1-5
I 1.5 Cursor keys 1-6
1.6 Dual keys operation 1-7
I 1.7
1.8
Motor operation keys
Manual menu switchover operation
1-11
1-11

I 1.9 Operation modes 1-14

2 Operational Menu 2-1

I 2.1 Welcome with AP 2-1
2.2 Operation monitor menu 2-7
2.3 Cycle monitoring review '" 2-9
2.4 Production Information 2-10
2.5 Mold open / clamp setting 2-12
2.6 Ejector setting 2-24
2.7 Core 1-4 pulling setting 2-28
2.8 Core 5-8 pulling setting (Optional) 2-40
2.9 Unscrew devices setting (Optional) 2-51
2.10 Air blower setting 2-59
2.11 Modal thickness adjustment setting 2-65
2.12 Mold change adjustment. 2-70
2.13 High-pressure cylinder & Split nut cylinder setting 2-72
2.14 Injection setting 2-74
2.15 Plasticising & Melt decompression setting 2-85
2.16 Carriage setting 2-93
I 2.17
2.18
Auto purge setting
Injection speed / pressure outline
2-96
2-98
2.19 Theoretical injection pressure chart 2-99
2.20 Mold shut-off valve + sequence valve 1-2 setting 2-100
2.21 Barrel Temperature setting 2-103
2.22 Common plastic materials temperature memory setting 2-106
2.23 Weekly TIMER setting 2-107
2.24 Temperature setting curve 2-109
2.25 Temperature record curve 2-110
2.26 Mold temperature setting (Optional) , 2-111
I Content C.E'14001
1•.'0.
9001' '50
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

. ..
CDC2000WIN Operation Manual

1.2 Power operation button

The red push button of e is an "Emergency stop push button" located at the right

bottom side on the computer panel which could be cut off the controller's power by directly pressing

down this push button could be cut off & pulling back this push button of ':',~ to switch "ON"

the controller's power.

1.3 Manual operation buttons

· D·.
··~···'

.~
..r1

It could be independently actuated a step-on movement among of the entire actions within a
cycle by pressing down the corresponding manual operation button on the computer panel and the
cyclic flow chart of each manual operation is described as below:
~I Carriage FWD I Il1o Injection Plasticising

~ ~ ~ ~

Decompression

EjectorBWD Ejector FWD Mold Open Carriage BWD

l.Computer Panel 1-2 1.0 CE' 1.4001

9001 .
. t$O
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 ~I·/
/1 ~ CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I Each manual operation button in accordance with an unlike function describes as below:

I [ ~.~ ]: Mold Open operation button.

~: Mold Clamp operation button.

~: Elector Backward operation button.

I ~: Ejector Forward operation button.

I ~

1) "Core lOut" operation button.

I : 2) "Co~e 5 Ou~" operation button when the screen displays the menu (135) Core 5-8
Pullmg Settmg.

I W 1) "Core 1 In" operation button.

2) "Core 5 In" operation button when the screen displays the menu (135) Core 5-8
~: Pulling Setting.

I I~I:
rJj!l
1) "Core 2 Out" operation button.
2) "Core 6 Out" operation button when the screen displays the menu (135) Core 5-8
Pulling Setting.

1) "Core 2 In" operation button.

2) "Core 6 In" operation button when the screen displays the menu (135) Core 5-8

I ~: Pulling Setting.

I
I
I~I: 1) "Core 3 Out" operation button.
2) "Core 7 Out" operation button when the screen displays the menu (135) Core 5-8
Pulling Setting.

Ii!l 1) "Core 3 In" operation button.

2) "Core 7 In" operation button when the screen displays the menu (135) Core 5-8
I ~: Pulling Setting.

I~I: 1.Computer Panel

1) "Core 4 Out" operation button.
2) "Core 8 Out" operation button when the screen displays the menu (135) Core 5-8
Pulling Setting.

1-3 .SGeE·· 14001

,[SO
August 27, 2010 Re\'isioo:2.0 'tOOf

.CDC200owiN Operation Manual

1) "Core 4 In" operation button. :

2) "Core 8 In" operation button when the screen displays the menu (135) Core 5-8
Pulling Setting.

1) "Unscrew Out" operation button outward the movement under the manual mode
when using the unscrew settings.
2) "Mold Thickness Forward" operation button under the menu (7) Modal Thickness
I
Adjustment for the toggle machine in manual mode.
I

1) "Unscrew In" operation button inward the movement under the manual mode
when using the unscrew settings.
2) "Mold Thickness Backward" operation button under the menu (7) Modal Thickness
Adjustment for the toggle machine in manual mode.

[D I: Spare "Automatic Mold Thickness Adjustment" operation button did not in use at now.

[ j.. [;.:81: "Air Blow I" operation button.

[ j.. D~I: "Air Blow 2" operation button.

Wl
~: "Air Blow 3" operation button.

I.,D~l "Air Blow 4" operation button.

1~I: "Carriage Forward" operation button.

U: "Carriage Backward" operation button.

1~ I: "I'njection
." operation
. button.

1.Computer Panel 1-4 ".0

9001···.(··E.
'so
14001
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I ~ "Plasticising" operation button. This button has a special design in operation that it
· will be self-locking at 1st press and not need to hold down this button all the time, if
· it wants to stop the plastic ising movement just to press down this button once again
that it is so.

I
Ij! I: "Meh Decompression (Suck Back)" operation button.
,

1.4 Alphanumeric keys

I
I

I
n. Stands for an Arabic numeral of"O" (zero) or the character clear key, 1st press is "0"
I _. (zero) and the 2nd press is one Space of"" alternately.

I .
II Stands for an Arabic numeral of "1" or the alphabets of"S'" "T'" "U" input key, 15t
· press is "1", 2nd press is "S", 3rd press is "T" and 4thpress is "0" alternately.

_. Stands for an Arabic numeral of"2" or the alphabets of"V" , "W'" "X" input key,
_. 1st press is "2", 2nd press is "V", 3rd press is "w" and 4thpress is "X" alternately.

II
Stands for an Arabic numeral of "3" or the alphabets of "Y", "Z'" the one
: Underline of"_" input key, l" press is "3", 2nd press is "Y", 3rd press is "Z:' and 4th
press is "_" alternately.

I g:.
_.
Stands for an Arabic numeral of "4" or the alphabets of "J" "K'" "L" input key, 15t
press is "4", 2nd press is "1", 3rd press is "K" and 4thpress is "L" alternately.

I _,
_.
, , . Stands for an Arabic numeral of"5" or the alphabets of"M'" "N'" "0" input key, 1st
press is "5", 2nd press is "M", 3rd press is ''N'' and 4thpress is "0" alternately.

I Stands for an Arabic numeral of"6" or the alphabets of"P'" "Q'" "R" input key, 1st
press is "6", 2nd press is "P", 3rd press is "Q" and 4th press is "R" alternately.

I Stands for an Arabic numeral of"7" or the alphabets of "A" , "B" , "C" input key, 1st
press is "7", 2nd press is "A", 3rd press is "B" and 4thpress is "C" alternately.
I I.Computer Panel ]·5 ISO ('E 1'4()01
f001', ISO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

coczooovi»
, I ' , "
Operation Manual

II
r;'II
,
:
Stands for an Arabic numeral 0 f "8" or the alphabets of "0'" "E ", "F " input key, 1st
press is "8", 2nd press is "D", 3rd press is "E" and 4thpress is "F" alternately.

Stands for an Arabic numeral of"9" or the alphabets of"G" , "H" , "I" input key, 1st
_: press is "9", 2nd press is "G", 3rd press is "H" and 4thpress is "I" alternately.

1) "Automatic Calculation" function for converting to the data.

II : 2) "Multi-function" key of the user menu routes in question, please refer to the
section of"1.6 Dual keys operation".

I!:I:
m. Confirmation of the right digital input.

I) Cancel of the wrong digital input. I

: 2) "M~lti-function" key of the us~r menu routes in question, please refer to the
section of"1.6 Dual keys operation",

: Data input reconfirmation key.

II: "Muki- function" auxiliary key, please refer to the section of "1,6 Dual keys operation".

1) Machine "SETUP" auxiliary function key.

2) If the LED light on the upper left of this button is getting at flashing status that it
is the meaning of the machine speed reduce in action, please refer to the section
of"2.53 User choice information".

1.5 Cursor keys

I
: Move the cursor to the upward direction.

: Move the cursor to the downward direction.

: Move the cursor to the leftward direction.

I
: Move the cursor to the rightward direction.

I.Computer Panel 1-6 'SO

9001' "C"E 14(»01
ISO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 CDC 2000 WiN Operation Manual
Shuttle knob to rapid move the cursor in place, just to shift to the intended
parameter when it is shown as the white background color as per menu that it
has 4-kind of the purposes according to an unlike features of a parameter
I column as below descriptions.
I) Small sight-window: If it has a small sight-window on the screen, this
knob is unique purpose to move the scroll cursor to the upward/downward
I directions.
2) Digital data column: It could be directly key-in the data by an alphanumeric

!!:J'
key after choosing the column, also it is available to press down the Enter

key of then to increase I decrease the value by turning the

shuttle knob of

I
3) Function selection column: To press down the enter key of !J prior

to tum the shuttle knob of after choosing the function

selection or to utilize either of the dual keys of II +

I or

function.
+ instead of this shuttle knob to use the

I 4) Soft key column: It could be scrolling the cursor to the white background
color of the parameter column.

1.6 Dual keys operation

II :
Each dual key in accordance with an unlike function in use describes as below:
~:~~~~~;~n selection key within 2-kind of the pwposes as below

I I) Menu display column quick move to the upward direction.

2) The multi-function selection auxiliary keys to select the pop-up

I !!:J
function item to the upward direction after pressing down those

dual keys, then to confirm by the confirmation key of

to end the command by choice of the right selection.

Multi-function selection key within 2-kind of the purposes as below
descriptions.
1) Menu display column quick move to the downward direction.
2) The multi-function selection auxiliary keys to select the pop-up

LComputer Panel
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
1-7
9001 CE
'.,0," ' , , . 1_,0'1
,~~,O""

,CDC200owiN Operation Manual

P1
function item to the downward direction after pressing down those

dual keys, then to confirm by the confirmation key of

to end the command by choice of the right selection.

11+II: Spare multi-function keys.

: Spare multi-function keys.

fI: Spare multi-function keys.

II: Spare multi-function keys.

.II II·
, :,+,'~'"
1) Spare multi-function keys
.': 2) "Split Nut Unlock" manual operation keys, please refer to the section
of"2.13 High-pressure cylinder & Split nut cylinder setting".

+11: Spare multi-function keys.

11
1) Spare multi-function keys
: 2) "Split Nut Lock" manual operation keys, please refer to the section of
'"- " ., "2.13 High-pressure cylinder & Split nut cylinder setting" .

. 1) Spare multi-function keys

,·2) "Hydraulic Shut-off Nozzle Open" manual operation keys.

II
,

: Spare multi-function keys.

11
+ .
1) Spare multi-function keys. .
·2) "High-pressure Cylinder Overstroke Release" manual operation keys.

'11
,i.....-,' ",'" ,
· "Safe Operation Speed Down START" function keys only valid in the
· manual mode, please refer to the section of"2.53".

II · "Safe Operation Speed Down STOP" function keys, please refer to the
· section of"2.53".

User path-I setup by memorizing the presence menu name in use into
"Fl" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

II
I.Computer Panel
.
Invoke the memories from "Fl" field, please refer to the section of"2.1" .

1-8
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

Cancel the menu name from the memorized "F 1" field at the user path-I,
please refer to the section of"2.1".

I User path-2 setup by memorizing the presence menu name in use into
"F2" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".
I
Invoke the memories from "F2" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

I Cancel the menu name from the memorized "F2" field at the user path-2,
please refer to the section of"2.1".
I User path-3 setup by memorizing the presence menu name in use into

I "F3" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

Invoke the memories from "F3" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".
I
Cancel the menu name from the memorized "F3" field at the user path-3,
I please refer to the section of"2.1".

User path-4 setup by memorizing the presence menu name in use into
I "F4" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

I Invoke the memories from "F4" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

I Cancel the menu name from the memorized "F4" field at the user path-4,
please refer to the section of"2.1".

User path-5 setup by memorizing the presence menu name in use into
"F5" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

Invoke the memories from "F5" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

I Cancel the menu name from the memorized "F5" field at the user path-5,
please refer to the section of"2.1".

I User path-6 setup by memorizing the presence menu name in use into
"F6" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

I Invoke the memories from "F6" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

I Cancel the menu name from the memorized "F6" field at the user path-6,
please refer to the section of"2.1".
I I.Computer Panel 1·9 (S.O
9001 C· E·•..1400'1
.. 'SO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

User path-7 setup by memorizing the presence menu name in use into
"F7" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

Invoke the memories from "F7" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

Cancel the menu name from the memorized "F7" field at the user path-7,
please refer to the section of"2.1".

User path-8 setup by memorizing the presence menu name in use into
"F8" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

Invoke the memories from "F8" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

Cancel the menu name from the memorized "F8" field at the user path-8,
please refer to the section of"2.1".

User path-9 setup by memorizing the presence menu name in use into
"F9" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

Invoke the memories from "F9" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

Cancel the menu name from the memorized "F9" field at the user path-9,
please refer to the section of"2.1".

User path-IO setup by memorizing the presence menu name in use into
"FlO" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

Invoke the memories from "FW" field, please refer to the section of"2.1".

Cancel the menu name from the memorized "FlO" field at the user path-l 0,
please refer to the section of"2.1".

: Menu display column quick move to the leftward direction ..

: Menu display column quick move to the rightward direction.

l.Computer Panel 1·10

MOt· CE
ISO . 14001
ISO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
1.7 Motor operation keys

I
I "Motor START" operation key, the LED light on the upper left of this button will
be getting at "ON" status after running the pump motor normally, but it is not
I allowed turning "ON" the pump motor under the auto modes.
"Motor STOP" operation key, after pressing down this button, the LED light on

I the upper left of will be getting at "OFF" status, but it is not allowed

turning "OFF" the pump motor under the auto modes.

I 1.8 Manualmenuswitchover operation

I
I 1.8.1 It will be automatically switchover to the main menu (0) Manual Mode on the screen after
finishing the system self-testing. The bottom yellow background row is illustrated with the text
I according to the menu name that it could be switchover to the intended menu in time by the
correspondingfunction key of Fl ...FlO as desired. for example: If pressing down the function key

I of under the main menu (0) Manual Mode, the menu will be switchover to the Mold

Open/ ClampSetting menu, the related descriptions of each function key is described as below:
I •
. "Help" auxiliary key, it could be displaying the menu page application explanation
. by pressing down this key if there is no cursor appears in everywhere on the entire
menu, if the whole menu appears the cursor, it could displaying the application
I explanation or an input value range of the sited column by pressing down this key.
Quick menu switchover direct to the screen bottom menu name by the function

I selection key of"FI", please refer to the section of"2.1".

Quick menu switchover direct to the screen bottom menu name by the function
selection key of"F2", please refer to the section of"2.1".
I Quick menu switchover direct to the screen bottom menu name by the function
selection key of"F3", please refer to the section of"2.1".
I Quick menu switchover direct to the screen bottom menu name by the function
selection key of "F4", please refer to the section of"2.1".
I Quick menu switchover direct to the screen bottom menu name by the function
selection key of"F5", please refer to the section of"2.1".
I Quick menu switchover direct to the screen bottom menu name by the function
selection key of "F6", please refer to the section of"2.1".
I I.Computer Panel 1-11 ISO ('E' ISO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0 '"' " 14(1)1

,CDC200owiN Operation Manual

Quick menu switchover direct to the screen bottom menu name by the function
selection key of"F7", please refer to the section of"2.1".

Quick menu switchover direct to the screen bottom menu name by the function
selection key of"F8", please refer to the section of"2.1".

Quick menu switchover direct to the screen bottom menu name by the function
selection key of"F9", please refer to the section of"2.1".

Quick menu switchover direct to the screen bottom menu name by the function
selection key of"FIO", please refer to the section of"2.1" ..

• : Switchover the present menu to the operation monitor menu.

1.8.2 Below whole table of menu name & no for the reference only

A) Common user application menu

,,' >,
',No" r ;\lqf:' ~1~;;(~;2W'Ii j'~lir lf~~~~)·,,\';
MenU Name ,), "" 'i\ i,;Level !W .' ,,chal'~er ,~,!\"~<i' .

101 BOOT (Welcome with AP) 0 See section of2.1

0 Manual Mode 0 See section of2.2
16 Cycle Monitoring Review 0 See section of 2.3
159 Product Information , 0 See section of 2.4
1 Mold Open / Clamp Setting 0 See section of 2.5
3 Ejector Setting 0 See section of2.6
132 Core 1-4 Pulling Setting 0 See section of 2.7
135 Core 5-8 Pulling Setting 0 See section of 2.8
6 Unscrew Devices Setting 0 See section of2.9
156 Air Blower Setting 0 See section of2.10
7 Modal Thickness Adjustment 0 See section of2.11
158 Mold Change Adjustment , 0 See section of2.12
150 Lock-up Devices Setting 0 See section of2.13
8 Injection Setting 0 See section of2.14
17 Plasticising / Decompression Setting 0 See section of2.15
136 Carriage Setting 0 See section of2.16
37 Auto Purge Setting 0 See section of2.17
157 Mold Shut-off Valve + Sequence Valve 1-2 Setting 0 See section of 2.20
21 Barrel Temperature Setting 0 See section of2.21
73 Common Plastic Temperature Setting 0 See section of 2.22
22 Weekly TIMER Setting 0 See section of 2.23
64 Temperature Setting Curve 0 See section of 2.24
96 Temperature Record Curve 0 See section of 2.25
87 Mold Temperature 1-32 Setting 0 See section of2.26
88 Mold Temperature 33-64 Setting 0 See section of2.26
10 Mold No Setting 0 See section of2.27

1.Computer Panel l-ll

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 ,
:CDC200owiN Operation Manual

I .N
~~i. · IjiJ,~~\;!;L
0·....
11
~.T
eJ'\'0'
" , .iii;"'!iliff.'>··

Quality Record Setting

...... ')"'i;f1:'~tt:
y."t, 4l\1enu .Name ;' "'V;;'~:';~.;''';4' , Level I';~l~;~jj!~:,S:i~;t'
0
Cli:;····, ,,;i~!:ri0,;b
._,apte~;".;
See section of 2.28
<0

148 Quality Control Setting 0 See section of2.29

24 SPC Diagram 0 See section of2.30
25 Malfunction Record 0 See section of2.31
27 Parameter Modified Record 0 See section of2.32
31 Input Monitoring Review 0 See section of 2.33
32 Output Monitoring Review 0 See section of2.34
38 Function Selection 0 See section of2.38
14 Spare Speed / Pressure Setting 0 See section of2.39
40 Spare Time Setting 0 See section of 2.40
39 Spare Counter Setting 0 See section of2.41
13 Interface Setting 0 See section of2.42
94 User Level Key-in Menu 0 See section of2.43
122 iChen System (Optional Function) 0 See section of2.55.1
41 Lubrication System Setting 0 See section of2.47
143 Periodical Maintenance Setting 0 See section of2.48

I B) Maintenance management adjustment application menu

When to use the below application menu, please login the user level pass thought the
menu (13) Interface Setting vides the section of 2.43 at first, it is able to operate the
menu content in accordance with the user level.

I Menu
95
':s,: .. :'.!,,;,':'~~,
User Login Authority Review
Menu Name ", ;,,;:,i'
Level e. +,0i;Cliapte'r .;:~iJ;j;.;:.
. c. . '", .•... "

See section of 2.44

."."f>

233 iChen Modal Manager (Optional Function) 1 See section of2.55.2

12 PLC Diagnostic 2 See section of2.45
15 Home Position Reset Menu 2 See section of2.46
30 Time Monitoring Review 1 2 See section of2.49
66 Time Monitoring Review 2 2 See section of2.49
67 Time Monitoring Review 3 2 See section of 2.49
29 Counter Monitoring Review I 2 See section of 2.50
19 Injection SpeedlPressure Outline 3 See section of2.18
I 34
33
Set Relay Review
Keep Relay Review
3
3
See
See
section
section
of 2.35
of2.36

I 28
68
Relay Monitoring Review
Time Monitoring Review 4
3
4
See section
See section of 2.39
of2.37

26 Product Information Record 4 See section of2.51

I 54
131
Temperature Calibration Review
User Choice Information
4
4
See
See
section
section
of 2.52
of 2.53

I 192 User Hardware Option 4 See section of 2.54

I I.Computer Panel 1-13

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

1.9 Operationmodes
I

Barrel heating mode selection key. It must be collocated with the temperature
mode at "~£" for a necessity control on the menu (21) Barrel Temperature
Setting. If it is selected by "OFF" or "TIMER" modes, this button will be in vain
at that time. If it is selected by "Heating" mode, the LED light on the upper left of
this button will be getting at "ON" status or to select it by "Keep" mode, the LED
light on the upper left of this button will be flashing after pressing down this key,
please vides the description in the section of"2.21".

Manual operation mode selection key. The LED light on the upper left of this
button will be getting at "ON" status when the controller in manual mode.

Il
Semi-auto operation mode selection key. The LED light on the upper left of this
button will be getting at "ON" status after pressing down this key. After finishing
one cycle under the semi-auto mode, this button will be switchover to the flashing
status and waiting the user / operator to reset the command for the next cyclic
sequence.

Automatic operation mode selection key. The LED light on the upper left of this
button will be getting at "ON" status after pressing down this key.

l.Computer Panel 1-14 •so

9001','
C'E 14001
ISO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
2 Operational Menu
2.1 Welcomewith AP
I

I
I
Menu (101) Welcome with AP
It will be appearing a welcome menu (101) about 10 seconds for the system self-testing after
switching "ON" the power, then to automatically switchover to the operation monitor main menu.
I 2.1.1 Menu common content

I
2.0perational Menu
August 27, 2010 Rel'ision:2.0
2-1 UIO
$001 CE ..1·4001
. ISO

CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

A) AAAAAAAA: Display the "Current Menu Name" in use.

B) MMMMMM: "Message Information" display field.
B.a) Display the message of "BBBB/CCIDD(E)FF:GG H[J]" under the normal condition, the
content is described as below:
BBBB: Display the current "Year" in A. D.
CC: Display the current "Month".
DD: Display the "Date" on Today.
E: Display the "Week" on Today.
FF:GG: Display the current" Time".
H: Display the user name to login this machine at present.
. the user level to login this machine at present.

B.b) I

C) K: Display an icon of the current operation mode on the machine at present.

Manual operation mode.

Semi-auto operation mode.

Automatic operation mode.

D) L: Display an icon of the hinting message of the machine periodic maintenance.

Normal mode.

Maintenance mode. If the periodic maintenance time is reaching by the stipulated

date, at this time, it has to carry out the periodic maintenance calibration job, please
refer to the section of"2.48".
E) P: Display an icon of the motor RUN status.
Motor is not RUN yet.

Motor RUN means the start-up complete.

2.0perational Menu 2-2

8001 CE·.·14OG1
..0 ... ISO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 ,CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
F) Q: Spare message display.
G) R: Display the production job status by choice of iChen network.
H) S: Display an icon for joining with the iChen network production system coalition status.

'III: Disjoin.
I ~: Joining OK.
Dis la an icon to join with the iChen network lJ'U<UUo.;'L1UII system coalition status, the

L1:B is shown as the right on-line or the

the section of"2.55 iChen network production management system".

I Display an alternative of the machine "Job Mode" status in the iChen n..hlJnrlrl
production system coalition status, please vides the section of "2.55
network " -

I
2.1.1.2 Screen beneath user path application field explanation

I
I
I
A) System default path explanation.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-3 ISO (E 1$0
9001·. ··14001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

II·
A.a) 11: Display an application menu name in default just to switchover direct to this menu

name by pressing down the corresponding function selection key of

A.b) J2: Display an application menu name in default just to switchover direct to this menu

name by pressing down the corresponding function selection key of II.

II·
A.c) 13: Display an application menu name in default just to switchover direct to this menu

name by pressing down the corresponding function selection key of

A.d) J4: Display an application menu name in default just to switchover direct to this menu

name by pressing down the corresponding function selection key of II.

A.e) J5: Display an application menu name in default just to switchover direct to this menu

name by pressing down the corresponding function selection key of II·

II.
A.t) J6: Display an application menu name in default just to switchover direct to this menu

name by pressing down the corresponding function selection key of

A.g) 17: Display an application menu name in default just to switchover direct to this menu

name by pressing down the corresponding function selection key of

A.h) J8: Display an application menu name in default just to switchover direct to this menu

name by pressing down the corresponding function selection key of

A. i) J9: Display an application menu name in default just to switchover direct to this menu

name by pressing down the corresponding function selection key of

110: Display an application menu name in default just to switchover direct to this menu

II.
A.j)

name by pressing down the corresponding function selection key of

B) User path defmition explanation, every user could be freely specifying the own user path
by himself after login.
B.a)
K!: :::: I :::::~h:e~:r o:eime:u name by :re::~::in:o::e t::::S:::i::

II II ' + the "K!" will be canceling I becoming to the blank on the

screen. If the user wants to defme an application menu, please select the menu

according to the system set path by pressing down those keys of

under this menu for redefming the display content of"KI" field.
II II +

2.0perational Menu 2-4 '.15. () ('

9001.
E..14001
1$ ...00.·..
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
B.b) K2: Display / Invoke the user defining menu name by pressing down the corresponding

I
function selection keys of II II· + If pressing down those keys of

II II' + the "K2" will be canceling I becoming to the blank on tbe

screen. If the user wants to define an application menu, please select the menu

according to tbe system set path by pressing down those keys of II II +

under this menu for redefining the display content of"K2" field.

II II.
B.c) IG: Display / Invoke the user defining menu name by pressing down the corresponding
I function selection keys of + If pressing down those keys of

, the "IG"will be canceling / becoming to the blank on the

II
screen. If the user wants to define an application menu, please select the menu
I according to the system set path by pressing down those keys of +
under this menu for redefining the display content of"IG" field.
B.d)

II II·
K4: Display / Invoke the user defining menu name by pressing down the corresponding

I function selection keys of + If pressing down those keys of

II II ' + the "K4" will be canceling I becoming to the blank on the

screen. If the user wants to defme an application menu, please select the menu

I according to the system set path by pressing down those keys of II II +

under this menu for redefining the display content of "K4" field.
I B.e) K5: Display / Invoke the user defining menu name by pressing down the corresponding

I
function selection keys of II II. + If pressing down those keys of

II II' + the "K5" will be canceling I becoming to the blank on the

I screen. If the user wants to define an application menu, please select the menu

according to the system set path by pressing down those keys of II +

under this menu for redefining the display content of"K5" field.
B.t) K6: Display / Invoke the user defining menu name by pressing down the corresponding
I function selection keys of + II . If pressing down those keys of

I , the "K6" will be canceling / becoming to the blank on the

screen. If the user wants to define an application menu, please select the menu
I 2.0perational Menu 2-5 C· ·E··1,4001
lSO .
$OOt ISO
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0

•
CDC2000WIN Operation Manual

according to the system set path by pressing down those keys of II II +

under this menu for redefining the display content of"K6" field.

II
B.g) K7: Display / Invoke the user defining menu name by pressing down the corresponding

function selection keys of +. . If pressing down those keys of

, the "K7" will be canceling / becoming to the blank on the

screen. If the user wants to define an application menu, please select the menu

according to the system set path by pressing down those keys of II + I

under this menu for redefining the display content of"K7" field.

II II·
B.h) K8: Display / Invoke the user defining menu name by pressing down the corresponding

function selection keys of + If pressing down those keys of

II II ' + the "K8" will be canceling I becoming to the blank on the

II II
screen. If the user wants to define an application menu, please select the menu

according to the system set path by pressing down those keys of +

under this menu for redefining the display content of"K8" field.

II II·
B.i) K9: Display / Invoke the user defining menu name by pressing down the corresponding

function selection keys of + If pressing down those keys of

, the "K9" will be canceling / becoming to the blank on the

screen. If the user wants to define an application menu, please select the menu

according to the system set path by pressing down those keys of II II +

under this menu for redefining the display content of"K9" field.

II II·
B.j) KIO: Display / Invoke the user defining menu name by pressing down the corresponding

function selection keys of + If pressing down those keys of

II + , the "KIO" will be canceling I becoming to the blank on the

screen. If the user wants to define an application menu, please select the menu

according to the system set path by pressing down those keys of II +

under this menu for redefining the display content of"KIO" field.

2.0perational Menu 2-6 'iSO

9OOt·
(.E··14001
'SO
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 2.2 Operation monitor menu

I
I
I
I
Menu (OA) Semi Auto Mode / Full Auto Mode

It will be displaying the manual operation setting after pressing down the key of , at

I this time, the LED light on the upper left of this button will be getting at "ON" status, so far that it
is unnecessary to press down this key by booting the computer and it will be automatically lying in
the manual mode real time. It could be switchover to this menu by pressing down those keys either
I of or from the user if it does not display this menu too.

I!:I
To move the cursor to the modified parameter location and to key-in the intended parameter

within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of to end the

command, the related information of the this menu is described as below:

I A) AAA: 1st zone (nozzle) temperature setting value. If the background color is displaying
the cyan color that it is the meaning of "Interval" control by percentage within a
maximum value of99.

I B) HHH: Display the actual temperature at the 1st zone (nozzle) in option. If it is shown as
">B<" on the screen that it is represented the thermocouple is broken in this zone.
If the background color at "AAA" column is changing to the cyan color that it will
be appearing the signal of "---" in here and it is represented the proportional
I C)
"Interval" contro I.
BBB: 2nd zone (T2) temperature setting value. If the background color is displaying the
cyan color that it is the meaning of "Interval" control by percentage within a
I D)
maximum value of99.
JJJ: Display the actual temperature at the 2nd zone (T2).If it is shown as ">B<" on the
screen that it is represented the thermocouple is broken in this zone. If the
I background color at "BBB" column is changing to the cyan color that it will be
appearing the signal of"---" in here and it is represented the proportional "Interval"
control.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-7 CE·
'$0 . 1~1
9OOf· .lSO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

E) ccc: 3Td zone (T3) temperature setting value. If the background color is displaying the
cyan color that it is the meaning of "Interval" control by percentage within a
maximum value of99.
F) KKK: Display the actual temperature at the 3Td zone (T3).If it is shown as ">B<" on the
screen that it is represented the thermocouple is broken in this zone. If the
background color at "CCC" column is changing to the cyan color that it will be
appearing the signal of "---" in here and it is represented the proportional
"Interval" control.
G) DOD: 4th zone (T4) temperature setting value. If the background color is displaying the
cyan color that it is the meaning of "Interval" control by percentage within a
maximum value of99.
H) LLL: Display the actual temperature at the 4th zone (T4).If it is shown as ">B<" on the
screen that it is represented the thermocouple is broken in this zone. If the
background color at "DOD" column is changing to the cyan color that it will be
appearing the signal of "---" in here and it is represented the proportional
"Interval" control.
I) EEE: 5thzone (T5) temperature setting value. If the background color is displaying the
cyan color that it is the meaning of "Interval" control by percentage within a
maximum value of99.
1) MMM: Display the actual temperature at the 5th zone (T5).If it is shown as ">B<" on the
screen that it is represented the thermocouple is broken in this zone. If the
background color at "EEE" column is changing to the cyan color that it will be
appearing the signal of "---" in here and it is represented the proportional
"Interval" control.
K) FFF: 6th zone (T6) temperature setting value. If the background color is displaying the
cyan color that it is the meaning of "Interval" control by percentage within a
maximum value of99.
L) NNN: Display the actual temperature at the 6thzone (T6).If it is shown as ">B<" on the
screen that it is represented the thermocouple is broken in this zone. If the
background color at "FFF" column is changing to the cyan color that it will be
appearing the signal of "---" in here and it is represented the proportional
"Interval" control.
M) GGG: 7thzone (T7) temperature setting value. If the background color is displaying the
cyan color that it is the meaning of "Interval" control by percentage within a
maximum value of99.
N) PPP: Display the actual temperature at the 7th zone (T7).If it is shown as ">B<" on the
screen that it is represented the thermocouple is broken in this zone. If the
background color at "GGG" column is changing to the cyan color that it will be
appearing the signal of"---" in here and it is represented the proportional "Interval"
control.

0) YYY: Display the actual oils temperature.

P) QQQQQ: Display the actual "Analog Output" motion pressure setting value at present.
Q) RRRRR: Display the actual "Analog Output" motion speed setting value at present.
R) SSSSS: Display the actual spare "Analog Output" plasticising motion back-pressure
setting value at present.
S) TTm: Display the actual spare "Analog Output" setting value at A04 at present.

2.0perational Menu 2-8

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I T)
U)
UUUUU: Display the actual spare "Analog Output" setting value at A05 at present.
VVVVV: Display the actual spare "Analog Output" setting value at A06 at present.
V) WWWWW: Display the actual spare "Analog Output" setting value at A07 at present.
I W)
X)
XXXXX: Display the actual spare "Analog Output" setting value at A08 at present.
aaaa.a: Display the "Current Position" of the mold clamping.
Y) bbbb.b: Display the "Current Position" of the injection.
Z) cccc.c: Display the "Current Position" of the ejector.
AA) ddddd: Display the "Screw RPM" during the plasticising movement.
BB) eeeee: Display the current oils pressure value in here when installing the pressure
transducer on the machine (Optional)
CC) fff Display the "Current Mold No." in use at present.

I 2.3

I
I

Menu (16) Cycle Monitoring Review

This menu function is displaying the machine action time monitor of the every motion under
the auto modes, it will be clearing the individual actual time column when starting the auto cyclic,
the related information of this menu (16) Cycle Monitoring Review is described as below:
A) AAA.AA: Display the whole action time among of the mold clamping stroke included the
"Core In" & "Unscrew In" motions if possessive.

I B)
C)
D)
BBB.BB: Display an actual action time ofthe "Core 1 In" in operation.
CCC.CC: Display an actual action time of the "Unscrew In" in operation.
DDD.DD: Display an actual action time of the "Core 2 In" in operation.
E) EEE.EE: Display an actual action time ofthe "Carriage Forward" in operation.
I F)
G)
FFF.FF: Display an actual action time of the "Injection" in operation.
GGGGG: Display an actual action time of the "Injection-holding" in operation.
H) HHHH.H: Display the delay time before the "Plasticising" action.
I I)
1)
JJJJJ: Display an actual action time of the "Plastic ising" in operation.
KKK.KK: Display an actual action time of the "Carriage Backward" in operation.
K) LLL.LL: Display the upward action time of the "Cooling Time" in operation.
I L) MMM.MM: Display the whole action time among of the mold opening stroke included
the "Core Out" & "Unscrew Out" motions ifpossessive.
M) NNN.NN: Display an actual action time of the "Core 2 Out" in operation.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-9
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

N) PPP.PP: Display an actual action time of the "Unscrew Out" in operation.
0) QQQ.QQ: Display an actual action time ofthe "Core lOut" in operation.
P) RRR.RR: Display the whole action time of the "Ejector" in operation.
Q) SSS.SS: Display the upward time of the "Recycle Time" in operation.
R) TTIT.IT: Display the upward action time of the "Cycle Time" in operation.
S) UUUUU: Display the grand total quantities ofthe modulo production / yield.
T) VVVVV: Display the grand total quantities of the defect production / yield.
U) WWWWW: Display the grand total quantities of the batch production / yield.

2.4 Production Infonnation

Menu (159) Production Information

I!:I
To move the cursor to the modified parameter location and to key-in the intended parameter

within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of to end the

command.

2.4.1 Production information code as below description

A) AAAAA: The grand total of the modulo quantities / yield setting value as per batch
production.
B) BBBBB: Display the grand total of the produced quantities / yield.
C) LLLLLL: It is a function selection for counting the modulo quantities / yield. To tum the

shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of !:I for

I!:J
selecting 2-mode of (I) "Count" (2) "No Use", then to press down the

confirming key of to end the command.

2.0peratiooal Menu 2-10 1$0 C: E·· ,'so

fi01 ... ·141)01
August 27, 20]0 Revisioo:2.0
I CDC200DWiN Operation Manual
D) CCCCC: The grand total of the defect quantities / yield setting value generated by the
trouble shooting under the auto modes.
E) DDDDD: Display the grand total of the defect quantities / yield.
F) MMMMMM: It is a function selection for counting the defect / yield under the

I auto modes. To turn the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter

key of I!l for selecting 2-mode of (I) "Count" (2) "No Use", then to

I press down the confirming key of I!l to end the command.

G) EEEEE: The grand total of the batch quantities / yield setting value.

I H)
I)
FFFFF: Display the grand total of the batch quantities / yield in this batch production.
NNNNNN: It is a function selection for counting the batch quantities / yield. To turn the

I shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of I!l for

I
I!:I
selecting 2-mode of (1) "Count" (2) "No Use", then to press down the

confirming key of to end the command.

I 1) PPPPPPPP: It is a soft key for resetting the grand total records to the zero.
K) QQQQQQQQQQ: Display the grand total quantities / yield.

I L)
M)
RRRRR: Display the grand total machine booting time within the unit of the "Hour".
ss: Display the grand total machine booting time within the unit of the "Minute".
N) TTTTT: Display the grand total machine auto running time within the unit of the "Hour".
I 0)
P)
UU: Display the grand total machine auto running time within the unit of the "Minute".
VVVVV: Display the grand total motor running time within the unit of the "Hour".
Q) WW: Display the grand total motor running time within the unit of the "Minute".
I R)
S)
GGGGG: It is an alarm time setting value for monitoring an automatic machine cycle time.
HHHH.H: Display one cycle time in action of this production.
T) JJJJ.J: It is a buffer time to delay the next clamping sequence start after fmishing the ejector
motion under the auto modes.
U) KKKK.K: Display the recycle time.

I V)
W)
aaaaaaaaaa: Display the scheduling quantities in the iChen production management system.
bbbbbbbbbb: Display the produced quantities on this machine transferred from the iChen
production management system coalition.

I X) cccccccc: Display the current "Job Mode" in action when joining to the iChen network
production system coalition.
Y) ddddd: When joining to the iChen network production system coalition, it displays the

I 2.4.2
production quantities if the "Job Mode" is not selected by "Work"
Moduloproductioncounterworkout

I m'
It will be getting the modulo production / yield count
'W'""F~;8
function when selecting the "'§~1m
~1l'~"""'~?
by "Count" at "LLLLLL". If the current quantities of '~B' at "BBBBB" is reaching to the
".~%~

setting value, the computer will be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0965>Production Target
I 2.0perational Menu 2-11 ISO
MOt····C·EI:SO
··14001
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

Is Completed" on the top screen and the machine will be automatically stopping the motion after
finishing one cycle.

2.4.3 Delectproductioncounterworkout

It will be getting the defect production / yield count ~nction "~m.t~~2i~e.~fthe "eJm&W'
by "Count" at "MMMMMM" and further to select the mtend '1i>~~£il&\i" at "ON" status
(Available multi-option). If the current quantities of' I 0e i' at "DDDDD" is reaching to the setting
value, the computer will be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0966>Defect Product Too
Much Inspection" on the top screen and the machine will be automatically stopping the motion after
finishing one cycle.
2.4.4 Batchproductioncounterworkout

It will be getting the batch production / yi~~ co~t function by c~oice of the
"Count" at "LLLLLL" and further to select the '"~~'
"m~'
by
by "Count" at "NNNNNN". It will be
I
counting the batch quantities of "FFFFF" will be automatically plus +1 when the current quantities
of "BBBBB" is reaching to the setting value, the computer will be appearing the alarm message of
"Alarm0940>Batch Production Target Is Completed" on the top screen and the machine will be
automatically stopping the motion after fmishing one cycle. Even if the batch- counting function is
converting to the product, but it will be not counting the grand total quantities when the modulo
quantities / yield is selected the "~Im:i~"
of Product by "No Use" at "LLLLLL" at that time.

2.5 Mold open I clamp setting

2.5.1 Togglemachinemold clamp& mold open

Menu (IA) Mold Open / Clamp Setting (Toggle)

I!:I
To move the cursor to the modified parameter location and to key-in the intended

parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of to end

the command, the mold clamping information of this menu (IA) Mold Open / Clamp Setting
(Toggle) is described as below:

2.0perational Menu 2-12

August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 2.5.1.1 Togglemold clamping setup

A}

in here and to turn the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter

I
I
key of I!J for selecting the intended "Action Stage" from 4" stage to 6"

stage, then to confirm by the confirming key of I!:I to end the command

after selection.
B} AA: The speed setting value of the "1 st stage mold clamping" (Step I)
C) BBBBB: The pressure setting value of the "1 st stage mold clamping" (Step I).
D} CCCC.C: The ending position setting value of the "1 st stage mold clamping" (Step I).
E} DD: The speed setting value of the "2nd stage mold clamping" (Step 2).
F} EEEEE: The pressure setting value of the "2nd stage mold clamping" (Step 2).
G} FFFF.F: The ending position setting value of the "2nd stage mold clamping" (Step 2).
H} GG: The speed setting value of the "3rd stage mold clamping" (Step 3). It wills no
I I}
display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".
HHHHH: The pressure setting value of the "3rd stage mold clamping" (Step 3). It wills
no display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".
1) JJJJ.J: The ending position setting value of the "3rd stage mold clamping" (Step 3). It
wills no display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".

I K} KK: The speed setting value of the "4th stage mold clamping" (Step 4). It wills no
display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" or "5 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".
L} LLLLL: The pressure setting value of the "4th stage mold clamping" (Step 4). It wills no

I M)
display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" or "5 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".
PPPP.P: The ending position setting value of the "4th stage mold clamping" (Step 4). It
wills no display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" or "5 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".
N} QQ: The speed setting value of the "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs).
O} RRRRR: The pressure setting value of the "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs).
P} MMM.M: It is applied for the stroke-inspection time setting for the "low-pressure stage
I mold clamping" (LowPrs), If the low-pressure movement is not finished
within this time yet, the computer will be appearing the alarm message of
"Alarm0971>Clean-up Foreign Objects Between Mold Halves" on the top
screen, then to stop the mold clamping movement.
Q} SSSSS: The ending position setting of the "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs)
same as the starting position of the "high-pressure stage mold clamping" (HiPrs)
in the beginning that it could be automatically resetting this value by the computer
itself, please put it at "lOOp" in the "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs)
at first, then to manually activate the mold closing movement by simultaneously
I
I
pressing down both of the keys [ !~ [and II till locked up the

molds, at this time, the computer will be automatically resetting ending position

I 2.0perational Menu
of the "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs) ("SSSSSp" value).
2-13
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

•
CDC2000WIN Operation Manual

If this position is setting improperly, it could be damaged the molds when the foreign
objects are remained inside the molds.
R) TT: The speed setting value of the "high-pressure stage mold clamping" (HiPrs).
S} UUUUU: The pressure setting value of the "high-pressure stage mold clamping" (HiPrs).
T) VVVVV: The ending position setting value of the "high-pressure stage mold clamping"
(HiPrs) that it is available to set the range between Op- 60p in accordance with
the machine model.
U) wwwww: It is the necessity molds clamp tonnage setting value on the machine that it will
be automatically converting into the maximum clamping force and modifying
the pressure setting of "UUUUU" to limit the toggle clamping force after
inputting in here.
V} XXXXXXXX: It is a boost function selection. (Must be collocated with the differential
hydraulic loop system.
W) YYYY.Y: It is a special position setting value for the "Synchronous Core In during the
Mold Clamping" function in safe ending position, if the current position of
the mold clamping is smaller than this position that it is the meaning of the
synchronous Core In failure, at this time, the computer will be appearing the
alarm message of "Alarml 032>Synchronous Core In Stroke Is Smaller Than
The Warning Position" on the top screen.
X) uuu.uu: Display the whole action-time among of the mold clamping stroke included the
Core Pulling and the Unscrew Devices by In-action sequences if possessive.
• Clamp stroke switchover position setup condition must be limited qqqq.q(mm)2':CCCC.C(mm)
> FFFF.F(mm) > JJJJ.J(mm} 2':PPPP.P(mm) > SSSSS(p)> VVVVV(P).

2.5.1.2 The time sequence chart of the toggle mold clamping

6-stage Mold Clamping Clamp 1 Clamp 2 Clamp 3 Clamp 4 I LowPrs. HiPrs.

(Step I) (Step2j (Step 3) (Step 4)

Clamping Stroke ~ ~ ss

Speed Setup AA DD GG KK QQ IT
Pressure Setup BBBBB EEEEE HHHHH LLLLL RRRRR UUUUU

MMM.M
Low-pr Monitor
I
Ending Position Setup CCCC.C FFFF.F JJJJ.J PPPP.P SSSSS(p) VVVVV(P)

4·stage Mold Clamping Clamp I Clamp 2 LowPrs

Clamping Stroke

Speed Setup AA DD QQ IT
Pressure Setup BBBBB EEEEE RRRRR UUUUU

MMM.M
Low-pr Monitor

Ending Position Setup CCCC.C FFFF.F SSSSS(p) VVVVV(p)

2.0perational Menu 2-14

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I ,CDC200owiN Operation Manual
2.5.1.3 Togglemold opening setup

I!:J
To move the cursor to the modified parameter location and to key-in the intended
I parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of to end

the command .. the mold opening information of this menu (IA) Mold Open / Clamp Setting is
described as below:

A)

cursor in here and to turn the shuttle knob of posterior to

the Enter key of I!:J for selecting the intended "Action Stage" from

3" stage to 5" stage, then to confirm by the confirming key of II!!:J
to end the command after selection.

I B)
C)
aa: The speed setting value of the "1 st stage mold opening" (Break).
bbbbb: The pressure setting value of the "1 st stage mold opening" (Break).
D) ccccc: The ending position setting value of the "1st stage mold opening" (Break).
I E) dd: The speed setting value of the "2nd stage mold opening" (Step 2).
F) eeeee: The pressure setting value of the "2nd stage mold opening" (Step 2).

I G)
H)
ffff.f: The ending position setting value of the "2nd stage mold opening" (Step 2).
gg: The speed setting value of the "3rd stage mold opening" (Step 3). It wills no display
in use when it is selected by "3 Step" or "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
I) hhhhh: The pressure setting value of the "3rd stage mold opening" (Step 3). It wills no
display in use when it is selected by "3 Step" or "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
1) jjjj.j: The ending position setting value of the "3rd stage mold opening" (Step 3). It wills
no display in use when it is selected by "3 Step" or "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
K) kk: The speed setting value of the "4th stage mold opening" (Step 4). It wills no display in
use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
L) 11111: The pressure setting value of the "4th stage mold opening" (Step 4). It wills no
display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
M) mmmm.m: The ending position setting value of the "4th stage mold opening" (Step 4). It
wills no display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
N) nn: The speed setting value of the "last stage mold opening" (Slow).
I 0)
P)
ppppp: The pressure setting value of the "last stage mold opening" (Slow).
qqqq.q: The ending position setting value of the "last stage mold opening" (Slow).
Q) m.tt: Display the whole action-time among of the mold opening stroke included the
Core Pulling and the Unscrew Devices by Out-action sequences if possessive.
• Open stroke switchover position setup condition must be limited qqqq.q(mm)> mmmm.m(mm)
I ~ jjjj.j(mm):2: ffff.f(mm)> ccccc(p)> SSSSS(P).

I 2.0perational Menu 2-15

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

,CDC200owiN Operation Manual

2.5.1.4 The time sequencechart 0/ the toggle mold opening
5-stage Mold Opening Slow Open 4 Open 3 Open 2 Break
(Step d) (Step 3) (Step Z)

Opening Stroke

Speed Setup nn gg aa
Pressure Setup ppppp lIIll hhhhh eeeee bbbbb

Ending Position Setup qqqq.q mmmm.m jjjj.j ffff.f ccccc (P)

3-stage Mold Opening Slow Open 2 Break

(Slep2)

Opening Stroke

Speed Setup nn dd aa
Pressure Setup ppppp eeeee bbbbb

Ending Position Setup qqqq.q fffff ccccc (P)

Menu (IB) Mold Open / Clamp Setting (Hydraulic Clamping)

I!:I
To move the cursor to the modified parameter location and to key-in the intended parameter

within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of to end the

command, the mold clamping information of this menu (lB) Mold Open / Clamp Setting (HC) is
described as below:
2.0perational Menu 2-16
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 I ·.CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 2.5.2.1 Hydraulic Clamping mold clamping setup

It is an "Action Stage" selections of the mold c

I A) vvvvvvvv: ing. To move the cursor

in here and to turn the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter

key Of!!l for selectingthe intended"Action Stage"from 4~ stageto 6~

stage.then to confirmby the confirmingkey of I!J to end the command

after selection.
B) AA: The speed setting value of the "1 st stage mold clamping" (Step 1)
C) BBBBB: The pressure setting value ofthe "1 st stage mold clamping" (Step I).
D) CCCC.C: The ending position setting value of the "1 st stage mold clamping" (Step 1).
E) DD: The speed setting value of the "2nd stage mold clamping" (Step 2).
F) EEEEE: The pressure setting value of the "2nd stage mold clamping" (Step 2).
G) FFFF.F: The ending position setting value of the "2nd stage mold clamping" (Step 2).

I H)

I)
GG: The speed setting value of the "3rd stage mold clamping" (Step 3). It wills no
display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at ''vvvvvvvv''.
HHHHH: The pressure setting value of the "3rd stage mold clamping" (Step 3). It wills

I 1)
no display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".
JJJJ.J: The ending position setting value of the "3rd stage mold clamping" (Step 3). It
wills no display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "vvvvvvvv",
K) KK: The speed setting value of the "4th stage mold clamping" (Step 4). It wills no
display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" or "5 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".
L) LLLLL: The pressure setting value of the "4th stage mold clamping" (Step 4). It wills no

I M)
display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" or "5 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".
PPPP.P: The ending position setting value of the "4th stage mold clamping" (Step 4). It
wills no display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" or "5 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".

I N)
0)
QQ: The speed setting value of the "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs).
RRRRR: The pressure setting value of the "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs).
P) MMM.M: It is applied for the stroke-inspection time setting for the "low-pressure stage
mold clamping" (LowPrs), If the low-pressure movement is not fmished
within this time yet, the computer will be appearing the alarm message of
"Alann0971>Clean-up Foreign Objects Between Mold Halves" on the top
screen, then to stop the mold clamping movement.
Q) SSSSS: The ending position setting of the "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs)
same as the starting position of the "high-pressure stage mold clamping" (HiPrs)

I in the beginning that it could be automatically resetting this value by the computer
itself, please put it at "lOOp" in the "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs)

I !!I
at first, then to manually activate the mold closing movement by simultaneously

I pressing down both of the keys and II till locked up the

I molds, at this time, the computer will be automatically resetting ending position
ofthe "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs) ("SSSSSp" value).

I 2.0perational Menu 2-17 .SO

8001 CE. 1401)1
'SO
August 27,2010 Revision:2.0

L__ _

CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

If this position is setting improperly, it could be damaged the molds when the foreign
objects are remained inside the molds.

R) TT: The speed setting value of the "high-pressure stage mold clamping" (HiPrs).
S) UUUUU: The pressure setting value of the "high-pressure stage mold clamping" (HiPrs).
T) VVVVV: It is doing the last protection position setting value after forward to lock up the
molds and, the control system will be proceeding the protection if the actual
position of "rrrr.r" is smaller than the setting position after locked up the molds
that it is the meaning of the molds change is uncertain or no molds condition,
please review the mold change adjustment procedures. It is available to set the
range between Op - 60p in accordance with the machine model.
U) WWWWW: It is the necessity molds clamp tonnage setting value on the machine that it will
be automatically converting into the maximum clamping force and modifying
the pressure setting of"UUUUU" after inputting in here.
V) xxxxx.: Display the actual clamping force after locked up the molds in the ending position.
W) XXXXXXXX: It is a boost function selection. (Must be collocated with the differential
hydraulic loop system.
X) YYYY.Y: It is a special position setting value for the "Synchronous Core In during the
Mold Clamping" function in safe ending position, if the current position of
the mold clamping is smaller than this position that it is the meaning of the
synchronous Core In failure, at this time, the computer will be appearing the
alarm message of "Alaml1032>Synchronous Core In Stroke Is Smaller Than
The Warning Position" on the top screen.
Y) uuu.uu: Display the whole action-time among of the mold clamping stroke included the
Core Pulling and the Unscrew Devices by In-action sequences' if possessive.
• Clamp stroke switchover position setup condition must be limited qqqq.q(mm)~CCCC.C(mm)
> FFFF.F(mm) > JJJJ.J(mm) > PPPP.P(mm) > SSSSS(P»VVVVV(P).
2.5.2.2 The time sequencechart of the Hydraulic Clamping mold clamping

LowPrs. HiPrs.
6-stage Mold Clamping CiampI
(Step I)
I
Clamp 2
(Stop 2)
I C::)3
Clamp 4
(Step 4)

Clamping Stroke

Speed Setup AA DD GG KK QQ IT
Pressure Setup BBBBB EEEEE HHHHH LULL RRRRR UUUUU

MMMM
Low-pr Monitor

Ending Position Setu p CCCC.C FFFF.F JJJJ.1 PPPP.P SSSSS(p) WVW(p)

Clamping Force WWWWW

4-stage Mold Clamping Clamp 1 Clamp 2 LowPrs HiPrs

(SI,,,I) (Slep 2)
I
Clamping Stroke ,"

Speed Setup AA DD QQ IT
Pressure Setup BBBBB EEEEE RRRRR UUUUU

MMM.M
Low-pr Monitor

Ending Position Setu p CCCC.C FFFF.F JJJJ,J PPPP.P SSSSS(p) WVW(p)

Clamping Force WWWWW

2.0perational Menu 2-18 ,so

t001, ('E.'14001
ISO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I • CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 2.5.2.3 Hydraulic Clamping mold opening setup

To move the cursor to the modified parameter location and to key-in the intended
I parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of (!I to end

I the command, the mold opening information of this menu (IB) Mold Open / Clamp Setting is
described as below:

I A) wwwwwwww: It is an "Action Stage" selections of the mold

cursor in here and to tum the shuttle knob of posterior to

I the Enter key Of!!:J for selecting the intended "Action Stage" from

I 3" stage to Sili stage, then to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the command after selection.

1!3
I B) yyyyy: After cling the molds to the ending position, it is a leaking pressure to release the
lowest pressure value during the mold opening, then to carry out the actual mold
opening movement.

I C)
D)
aa: The speed setting value of the "1 st stage mold opening" (Break).
bbbbb: The pressure setting value of the "1 st stage mold opening" (Break).
E) ccccc: The ending position setting value of the "1 st stage mold opening" (Break).
I F)
G)
dd: The speed setting value of the "2nd stage mold opening" (Step 2).
eeeee: The pressure setting value of the "2nd stage mold opening" (Step 2).
H) OO.f: The ending position setting value of the "2nd stage mold opening" (Step 2).
I) gg: The speed setting value of the "3rd stage mold opening" (Step 3). It wills no display
in use when it is selected by "3 Step" or "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
1) hhhhh: The pressure setting value of the "3rd stage mold opening" (Step 3). It wills no
I K)
display in use when it is selected by "3 Step" or "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
jjjj.j: The ending position setting value of the "3rd stage mold opening" (Step 3). It wills
no display in use when it is selected by "3 Step" or "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
L) kk: The speed setting value of the "4th stage mold opening" (Step 4). It wills no display
in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".

I M) lllll: The pressure setting value of the "4th stage mold opening" (Step 4). It wills no
display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
N) mmmm.m: The ending position setting value of the "4th stage mold opening" (Step 4). It

I 0)
wills no display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
nn: The speed setting value of the "last stage mold opening" (Slow).
P) ppppp: The pressure setting value of the "last stage mold opening" (Slow).

I Q)
R)
qqqq.q: The ending position setting value of the "last stage mold opening" (Slow).
ttt.tt: Display the whole action-time among of the mold opening stroke included the
Core Pulling and the Unscrew Devices by Out-action sequences if possessive.
I • Open stroke switchover position setup condition must be limited qqqq.q(mm)> mmmm.m(mm)
> .ijjj.j(mm)> ffff.f(mm)> ccccc(P)> SSSSS(P).

I 2.0perational Menu 2-19 fSOC .4001

9001·... ·E....
11'5'5':.<0
·
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

2.5.2.4 The time sequencechart of the Hydraulic Clamping mold opening
5-stage Mold Opening Slow Open 4 Open 3 Open 2 Break Relea se
(Step 4) (Step 3) (Step 2)
,,----
Opening Stroke . -- ~~~"""~ ~~~~'>S
~~~~~~ " ..,' ~
I
Speed Setup nn kk gg dd aa
Pressure Setup ppppp 11111 hhhhh eeeee bbbbb

Actual pressure of the high-pr.cyl yyyyy

Ending Position Setup qqqq.q mmmm.m llii·j ffff.f ccccc (p)

3-stage Mold Opening Slow Open 2 Break Release
(Step 2)
,,----
Opening Stroke

Speed Setup nn dd aa
Pressure Setup ppppp eeeee bbbbb

Actual pressure of the high-pr.cyl yyyyy

Ending Position Setup qqqq.q ffff.f ccccc (P)

2.5.3 Two-platen machine mold clamp & mold open

Menu (IC) Mold Open / Clamp Setting (Two-platen)

!!J
To move the cursor to the modified parameter location and to key-in the intended

parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of to end

the command, the mold clamping information of this menu (IC) Mold Open / Clamp Setting (TP) is
described as below:

2.0perational Menu 2-20 CE··.

."tSO .. 14001
''SO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I ;CDC200owiN Operation Manual

I 2.5.3.1 Two-platen mold clamping setup

A)
I vvvvvvvv: It is an "Action Stage" selections of the mold c ing. To move the cursor

in here and to turn the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter

I
key of I!J fur selecting the intended "Action Stage" from 4fu stage to 6·

I stage, then to confirm by the confirming key of

after selection.
I!l to end the command

B) AA: The speed setting value of the "1 st stage mold clamping" (Step 1)
I C)
D)
BBBBB: The pressure setting value of the "1 st stage mold clamping" (Step 1).
CCCC.C: The ending position setting value of the "1 st stage mold clamping" (Step 1).
E) DD: The speed setting value of the "2nd stage mold clamping" (Step 2).
I F)
G)
EEEEE: The pressure setting value of the "2nd stage mold clamping" (Step 2).
FFFEF: The ending position setting value of the "2nd stage mold clamping" (Step 2).

I H) GG: The speed setting value of the "3rd stage mold clamping" (Step 3). It wills no
display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".
I) HHHHH: The pressure setting value of the "3rd stage mold clamping" (Step 3). It wills

I 1)
no display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".
JJJJ.J: The ending position setting value of the "3rd stage mold clamping" (Step 3). It
wills no display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".

I K) KK: The speed setting value of the "4th stage mold clamping" (Step 4). It wills no
display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" or "5 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".
L) LLLLL: The pressure setting value of the "4th stage mold clamping" (Step 4). It wills no

I M)
display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" or "5 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".
PPPP.P: The ending position setting value of the "4th stage mold clamping" (Step 4). It
wills no display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" or "5 Step" at "vvvvvvvv".
N) QQ: The speed setting value of the "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs).
0) RRRRR: The pressure setting value of the "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs).
P) MMM.M: It is applied for the stroke-inspection time setting for the "low-pressure stage
mold clamping" (LowPrs), If the low-pressure movement is not fmished
within this time yet, the computer will be appearing the alarm message of
"Alarm0971>Clean-up Foreign Objects Between Mold Halves" on the top

I Q)
screen, then to stop the mold clamping movement.
SSSSS: The ending position setting of the "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs)
same as the starting position of the "high-pressure stage mold clamping" (HiPrs)
in the beginning that it could be automatically resetting this value by the computer
itself, please put it at "lOOp" in the "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs)

I !~ I
at first, then to manually activate the mold closing movement by simultaneously

I
I
pressing down both of the keys and II till locked up the

molds, at this time, the computer will be automatically resetting ending position
ofthe "low-pressure stage mold clamping" (LowPrs) ("SSSSSp" value).
I 2.0perational Menu 2-21
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

..
;CDC2000WIN Operation Manual

If this position is setting improperly, it could be damaged the molds when the foreign
objects are remained inside the molds.
R) TT: It will be preceding the last confrrm speed setting value after forward the travel
cylinder to close the molds.
S) UUUUU: It will be preceding the last confirm pressure setting value after forward the
travel cylinder to close the molds.
T) VVVVV: It is doing the last protection position setting value after forward to lock up the
molds and, the control system will be proceeding the protection if the actual
position of "rrrr.r" is smaller than the setting position after locked up the molds
that it is the meaning of the molds change is uncertain or no molds condition,
please review the mold change adjustment procedures. It is available to set the
range between Op~ 60p in accordance with the machine model.
U) XXXXXXXX: It is a boost function selection. (Must be collocated with the differential
hydraulic loop system.
V) YYYY.Y: It is a special position setting value for the "Synchronous Core In during the
Mold Clamping" function in safe ending position, if the current position of
the mold clamping is smaller than this position that it is the meaning of the
synchronous Core In failure, at this time, the computer will be appearing the
alarm message of "Alarm} 032>Synchronous Core In Stroke Is Smaller Than
The Warning Position" on the top screen.
W) uuu.uu: Display the whole action-time among of the mold clamping stroke included the
Core Pulling and the Unscrew Devices by In-action sequences if possessive.
• Clamp stroke switchover position setup condition must be limited qqqq.q(mm) > CCCc.C(mm)
~FFFEF(mm» JJJJ.J(mm)2:PPPP.P(mm)~SSSSS(p»VVVVV(P).

2.5.3.2 Thetime sequencechart 0/ the Two-platen mold clamping

6-stage Mold Clamping Ciampi Clamp 2 Clamp 3 Oamp4 LowPrs. Confirm r;;;-
§

Clamping Stroke
(Step I) (Stcp2)
I (Step3) (Stcp4)
~
+
:t
€
;;
g
Speed Setup AA DD GG KK QQ IT
~
Pressure Setup BBBBB EEEEE HHHHH LULL RRRRR UUUUU E.
~
MMMM !
•
Low-pr Monitor !
I
L__

Ending Position Setu p CCCC.C FFFF.F JJJJ.J PPPP.P SSSSS(p) VWW(p

Mold Lock Confirm (P.S.)

4-stage Mold Clamping Clamp I Clamp 2 LowPrs. Confirm rr

I
;:-
(Step I) (Step2)
~
+
Clamping Stroke ~ ~
~""""'"
Speed Setup AA DD QQ IT f
~
BBBBB RRRRR UUUUU
Pressure Setup EEEEE
!
MMM.M !
..
e
Low-pr Monitor J_
Ending Position Setu p CCCC.C FFFEF JJJJ.J PPPP.P SSSSS(p) VWW(p)
Mold Lock Confirm (P.S.)

2.0perational Menu 2-22 '.S.O.·

.1 C..·..e···f4O(t1
... "S..0'....
:.
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 •
CDC2000WIN Operation Manual

I 2.5.3.3 Two-platen mold opening setup

!!I
To move the cursor to the modified parameter location and to key-in the intended

I parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of to end

the command, the mold opening information of this menu (IC) Mold Open / Clamp Setting is
described as below:

A) wwwwwwww: It is an "Action Stage" selections of the mold

cursor in here and to tum the shuttle knob of posterior to

I
the Enter key Of,., for selecting the intended "Action Stage" from

I
3'" stage to 5" stage, then to confrrm by the confrrming key of !!I
to end the command after selection.
B) aa: The speed setting value of the "1 st stage mold opening" (Break).
C) bbbbb: The pressure setting value of the "1 st stage mold opening" (Break).
D) ccccc: The ending position setting value of the "1 st stage mold opening" (Break).
E) dd: The speed setting value of the "2nd stage mold opening" (Step 2).
F) eeeee: The pressure setting value of the "2nd stage mold opening" (Step 2).
G) ffif.f: The ending position setting value of the "2nd stage mold opening" (Step 2).
H) gg: The speed setting value of the "3rd stage mold opening" (Step 3). It wills no display
in use when it is selected by "3 Step" or "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
I J) hhhhh: The pressure setting value of the "3rd stage mold opening" (Step 3). It wills no
display in use when it is selected by "3 Step" or "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
J) .iiij.j: The ending position setting value ofthe "3rd stage mold opening" (Step 3). It wills
I K)
no display in use when it is selected by "3 Step" or "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
kk: The speed setting value of the "4th stage mold opening" (Step 4). It wills no display

I L)
in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
lllll: The pressure setting value of the "4th stage mold opening" (Step 4). It wills no
display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".

I M) mmmm.m: The ending position setting value of the "4th stage mold opening" (Step 4). It
wills no display in use when it is selected by "4 Step" at "wwwwwwww".
N) nn: The speed setting value of the "last stage mold opening" (Slow).
0) ppppp: The pressure setting value of the "last stage mold opening" (Slow).
P) qqqq.q: The ending position setting value of the "last stage mold opening" (Slow).
Q) ttt.tt: Display the whole action-time among of the mold opening stroke included the
Core Pulling and the Unscrew Devices by Out-action sequences if possessive.
• Open stroke switchover position setup condition must be limited qqqq.q(mm) > mmmm.m(mm)
I > .iijj.j(mm)> ffif.f(mm) > ccccc(P) > SSSSS(P).

2.0perational Menu 2-23 ISO

Mo1""
C"E 14001
fSO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

2.5.3.4 The time sequence chart of the Two-platen mold opening
I
5-stage Mold Opening Slow Open 4 Open 3 Open 2 Break r--
In

(Step a) (Step 3) (Step 2) %.

~
+
Opening Stroke ~,,>: ~~~"'~'>: ~ i ".
-.!o
n
I me
Speed Setup nn kk gg dd aa n
f:;
Pressure Setup ppppp llIll hhhhh eeeee bbbbb if
~
~
i=
i
g.
:
~
Ending Position Setup qqqq.q mmmm.m lili·j ffff.f ccccc (p)

3-stage Mold Opening Slow Open 2 Break

Opening Stroke

Speed Setup nn dd aa
Pressure Setup ppppp eeeee bbbbb

Ending Position Setup qqqq.q ffi[f ccccc (P)

2.6 Ejector setting

Menu (3) Ejector Setting

2.0perationaJ Menu 2-24

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I
I!J
2.6.1 To move the cursor to the modified parameter location and to key-in the intended parameter

within the alphanumerickey, then ta confirm by the confirming key a/ to end the

I command, the related in/ormation 0/ this menu (3) EjectorSetting is described as below:

I A)
B)
AA: The speed setting value of the 1st stage "Ejector Forward I (Step 1)".
BBBBB: The pressure setting value ofthe 1st stage "Ejector Forward 1 (Step 1)".
C) CCC.C: The ending position setting value of the 1st stage "Ejector Forward 1 (Step 1)".
I D)
E)
DD: The speed setting value of the 2nd stage "Ejector Forward 2 (Step 2)".
EEEEE: The pressure setting value of the 2nd stage "Ejector Forward 2 (Step 2)".
F) FFF.F: The ending position setting value of the 2nd stage "Ejector Forward 2 (Step 2)".
I G)
H)
GG: The speed setting value of the 3rd stage "Ejector Forward 3 (For. End)".
HHHHH: The pressure setting value of the 3rd stage "Ejector Forward 3 (For.End)".
I) JJJ.J: The ending position setting value of the 3rd stage "Ejector Forward 3 (For.End)".
I J)
K)
KK: The speed setting value of the 1st stage "Ejector Backward 1 (Step 1)".
LLLLL: The pressure setting value of the 1st stage "Ejector Backward 1 (Step 1)".
L) MMM.M: The ending position setting value of the l" stage "Ejector Backward 1(Step 1)".
I M)
N)
NN: The speed setting value of the 2nd stage "Ejector Backward 2 (Step 2)".
PPPPP: The pressure setting value of the 2nd stage "Ejector Backward 2 (Step 2)".
0) QQQ.Q: The ending position setting value of the 2ndstage "Ejector Backward 2 (Step 2)".
I P)
Q)
RR: The speed setting value of the 3rd stage "Ejector Backward 3 (Back.End)".
SSSSS: The pressure setting value of the 3rd stage "Ejector Backward 3 (Back.End)".
R) TTT.T: The ending position setting value of the 3r stage "Ejector Backward 3 (Back.
I S)
End)". (PS: It must be set at 2.0 mm)
aaaaaaaa: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the ejector functio

I intended ejector mode by turning the shuttle knob of posterior

I I!J
m
to the Enter key of in here, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I to end the command after selection, the function select content is

I S.a)
described as below:
Ejector OFF: It is cancelled the ejector function that it is represented ''No Use".
S.b) Ejector Hold: It will be activating the "Ejector Hold" behavior by no means of retraction
under the auto modes that it will be continuously the ejector backward
movement to the ending position until reaching to the pause time of
"ddd.d" at "~jl!l~1[:QIBm~' to end the sequence.

I S.c) Ejector Counter: It will be activating the normal ejector function by a reciprocating
motion according to the action counter of "bbbb" at '~Sq~nll
IrjblEt'
setting value, then to retract back to the ending position of
the ejector backward to end the sequence.
S.d) Vibration-Ejector: (Optional) It will be activating the "Vibration Ejector" behavior under
the auto modes. When finishing the "Ejector Forward" motion at first

I time, it will be retracting back to the intended position of the "Ejector

Backward 1" just to prompt act in the wake of the "Vibration Ejector"
by a reciprocating motion among of this distance until reaching to the

2.0perational Menu 2-25

August 27,2010 Revisioo:2.0

CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

vibration action counter of "ecce" at
setting, then to act the "Ejector Backward" motion back to the home
position to end the command. It is also available to collocate with the
ejector counter in action for going on the vibration-ejection movement.
S.e) Space Function A: It is a special function selection. (Optional)
S.t) Space Function B: It is a special function selection. (Optional)
T) bbbb: The action counter setting value of a reciprocating ejector under the auto modes.
U) ecce: The action counter setting value of the vibration ejector under the auto modes.
V) ddd.d: The pause time setting for the "Ejector Hold" behavior that it will be activating
the ejector forward to the ending position, later to count this pause time, then to
act the ejector backward under the auto modes. _
W) eeeeeeee: It is a function selection for the 'lips~111ltAl'lL~Ji"
(It must be
collocated with the double-pump in the hydraulic system). To tum the shuttle

knob of posterior to the Enter key of P1 by choice of

!!:I
2-mode of (1) "Use" (2) ''No Use", then to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the command if possessive.

X) OO.f: The startup position setting value for the ".lilllrll"IP}~'B"

function
(It must be collocated with the double-pump in the hydraulic system).
Y) ggg.g: The spare position setting of the specific "Ejector Forward".
Z) hhh.h: The spare position setting of the specific "Ejector Backward".
AA) jjjj.j: It is a buffer time setting to delay the ejection motion that it will be actuating a
regular ejector movement after counting this time.

2.6.2 The time sequence chart 0/ the ejector forward

Ejector Forward Stage Forward 1 Forward 2 Forward 3

(Step 1) (Step 1) (FoLEod)
~
Ejector Forward Stroke "~'W:",f""--; %

• ~-*_-'"":~~'
Ejector Forward END confirm

Speed Setup
Pressure Setup

Ending Position Setup

AA
BBBBB

eec.e
'V
DD
EEEEE
,
FFF.F
GG
HHHHH j
JJJ.J

2.6.3 The time sequence chart 0/ the ejector backward

Ejector Backward Stage

I Backward 3
{Beck.End]
I Backward 2
(Step 2)
I Backward 1
(Step 1)

Ejector Backward Stroke

Ejector Backward END confirm .....11'"-- -+ ;- -.-_

Speed Setup RR NN KK
Pressure Setup SSSSS PPPPP LLLLL
\11 It

Ending Position Setup ITT.T QQQ.Q MMM.M JJJ.J

2.0perational Menu 2-26 'S.0 C·'...E··14001

9001 I~·O .
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0
I -CDC200owiN Operation Manual

I 2.6.4 The comparisonfor an automatic ejector sequence

2.6.4.1 Automatic ejector reciprocatingmotion sequence

I Ejector Forward Stage

Ejector Forward Stroke
Step) Step 2

Speed Setup AA 00

I Pressure Setup
Ending Position Setup
BBBBB
eec.e
EEEEE

Ejector Backward Stage Back. Step 2 Step )

Ejector Backward Stroke
Speed Setup NN KK
Pressure Setup PPPPP LLLLL

I Ending Position Setup

Ejector Counter CNT2=l

QQ<).Q MMM.M

Ejector Forward Stage Step 2

I Ejector Forward Stroke

Speed Setup 00
Pressure Setup EEEEE

I Ending Position Setup

Ejector Backward Stage Back.End Step 2

FFF.F JJJ.J

Step)

I Ejector Backward Stroke

Speed Setup
Pressure Setup
RR
SSSSS
NN
PPPPP
KK
LLLLL
Ending Position Setup TTT.T QQQ.Q MMM.M

I Ejector Counter CNT2=f

Ejector Reciprocating Motion Sequence

I 2.6.4.2 Automatic ejector hold sequence

I Ejector Forward Stage

Ejector Forward Stroke
Step I Step 2 For.End

Speed Setup AA DD GG
Pressure Setup BBBBB EEEEE "HHHHH ,
Ending Position Setup eec.e FFF.F JJJ.J
!"l
<-.

I -
til
f':>
o
.,
:c
o
c:
I Ei"
IJQ
.-.
Q..
Q..
Co

I
Co
'-'

Ejector Backward Stage I Back.End I Step 2 I Step I

Ejector Backward Stroke
Speed Setup
Pressure Setup '1 sssss 1 RR
PPPPP
NN 1 LLLLL
KK

Ending Position Setup TTT.T QQQ.Q MMM.M

I Ejector Holding Sequence

I 2.0perational Menu 2-27 ••0

MOt· CE 14001
'SO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

2.6.4.3 Automatic vibration-ejector reciprocatingmotion sequence

Ejector Forward Stage Step 2 For.End

Ejector Forward Stroke
Speed Setup AA DD GG
Pressure Setup BBBBB EEEEE HHHHH
Ending Position Setup FFEF JJJ.J

Ejector Backward Stage

Ejector Backward Stroke
Speed Setup
Pressure Setup
Ending Position Setup
Vibration Ejector Counter CNT3=}
Ejector Forward Stage
Ejector Forward Stroke
Speed Setup
Pressure Setup
Ending Position Setup JJJ.J

Ejector Backward Stage Back. End Step 2 Step 1

Ejector Backward Stroke
Speed Setup RR NN KK
Pressure Setup SSSSS PPPPP LLLLL
Ending Position Setup QQQ.Q MMM.M
Vibration Ejector Counter CNT3=?
Ejector Counter CNT2=.1

Vibration-Ejector Reciprocating Motion Sequence

2.7 Core 1-4pulling setting

Menu (132) Core Pulling 1-4 Setting

2.0perational Menu 2-28 ••.. 0.: C''.' E."14001

9001 IS. 0'.'.
August 27,2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I
I!:I
To move the cursor to the modified parameter location and to key-in the intended parameter

within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of to end the

command. To tum the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter keyOf!J for

I selecting the action options, then to confirm by the confirming key of I!J to end the

command after setup, the related information of this menu (132) Core Pulling 1-4 Setting is
I described as below:
2.7.1 Core 1pulling setup
A) AI: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core 1 In"

I intended "Core 1 In" mode by turning the shuttle knob of posterior

I
I
to the Enter key of I!J in here, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I!:I to end the command after the usage selection, the function select content

is described as below:
A.a) No Use: It is cancelled the "Core 1 In" function at "OFF" status.

I A.b)

A.c)
Before Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 1 In" function that it will be doing
the mold clamping stroke after fmishing the movement.
During Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 1 In" function to collocate with the

I position of "D 111.1" in use that it will be activating the "Core 1 In"
movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to the setting
position of "DIlL 1".

I A.d)

B)
After Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 1 In" function that it will be doing the
movement after finishing the mold clamping to the ending position.
Bl: The speed setting value of the "Core 1 In" movement.
C) C1111: The pressure setting value ofthe "Core I In" movement.
I D) D 111.1: The startup position setting for the "Core I In" function that it will be actuating
the movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to this position.
E) El l l l l l l : It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 1 In"
I function, lease choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle knob of

I posterior to the Enter key of I!:I in here, then to confirm

I by the confirming key of I!J to end the command after the usage

selection, the function select content is described as below:

I E.a) Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 1 In" function just to
apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at
"FILl" for the "Core 1 In" movement.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-29
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0

,CDC200owiN Operation Manual

E.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 1 In"
function, just to connect the confirm signal with the corresponding input
node, at this time, the "F 11.1" is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 1 In" movement.
F) FILl: The action time setting value of the "Core 1 In" movement.
G) G1111: It is a spare function selection (Opt" within 4-mode. To move the cursor in

here or to tum the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

I!:I for selecting the helow items, then to confirm by the confirming key of

!!3 to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

content is described as below:

G.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
G.b) Synchronization: It is a mode selection for the 1 In" function that it
must be collocated with the of "AI" by "During
Clamp" and the startup of "D 111.1" setting at "Core 1 In"
simultaneously, at this time, the computer will be actuating the
"Synchronous Core In during the Mold Clamping" function when the
mold clamping movement is reaching to the position. If the current
position of the mold clamping is smaller than the position of"YYYY.Y"
on the menu (I) Mold Open / Clamp Setting, the computer will be
appearing the alarm message of "Alarml032>Synchronous Core In
Stroke Is Smaller Than The Warning Position" on the top screen and
stopping the mold clamping & "Core 1 In" movements.
G.c) Core 1 In Program B: It is a spare function.
G.d) Core 1 In Program C: It is a spare function.
H) HI: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core lOut" function, please choice

the intended "Core lOut" mode by turning the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of I!:I in here, then to confirm by the confirming key

of I!:I to end the command after choosing a mode, the function content is

described as below:
H.a) No Use: It is cancelled the "Core lOut" function at "OFF" status.
H.b) Before Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core lOut" function that it will be doing
the mold opening stroke after finishing the movement.
H.c) During Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core lOut" function to collocate with the
position of "Ll11.1" in use that it will be activating the "Core 1 Out"
movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to this setting
position of "L 111.1".

2.0perational Menu 2-30

August 27,2010 Revisioo:2.0
 ;CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I H.d) After Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core lOut" function that it will be doing the
movement after fmishing the mold opening to the ending position.
I) 11: The speed setting value of the "Core lOut" movement.
I 1) KIIII: The pressure setting value of the "Core l Out" movement.
K) Llll.l: The startup position setting for the "Core lout" function that it will be

I L)
actuating the movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to this position.
Mll1111I: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core I
Out" function, choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle

knob of posterior to the Enter key of I!:J in here, then to

I
I
confirm by the confirming key of I!I to end the command after the

usage selection, the function select content is described as below:

L.a) Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core lOut" function just to
I apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at
''NIl. I" for the "Core I Out" movement.
L.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 1 Out"
I function, just to connect the confirm signal with the corresponding input
node, at this time, the ''NIl.I'' is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core I Out" movement.
I M)
N)
NIl.I: The action time setting value of the "Core lOut" movement.
Pllll: It is a function selection

or to turn the shuttle knob posterior to the Enter key of

I m for selecting the below items, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I!:J to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

I content is described as below:

NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
N.a)

I N.b) Synchronization: It is a mode selection for the

must be collocated with the
I In" function that it
of "HI" by "During
Open" and the startup of "LIIl.I" setting at "Core 1 Out"
simultaneously, at this time, the computer will be actuating the
"Synchronous Core Out during the Mold Opening" function when the
mold opening movement is reaching to the position. It will be acting
the "Core 1 Out" movement prior to the ejector action if the mold
opening movement is getting in the ending position.
N.c) Core I Out Program B: It is a spare function.
I N.d)
0)
Core lOut Program C: It is a spare function.
Manual Core I Pulling Setup:
After selecting the "Core I In" function, if the screen is not shown and stayed on the

2.0perational Menu 2-3] ,a" 0,,

900f C', E·'1400'1
, IS, ,0,','
August 27, 20]0 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

menu (135) Core Pulling 5-8 Setting, the user / operator could be freely operating the

"Core I In" movement by pressing down the manual operation button of [ ~~ I

on the computer panel, at this time, the computer will be manually activating the "Core
I In" motion till the position selection feedback form being completed or releasing this
button to stop the movement. After selecting the "Core lOut" function, if the screen is
not shown and stayed on the menu (135) Core Pulling 5-8 Setting, the user / operator
could be freely operating the "Core lOut" movement by pressing down the manual

operation button of Jfft1

~~ on the computer panel, at this time, the computer will

be manually activating the "Core lOut" motion till the position selection feedback
form being completed or releasing this button to stop the movement.

2.7.2 Core2 pulling setup (Optional)

A) A2: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core 2 In" function,

intended "Core 2 In" mode by turning the shuttle knob of posterior

to the Enter key of I!I in here, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I!:I to end the command after the usage selection, tbe function select content

is described as below:
A.a) No Use: It is cancelled the "Core 2 In" function at "OFF" status.
A.b) Before Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 2 In" function that it will be doing
the mold clamping stroke after fmishing the movement.
A.c) During Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 2 In" function to collocate with the
position of "D222.2" in use that it will be activating the "Core 2 In"
movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to the setting
position of "D222.2".
A.d) After Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 2 In" function that it will be doing the
movement after fmishing the mold clamping to the ending position.
B) B2: The speed setting value of the "Core 2 In" movement.
C)
D)
C2222: The pressure setting value of the "Core 2 In" movement.
D222.2: The startup position setting for the "Core 2 In" function that it will be actuating
I
the movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to this position.
E) E2222222: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 2 In"
function, lease choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle knob

of posterior to the Enter key of I!:I in here, then to

2.0perational Menu 2-32

August 27, 20]0 Revision:2.0

I
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I confirm by the confirming key of I!J to end the command after the

I E.a)
usage selection, the function select content is described as below:
Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 2 In" function just to
apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at
"F22.2" for the "Core 2 In" movement.
E.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 2 In"
function, just to connect the confirm signal with the corresponding input
node, at this time, the "F22.2" is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 2 In" movement.
F) F22.2: The action time setting value of the "Core 2 In" movement.
I G) G2222: It is a spare function selection ( within 4-mode. To move the cursor in

I here or to turn the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

I I!:I for selecting the below items, then to confirm by the confirming key

Of!!J to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

content is described as below:

I G.a)
G.b)
NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
Synchronization: It is a spare function.
G.c) Core 2 In Program B: It is a spare function.
I G.d)
H)
Core 2 In Program C: It is a spare function.
H2: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core 2 Out" function, please choice

I the intended "Core 2 Out" mode by turning the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of (I!J in here, then to confirm by the confirming

I key Of!!l to end the command after choosing a mode, the function content

I H.a)
is described as below:
No Use: It is cancelled the "Core 2 Out" function at "OFF" status.
H.b) Before Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 2 Out" function that it will be doing
the mold opening stroke after finishing the movement.
H.c) During Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 2 Out" function to collocate with the
position of "L222.2" in use that it will be activating the "Core 2 Out"
I movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to the setting
position of "L222.2".
H.d) After Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 2 Out" function that it will be doing the
I I)
movement after fmishing the mold opening to the ending position.
J2: The speed setting value of the "Core 2 Out" movement.
J) K2222: The pressure setting value of the "Core 2 Out" movement.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-33 ISO ("E"" 14001
1M)C)1 "
ISO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

coczooows« Operation Manual

K) L222.2: The startup posmon setting for the "Core 2 out" function that it will be
actuating the movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to this position.
I
L) M2222222: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 2
Out" functi choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle

posterior to the Enter key Of!!J in here, then

to confirm by the confirming key of m to end the command after

the usage selection, the function select content is described as below:

L.a) Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 2 Out" function just to
apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at
"N22.2" for the "Core 2 Out" movement.
L.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 2 Out"
function, just to connect the confirm signal with the corresponding input
node, at this time, the "N22.2" is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 2 Out" movement.
M) N22.2: The action time setting value of the "Core 2 Out" movement.
N) P2222: It is a function selection (Opt" within 4-mode. To move the cursor in here

or to turn the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

I!l for selecting the below items, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I!l to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

content is described as below:

N.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
N.b) Synchronization: It is a spare function.
N.c) Core 2 Out Program B: It is a spare function.
N.d) Core 2 Out Program C: It is a spare function.
0) Manual Core 2 Pulling Setup:
After selecting the "Core 2 In" function, if the screen is not shown and stayed on the
menu (135) Core Pulling 5-8 Setting, the user / operator could be freely operating the

(W2
"Core 2 In" movement by pressing down the manual operation button of ~"~

on the computer panel, at this time, the computer will be manually activating the "Core
2 In" motion till the position selection feedback form being completed or releasing this
button to stop the movement. After selecting the "Core 2 Out" function, if the screen is
not shown and stayed on the menu (135) Core Pulling 5-8 Setting, the user / operator
could be freely operin~ the fore 2 Out" movement by pressing down the manual

operation button of : ~ on the computer panel, at this time, the computer will

2.0perational Menu 2-34

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 ,CDC20ODWiN Operation Manual

I be manually activating the "Core 2 Out" motion till the position selection feedback
form being completed or releasing this button to stop the movement.

2.7.3 Core3pulling setup (Optional)

A) A3: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core 3 In" function,

I intended "Core 3 In" mode by turning the shuttle knob of posterior

to the Enter key Of!!J in here, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I!l to end the command after the usage selection, the function select content

is described as below:
A.a) No Use: It is cancelled the "Core 3 In" function at "OFF" status.
A.b) Before Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 3 In" function that it will be doing

I A.c)
the mold clamping stroke after finishing the movement.
During Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 3 In" function to collocate with the
position of "0333.3" in use that it will be activating the "Core 3 In"

I movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to the setting

position of"0333.3".
After Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 3 In" function that it will be doing the
A.d)

I B)
C)
movement after finishing the mold clamping to the ending position.
B3: The speed setting value for the "Core 3 In" movement.
C3333: The pressure setting value for the "Core 3 In" movement.

I 0)

E)
D333.3: The startup position setting for the "Core 3 In" function that it will be actuating
the movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to this position.
E3333333: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 3 In"

I function, lease choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle knob

of posterior to the Enter key Of!!l in here, then to

I
confrrm by the confrrming key of I!:J to end the command after the

usage selection, the function select content is described as below:

Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 3 In" function just to
I E.a)
apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at
"F33.3" for the "Core 3 In" movement.
E.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 3 In"
I function, just to connect the confirm signal with the corresponding input
node, at this time, the "F33.3" is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 3 In" movement.
I F)
G)
F333; The action time setting value for the "Core 3 In" movement.
G3333: It is a spare function s selection (Opt within 4-mode. To move the cursor

I in here or to tum the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

2.0perational Menu 2-35 'so

MOt··
C·E. 140(11
.150
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

!!:J fur selecting the helow items, then to confrrm by the confirming key

of !!J to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

content is described as below:

G.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
G.b) Synchronization: It is a spare function.
G.c) Core 3 In Program B: It is a spare function.
G.d) Core 3 In Program C: It is a spare function.
H) H3: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core 3 Out" function, please choice

the intended "Core 3 Out" mode by turning the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of I!:I in here, then to confrrm by the confrrming

key of !!:I
is described as below:
to end the command after choosing a mode, the function content

H.a) No Use: It is cancelled the "Core 3 Out" function at "OFF" status.

H.b) Before Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 3 Out" function that it will be doing
the mold opening stroke after fmishing the movement.
H.c) During Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 3 Out" function to collocate with the
position of "L333.3" in use that it will be activating the "Core 3 Out"
movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to the setting
position of"L333.3".
H.d) After Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 3 Out" function that it will be doing the
movement after finishing the mold opening to the ending position.
I) 13: The speed setting value of the "Core 3 Out" movement.
1) K3333: The pressure setting value of the "Core 3 Out" movement.
K) L333.3: The startup position setting for the "Core 3 out" function that it will be
actuating the movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to this position.
L) M3333333: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 3
Out" function, choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle

knob of posterior to the Enter key of !!J in here, then

to confirm by the confirming key Of!!J to end the command after

the usage selection, the function select content is described as below:

L.a) Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 3 Out" function just to
apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at
''N33.3'' for the "Core 3 Out" movement.
L.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 3 Out"
function, just to connect the confirm signal with the corresponding input

2.0perational Menu 2-36

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 ,CDC200owiN Operation Manual
node, at this time, the ''N33.3'' is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 3 Out" movement.
M) N33.3: The action time setting value of the "Core 3 Out" movement.
N) P3333: It is a function selection . within 4-mode. To move the cursor in here

or to tum the shuttle knob posterior to the Enter key of

I!l for selecting the below items, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I!l to end tbe command after the usage selection, the function select

content is described as below:

N.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
N.b) Synchronization: It is a spare function.
N.c) Core 3 Out Program B: It is a spare function.
N.d) Core 3 Out Program C: It is a spare function.
0) Manual Core 3 Pulling Setup:
After selecting the "Core 3 In" function, if the screen is not shown and stayed on the
menu (135) Core Pulling 5-8 Setting, the user / operator could be freely operating the

"Core 3 In" movement by pressing down the manual operation button of ~

on the computer panel, at this time, the computer will be manually activating the "Core
3 In" motion till the position selection feedback form being completed or releasing this
button to stop the movement. After selecting the "Core 3 Out" function, if the screen is
not shown and stayed on the menu (135) Core Pulling 5-8 Setting, the user / operator

I
I~I
could be freely operating the "Core 3 Out" movement by pressing down the manual

operation button of [ on the computer panel, at this time, the computer will

be manually activating the "Core 3 Out" motion till the position selection feedback

I form being completed or releasing this button to stop the movement.

2.7.4 Core4 pulling setup (Optional)

I A) A4: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core 4 In"

I intended "Core 4 In" mode by turning the shuttle knob of posterior

to the Enter key Of,., in here, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I ,., to end the command after the usage selection, the function select content

is described as below:
I 2.0perational Menu 2-37
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

A.a) No Use: It is cancelled the "Core 4 In" function at "OFF' status.

A.b) Before Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 4 In" function that it will be doing
the mold clamping stroke after finishing the movement.
A.c) During Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 4 In" function to collocate with the
position of "D444.4" in use that it will be activating the "Core 4 In"
movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to the setting
position of"0444.4". I
A.d) After Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 4 In" function that it will be doing the
movement after finishing the mold clamping to the ending position.
B) B4: The speed setting value of the "Core 4 In" movement.
C) C4444: The pressure setting value of the "Core 4 In" movement.
0) 0444.4: The startup position setting for the "Core 4 In" function that it will be actuating
the movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to this position.
E) E4444444: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 4 In"
lease choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle knob

posterior to the Enter key of ,., in here, then to

confirm by the confirming key of I!l to end the command after the

usage selection, the function select content is described as below:

E.a) Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 4 In" function just to
apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at
"F44.4" for the "Core 4 In" movement.
E.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 4 In"
function, just to connect the confirm signal with the corresponding input
node, at this time, the "F44.4" is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 4 In" movement.
F) F44.4: The action time setting value of the "Core 4 In" movement.
G) G4444: It is a spare function selection

here or to turn the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

,., for selecting the below items, then to confirm by the confirming key of

,., to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

content is described as below:

G.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
G.b) Synchronization: It is a spare function.
G.c) Core 4 In Program B: It is a spare function.
G.d) Core 4 In Program C: It is a spare function.

2.0perational Menu 2-38

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
H) H4: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core 4 Out" function, please choice

I the intended "Core 4 Out" mode by turning the shuttle knob of

I posterior to the Enter key of !!J in here, then to confirm by the confirming

key of I!:I to end the command after choosing a mode, the function content

is described as below:
H.a) No Use: It is cancelled the "Core 4 Out" function at "OFF" status.
H.b) Before Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 4 Out" function that it will be doing
the mold opening stroke after finishing the movement.
I H.c) During Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 4 Out" function to collocate with the
position of "L444.4" in use that it will be activating the "Core 4 Out"
movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to the setting
I H.d)
position of "L444.4".
After Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 4 Out" function that it will be doing the
movement after finishing the mold opening to the ending position.
I) 14: The speed setting value of the "Core 4 Out" movement.
1) K4444: The pressure setting value of the "Core 4 Out" movement.
K) L444.4: The startup position setting for the "Core 4 out" function that it will be
I L)
actuating the movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to this position.
M4444444: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 4
Out" choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle
I
posterior to the Enter key of !::I in here, then

I
to confirm by the confirming key of !!:I to end the command after

the usage selection, the function select content is described as below:

L.a) Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 4 Out" function just to
apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at
"N44.4" for the "Core 4 Out" movement.
L.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 4 Out"
I function, just to connect the confrrm signal with the corresponding input
node, at this time, the "N44.4" is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 4 Out" movement.
I M)
N)
N44.4: The action time setting value of the "Core 4 Out" movement.
P4444: It is a function selection within 4-mode. To move the cursor in here

I or to tum the shuttle knob posterior to the Enter key of

I ,., for selecting the helow items, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I 2.0perational Menu 2·39 1.$0.·..:'

9001
.
C· E· 14001
..II'S. 0.....
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

,CDC2000W'iN Operation Manual

!::I to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

content is described as below:

N.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
N.b) Synchronization: It is a spare function.
N.c) Core 4 Out Program B: It is a spare function.
N.d) Core 4 Out Program C: It is a spare function.
0) Manual Core 4 Pulling Setup:
After selecting the "Core 4 In" function, if the screen is not shown and stayed on the
menu (135) Core Pulling 5-8 Setting, the user / operator could be freely operating the

"Core 4 In" movement by pressing down the manual operation button of [ ~ 1 I

on the computer panel, at this time, the computer will be manually activating the "Core
4 In" motion till the position selection feedback form being completed or releasing this
button to stop the movement. After selecting the "Core 4 Out" function, if the screen is
not shown and stayed on the menu (135) Core Pulling 5-8 Setting, the user / operator
could be freely operating the "Core 4 Out" movement by pressing down the manual

operation button of ~~
11fI4 on the computer panel, at this time, the computer will

be manually activating the "Core 4 Out" motion till the position selection feedback
form being completed or releasing this button to stop the movement.
2.8 Core 5-8 pulling setting (Optional)

To move the cursor or to tum the shuttle knob of by choice of the intended

2.0perational Menu 2·40 .so ('E 1$0

.001· ... 14001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000WIN
..
Operation Manual

I parameter setting item as desired and to key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric

I suppose that it wants to the choice the function item, please tum the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of I!J for selecting the action options and confirm by the

confrrming key of I!l to end the command after setup, the related information of this menu

(135) Core Pulling 5-8 Setting is described as below:

2.8.1 Core 5 pulling setup (Optionol)

A) A5: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core 5 In" choice the

intended "Core 5 In" mode by turning the shuttle knob of posterior

I
to the Enter key of I!J in here, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I!J to end the command after the usage selection, the function select content

I A.a)
is described as below:
No Use: It is cancelled the "Core 5 In" function at "OFF" status.

I A.b)

A.c)
Before Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 5 In" function that it will be doing
the mold clamping stroke after fmishing the movement.
During Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 5 In" function to collocate with the

I position of "D555.5" in use that it will be activating the "Core 5 In"

movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to the setting
position of"D555.5".
After Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 5 In" function that it will be doing the
I A.d)

B)
movement after finishing the mold clamping to the ending position.
B5: The speed setting value of the "Core 5 In" movement.
C) C5555: The pressure setting value of the "Core 5 In" movement.
I D) D555.5: The startup position setting for the "Core 5 In" function that it will be actuating
the movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to this position.
E) E5555555: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 5 In"
lease choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle knob

I posterior to the Enter key of (!J in here, then to

I confrrm by the confirming key of I!J to end the command after the

usage selection, the function select content is described as below:

I E.a) Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 5 In" function just to
apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at
"F55.5" for the "Core 5 In" movement.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-41 1.0 ('"
9001 'E'14001
,'$0
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

E.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 5 In"
function, just to connect the confirm signal with the corresponding input
node, at this time, the "F55.5" is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 5 In" movement.
F) F55.5: The action time setting value of the "Core 5 In" movement.
G) G5555: It is a spare function selection ( within 4-mode. To move the cursor in

here or to tum the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

I
I!:I for selecting the below items, then to confirm by the confirming key

ofI!:I to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

content is described as below:

G.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
G.b) Spare 1 IN: It is a spare function.
G.c) Spare 2 IN: It is a spare function.
G.d) Spare 3 IN: It is a spare function.
H) H5: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core 5 Out" function, please choice

the intended "Core 5 Out" mode by turning the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of I!J in here, then to confrrm by the confirming

key of I!:I to end the command after choosing a mode, the function content

is described as below:
H.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the "Core 5 Out" function at "OFF" status.
H.b) Before Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 5 Out" function that it wiJl be doing
the mold opening stroke after finishing the movement.
H.c) During Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 5 Out" function to collocate with the
position of "L555.5" in use that it will be activating the "Core 5 Out"
movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to the setting
I
position of"L555.5".
H.d) After Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 5 Out" function that it will be doing the
movement after finishing the mold opening to the ending position.
I) J5: The speed setting value of the "Core 5 Out" movement.
1) K5555: The pressure setting value of the "Core 5 Out" movement.
K) L555.5: The startup position setting for the "Core 5 out" function that it will be
actuating the movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to this position.
L) M5555555: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 5
Out" functio lease choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle

knob of posterior to tbe Enter key of I!:I in here, then

2.0perational Menu 2-42 tSO

9001 ('E '$0
, '14001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC20DOWiN Operation Manual

I to confirm by the confirming key of I!J to end the command after

I L.a)
the usage selection, the function select content is described as below:
Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 5 Out" function just to
apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at
I L.b)
''N55.5'' for the "Core 5 Out" movement.
Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 5 Out"
function, just to connect the confirm signal with the corresponding input
I node, at this time, the ''N55.5'' is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 5 Out" movement.
M) N55.5: The action time setting value of the "Core 5 Out" movement.
I N) P5555: It is a function selection within 4-mode. To move the cursor in here

I or to tum the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

I !!:J for selecting the below items, then to confirm by tbe confirming key

I ofI!l to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

content is described as below:

I N.a)
N.b)
NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
Spare lOUT: It is a spare function.

I N.c)
N.d)
Spare 2 OUT: It is a spare function.
Spare 3 OUT: It is a spare function.
0) , Manual Core 5 Pulling Setup:
I After selecting the "Core 5 In" function, if the screen is shown and stayed on the menu
(135) Core Pulling 5-8 Setting, the user / operator could be freely operating the "Core 5

In" movement by pressing down the manual operation button of [ ~~ ] on the

I computer panel, at this time, the computer will be manually activating the "Core 5 In"
motion till the position selection feedback form being completed or releasing this
button to stop the movement. After selecting the "Core 5 Out" function, if the screen is
shown and stayed on the menu (135) Core Pulling 5-8 Setting, the user / operator could
be freely 0 )erating the "Core 5 Out" movement by pressing down the manual operation

I button of ~ .J1H..1 on the computer panel, at this time, the computer will be

I manually activating the "Core 5 Out" motion till the position selection feedback form
being completed or releasing this button to stop the movement.

I 2.8.2 Core6 pulling setup (Optional)

A) A6: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core 6 In" function, please choice the
I 2.0perational Menu 2-43 ,.0 C·E'.1.M)01
Ji001
, es...,.0.0
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

~CDC2fJOOWiN Operation Manual

intended "Core 6 In" mode by turning the shuttle knob of posterior

to the Enter key Of!J in here, tben to confirm by the confirming key of

!!J to end the command after tbe usage selection, the function select content

I
is described as below:
A.a) No Use: It is cancelled the "Core 6 In" function at "OFF" status.
A.b) Before Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 6 In" function that it will be doing
the mold clamping stroke after finishing the movement.
A.c) During Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 6 In" function to collocate with the
position of "D666.6" in use that it will be activating the "Core 6 In"
movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to the setting
position of "D666.6".
A.d) After Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 6 In" function that it will be doing the
movement after finishing the mold clamping to the ending position.
B) B6: The speed setting value of the "Core 6 In" movement.
C) C6666: The pressure setting value of the "Core 6 In" movement.
D) D666.6: The startup position setting for the "Core 6 In" function that it will be actuating
the movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to this position.
E) E6666666: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 6 In"
function, lease choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle knob

of posterior to the Enter key of !!:I in here, then to

confirm by the confrrming key of !!:I to end the command after the

usage selection, the function select content is described as below:

E.a) Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 6 In" function just to
apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at
"F66.6" for the "Core 6 In" movement.
E.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 6 In"
function, just to connect the confirm signal with the corresponding input
node, at this time, the "F66.6" is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 6 In" movement.
F) F66.6: The action time setting value of the "Core 6 In" movement.
G) G6666: It is a spare function selection (

here or to turn the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

!J for selecting the below items, then to confirm by the confirming key

2.0perational Menu 2-44

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I of !!:I to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

I G.a)
content is described as below:
NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
G.b) Spare lIN: It is a spare function.
I G.c)
G.d)
Spare 2 IN: It is a spare function.
Spare 3 IN: It is a spare function.
H) H6: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core 6 Out" function, please choice

the intended "Core 6 Out" mode by turning the shuttle knob of

I
posterior to the Enter key of I!l in here, then to confirm by the confirming

I
key of I!l to end the command after choosing a mode, the function content

is described as below:
H.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the "Core 6 Out" function at "OFF" status.

I H.b)

H.c)
Before Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 6 Out" function that it will be doing
the mold opening stroke after fmishing the movement.
During Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 6 Out" function to collocate with the

I position of "L666.6" in use that it will be activating the "Core 6 Out"

movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to the setting
position of "L666.6".
H.d) After Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 6 Out" function that it will be doing the
movement after finishing the mold opening to the ending position.
I) J6: The speed setting value of the "Core 6 Out" movement.
1) K6666: The pressure setting value of the "Core 6 Out" movement.
K) L666.6: The startup position setting for the "Core 6 out" function that it will be
actuating the movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to this position.

I L) M6666666: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 6
Out" function, choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle

I knob of posterior to the Enter key Of!!J in here, then

to confirm by the confirming key of I!l to end the command after

the usage selection, the function select content is described as below:

L.a) Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 6 Out" function just to
apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at

I L.b)
''N66.6'' for the "Core 6 Out" movement.
Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 6 Out"
function, just to connect the confmn signal with the corresponding input
node, at this time, the "N66.6" is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 6 Out" movement.
M) N66.6: The action time setting value of the "Core 6 Out" movement.
N) P6666: It is a function selection (Optional) within 4-mode. To move the cursor in here

2.0perational Menu 245 'SO (·E·140'0'1

9001 "SO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

or to turn the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

I!J for selecting the helow items, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I!:I to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

content is described as below:

N.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
N.b) Spare lOUT: It is a spare function.
N.c) Spare 2 OUT: It is a spare function.
N.d) Spare 3 OUT: It is a spare function.
0) Manual Core 6 Pulling Setup:
After selecting the "Core 6 In" function, if the screen is shown and stayed on the menu
(135) Core Pulling 5-8 Setting, the user / operator could be freely oIJerating the "Core 6

In" movement by pressing down the manual operation button of ~~

1Jt12 on the

computer panel, at this time, the computer will be manually activating the "Core 6 In"
motion till the position selection feedback form being completed or releasing this
button to stop the movement. After selecting the "Core 6 Out" function, if the screen is
shown and stayed on the menu (135) Core Pulling 5-8 Setting, the user / operator could
be freely operating the "Core 6 Out" movement by pressing down the manual operation

J1}l2
button of ~~ on the computer panel, at this time, the computer will be

manually activating the "Core 6 Out" motion till the position selection feedback form
being completed or releasing this button to stop the movement.

2.8.3 Core7 pulling setup (Optional)

A) A7: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core 7 In" choice the

intended "Core 7 In" mode by turning the shuttle knob of posterior

to the Enter key of I!l in here, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I!:I to end the command after the usage selection, the function select content

is described as below:
A.a) No Use: It is cancelled the "Core 7 In" function at "OFF" status.
A.b) Before Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 7 In" function that it will be doing
the mold clamping stroke after fmishing the movement.
A.c) During Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 7 In" function to collocate with the
2.0perational Menu 246 ,so ('E""~SO
9001 ....... Q'01
August 27,2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC200DWiN Operation Manual
position of "D777. 7" in use that it will be activating the "Core 7 In"
movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to the setting
position of "D777. 7".

I A.d) After Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 7 In" function that it will be doing the
movement after finishing the mold clamping to the ending position.
B) B7: The speed setting value of the "Core 7 In" movement.

I C)
D)
C7777: The pressure setting value of the "Core 7 In" movement.
D777.7: The startup position setting for the "Core 7 In" function that it will be actuating
the movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to this position.
E) E7777777: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 7 In"
lease choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle knob

posterior to the Enter key of I!:I in here, then to

I confirm by the confirming key of !!J to end the command after the

usage selection, the function select content is described as below:

E.a) Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 7 In" function just to
apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at

I E.b)
"F77.7" for the "Core 7 In" movement.
Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 7 In"
function, just to connect the confirm signal with the corresponding input

I node, at this time, the "F77.7" is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 7 In" movement.
F) F77.7: The action time setting value ofthe "Core 7 In" movement.

I G) G7777: It is a spare function selection ( . within 4-mode. To move the cursor in

here or to tum the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

I
I!:I for selecting the below items, then to confirm by the confirming key

ofI!:I to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

content is described as below:

G.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
G.b) Spare 1IN: It is a spare function.
G.c) Spare 2 IN: It is a spare function.
G.d) Spare 3 IN: It is a spare function.
H) H7: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core 7 Out" function, please choice

I the intended "Core 7 Out" mode by turning the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of I!:I in here, then to confirm by the confirming

2.0perational Menu
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
2-47 IS. 0.
9001 C·E 15...0.0.
·.14001

;CDC200owiN Operation Manual

key of I!:I
is described as below:
to end the command after choosing a mode, the function content

H.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the "Core 7 Out" function at "OFF" status.

H.b) Before Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 7 Out" function that it will be doing
the mold opening stroke after finishing the movement.
H.c) During Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 7 Out" function to collocate with the
position of "L 777.7" in use that it will be activating the "Core 7 Out"
movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to the setting
position of "L 777.7".
H.d) After Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 7 Out" function that it will be doing the
movement after fmishing the mold opening to the ending position.
I) 17: The speed setting value of the "Core 7 Out" movement.
1) K7777: The pressure setting value of the "Core 7 Out" movement.
K) L777.7: The startup position setting for the "Core 7 out" function that it will be
actuating the movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to this position.
L) M7777777: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 7
Out" fu lease choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle

posterior to the Enter key of I!:I in here, then I

to confrrm by the confirming key of 1!3 to end the command after

the usage selection, the function select content is described as below:

L.a) Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 7 Out" function just to
apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at
"N77.7" for the "Core 7 Out" movement.
L.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 7 Out"
function, just to connect the confirm signal with the corresponding input
node, at this time, the "N77.7" is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 7 Out" movement.
M) N77.7: The action time setting value of the "Core 7 Out" movement.
N) P7777: It is a function selection (Optional) within 4-mode. To move the cursor in here

or to turn the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

I!:I for selecting the below items, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I!J to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

content is described as below:

N.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
N.b) Spare lOUT: It is a spare function.
N.c) Spare 2 OUT: It is a spare function.
N.d) Spare 3 OUT: It is a spare function.

2.0perational Menu
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
2-48 ..0.·..C; ·E·
9001 ..... 14001
.SO.·.·
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
2.8.4 Core8pulling setup (Optional)

A) choice the

I intended "Core 8 In" mode by turning the shuttle knob of posterior

I
to the Enter key of !!:I in here, then to confirm by the confirming key of

!!:I to end the command after the usage selection, the function select content

is described as below:
Aa) No Use: It is cancelled the "Core 8 In" function at "OFF" status.

I Ab) Before Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 8 In" function that it will be doing
the mold clamping stroke after fmishing the movement.
Ac) During Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 8 In" function to collocate with the
I position of "D888.8" in use that it will be activating the "Core 8 In"
movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to the setting
position of "D888.8".
I Ad) After Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Core 8 In" function that it will be doing the
movement after finishing the mold clamping to the ending position.
B) B8: The speed setting value of the "Core 8 In" movement.
I C) C8888: The pressure setting value of the "Core 8 In" movement.
D) D888.8: The startup position setting for the "Core 8 In" function that it will be actuating

I E)
the movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to this position.
E8888888: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 8 In"
choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle knob

I posterior to the Enter key of I!J in here, then to

confirm by the confirming key Of!!J to end the command after the

usage selection, the function select content is described as below:

E.a) Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 8 In" function just to

I apply for confrrming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at
"F88.8" for the "Core 8 In" movement.
E.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 8 In"

I function, just to connect the confirm signal with the corresponding input
node, at this time, the "F88.8" is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 8 In" movement.
F) F88.8: The action time setting value of the "Core 8 In" movement.
G) G8888: It is a spare function selection ( within 4-mode. To move the cursor in

I here or to turn the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

I 2.0perational Menu 2-49

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

• ;CDC200owiN Operation Manual

!!:I for selectingthe helow items, then to confirmby the confirmingkey of

I!J to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

content is described as below:

G.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
G.b) Spare 1 IN: It is a spare function.
G.c) Spare 2 IN: It is a spare function.
G.d) Spare 3 IN: It is a spare function.
H) H8: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Core 8 Out" function, please choice

the intended "Core 8 Out" mode by turning the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of !!:I in here, then to confirm by the confirming

key of !!:I to end the command after choosing a mode, the function content

is described as below:
H.a) NO USE: It is cancelled the "Core 8 Out" function at "OFF" status.
H.b) Before Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 8 Out" function that it will be doing
the mold opening stroke after fmishing the movement.
H.c) During Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 8 Out" function to collocate with the
position of "L888.8" in use that it will be activating the "Core 8 Out"
movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to the setting
position of"L888.8".
H.d) After Open: It is a mode selection for the "Core 8 Out" function that it will be doing the
movement after finishing the mold opening to the ending position.
I) 18: The speed setting value of the "Core 8 Out" movement.
1) K8888: The pressure setting value of the "Core 8 Out" movement.
K) L888.8: The startup position setting for the "Core 8 out" function that it will be
actuating the movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to this position.
L) M8888888: It is a stroke position feedback selection within 2-mode for the "Core 8
Out" choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle

posterior to the Enter key of !!:I in here, then to

confirm by the confrrming key of I!:I to end the command after the

usage selection, the function select content is described as below:

L.a) Time: It is a mode selection controlled by the time for the "Core 8 Out" function just to
apply for confirming the ending stroke in operation, please set an action time at
"N88.8" for the "Core 8 Out" movement.
L.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection controlled by the limit switch for the "Core 8 Out"
function, just to connect the confirm signal with the corresponding input

2.0perational Menu 2-50

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I ,CDC2QODWiN Operation Manual

node, at this time, the "N88.8" is an inspection time for double checking
the stroke during the "Core 8 Out" movement.
M) N88.8: The action time setting value of the "Core 8 Out" movement.
N) P8888: It is a function selection within 4-mode. To move the cursor in here

or to turn the shuttle knob posterior to the Enter key of

I
I I!:I fur selecting the below items, then to confirm by tbe confirming key of

I!:J to end the command after the usage selection, the function select

content is described as below:

I N.a)
N.b)
NO USE: It is cancelled the spare function at "OFF" status.
Spare lOUT: It is a spare function.
N.c) Spare 2 OUT: It is a spare function.

I N.d) Spare 3 OUT: It is a spare function.

I
I
I
I

I
I Menu (6) Unscrew Devices Setting

2.9.1 Unscrew 1devicessetup (Optional)

I To move the cursor by choice of the intended parameter setting item as desired and to

the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key or to turn the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of I!:I fur selecting the action options, then to confirm by the

I 2.0perational Menu 2·51

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

confirming key of I!:J to end tbe command after setup, the related information of this menu (6)

Unscrew Devices Setting is described as below:

A) AAA: The action counters setting value of the "Fast Unscrew I In / Out" turns.
B) BBB: The action counters setting value of the "Slow Unscrew 1 In / Out" turns.
C) CCCCC: Display the grand total action counters which is equals to "Fast Unscrew 1 In /
Out" turns + "Slow Unscrew 1 In / Out" turns.
D) DD: The speed setting value of the "Fast Unscrew 1 In" movement.
E) EEEEE: The pressure setting value of the "Fast Unscrew 1 In" movement.
F) FF: The speed setting value of the "Slow Unscrew 1 In" movement and this speed will
be no use if the feedback form is selected by the limit switch.
G) GGGGG:The pressure setting value of the "Slow Unscrew 1 In" movement and this
pressure will be no use if the feedback form is selected by the limit switch.
H) HHHHHH: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Unscrew 1 In" function,
please choice the intended "Unscrew 1 In" mode by turning the shuttle

knob of posterior to the Enter key Of!!J for selecting

the action options, then to confirm by the confirming key of I!J to

end the command after setup, the function select content is described as
below:
H.a) Off: It is cancelled the "Unscrew 1 In" function at "OFF" status.
H.b) Before Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Unscrew 1 In" functions that it will be
doing the mold clamping stroke after fmishing the movement.
H.c) During Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Unscrew 1 In" functions to collocate with
the position of "JJJ1.J" in use that it will be activating the "Unscrew 1
In" movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to the setting
position of"JJJJ.f'.
H.d) After Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Unscrew 1 In" functions that it will be
doing the movement after fmishing the mold clamping to the ending
position.
I) 11J1.J: The startup position setting for the "Unscrew 1 In" functions that it will be
actuating the movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to this
position.
1) LLL.L: The action time setting value of the "Fast Unscrew 1 In" movement.
K) MMM.M: The action time setting value of the "Slow Unscrew I In" movement. If the
feedback form is selected by the limit switch, this pressure is no use.
L) NNNNNN: It is a feedback form selection within 3-mode for the "Unscrew 1 In"
lease choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle knob

of posterior to the Enter key of I!:I for selecting the

action options, then to confirm by the confirming key of I!J to end

the command after setup, the function select content is described as below:

2.0perational Menu 2-52 "SO ..( ..

'to01·
,E. .•.·.1'.....,...1
~!2
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I Jlr CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
L.a) Time: It is a mode selection setup by utilizing the timer to confirm the stroke fmish. The
"Fast Unscrew 1 In" is setting at "LLL.L" which will be switchover to the "Slow
Unscrew 1 In" action after finishing the time count. The "Slow Unscrew 1 In" is
setting at "MMM.M" which will be stopping the "Unscrew 1 In" movement after
fmishing the time count.
L.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection setup by utilizing the foreign limit switch to confirm
the stroke fmish.
L.c) Counter: It is a mode selection setup by the action counter to confrrm the stroke fmish.
The "CCCCC" is display the grand total action counters, it will be actuating

I the "Fast Unscrew 1 In" stage by "AAA" setting accordingly, then to activate
the "Slow Unscrew 1 In" stage by "BBB" later.
M) PP: The speed setting value of the "Fast Unscrew 1 Out" movement.
N) QQQQQ: The pressure setting value of the "Fast Unscrew 1 Out" movement.
0) RR:The speed setting value of the "Slow Unscrew 1 Out" movement.
P) SSSSS: The pressure setting value of the "Slow Unscrew lOut" movement.

I Q) TTTTTT: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Unscrew lOut" functions, please
choice the intended "Unscrew 1 Out" mode by turning the shuttle knob of

I posterior to the Enter key of !!J for selecting the action

I options, then to confirm by the confrrming key of !!J to end the

I Q.a)
Q.b)
command after selection, the function select content is described as below:
Off: It is cancelled the "Unscrew lOut" function at "OFF" status.
Before Open: It is a mode selection for the "Unscrew 1 Out" functions that it will be

I Q.c)
doing the mold opening stroke after fmishing the movement.
During Open: It is a mode selection for the "Unscrew lOut" functions to collocate with
the position of "UUUU. U" in use that it will be activating the "Unscrew
1 Out" movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to the setting
position of"UUUU.U".
Q.d) After Open: It is a mode selection for the "Unscrew 1 Out" functions that it will be
doing the movement after fmishing the mold opening to the ending position.
I R) UUUU.U: The startup position setting for the "Unscrew lOut" functions that it will be
actuating the movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to this
position.
I S)
T)
VVV.V: The action time setting value of the "Fast Unscrew 1 Out" movement.
XXX.X: The action time setting value of the "Slow Unscrew lOut" movement. If the
feedback form is selected by the limit switch, this pressure is no use.
I U) YYYYYY: It is a feedback form selection within 3-mode for the "Unscrew lOut"
functi choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle knob

I of posterior to the Enter key Of!!J for selecting the

I action options, then to confirm by the confirming key of I!l to end

the command after setup, the function select content is described as below:
U.a) Time: It is a mode selection setup by utilizing the timer to confirm the stroke finish. The
"Fast Unscrew lOut" is setting at "VVV.V" which will be switchover to the
I 2.0perational Menu 2-53 C 'E'
ISO .. '14001
MOl I'SQ
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

"Slow Unscrew lOut" action after finishing the time count .. The "Slow Unscrew
1 Out" is setting at "XXX.x" which will be stopping the "Unscrew 1 Out"
movement after fmishing the time count..
U.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection setup by utilizing the foreign limit switch to
confirm the stroke finish.
U.c) Counter: It is a mode selection setup by the action counter to confrrm the stroke fmish.
The "CCCCC" is display the grand total action counters, it will be actuating
the "Fast Unscrew 1 Out" stage by "AAA" setting accordingly, then to activate
the "Slow Unscrew 1 Out" stage by"BBB" later.

2.9.2 Spareunscrew 1devicessetup (Optional)

A) All: The action counter setting value of the "Spare Unscrew I Devices" turns.
B) BI: The speed setting value of the "Spare Unscrew 1 Devices" movement.
C) Cl l l l : The pressure setting value of the "Spare Unscrew I Devices" movement.
D) Dll111: It is a mode selection for the "Spare Unscrew 1 Devices" function. To move

the cursor in here and to turn the shuttle knob of posterior to the

Enter key of I!l for selecting the action options, then to confirm by the

confirming key of

conditions.
!:I to get the function, please vides the following

D.a) Off: It is cancelled the "Spare Unscrew I Devices" function at "OFF" status.
D.b) During Open: It is a mode selection for the "Spare Unscrew I Devices" which has to set
the "t:r~ilifm"
by "Aft!!~' at "Unscrew I Out" function as
well as to collocate with the "~' of "Ell 1.1" at the same time. It
will be actuating the "Spare Unscrew 1 Devices" function when the mold
opening is reaching to the position of "Ell 1.1" and being activated the
"Unscrew 1 Out" movement after finishing the mold opening.
E) EII1.1: The startup position setting for the "Spare Unscrew 1 Devices" function that it
will be doing the mold opening stroke after fmishing the movement.
F) Fl1.l: The action time setting value of the "Spare Unscrew 1 Devices" movement.
G) G 11111: It is a feedback form selection within 3-mode for the "Spare Unscrew I Devices"
ti,,>1, lease choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle knob of
.1.\.... ,"'

posterior to the Enter key of I!l for selecting the action

options, then to confirm by the confirming key of I!J to end the

command after setup, the function select content is described as below:

G.a) Time: It is a mode selection setup by utilizing the timer to confirm the stroke finish.
G.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection setup by utilizing the foreign limit switch to
confrrm the stroke fmish.
G.c) Counter: It is a mode selection setup by the action counter of "All" to confirm the
stroke finish.

2.0perational Menu
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
2-54 1.0
H01·.C·E.
*50
'14001
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 2.9.3 Time sequencechart 0/ the "Unscrew 1DeviceS»

Unscrew Inl OUI Stage Unscrew 1 In Unscrew lOut

Unscrew 1 In Action
Speed Setup DD FF
Pressure Setup EEEEE GGGGG I
I
II Unscrew I Fa ..
In Turn (AAA)
J .lUnscrew I Slow
In Turn (IIBIl)
J iI
Switchover by Counter !
~ Total <nand Turn (ecce-c) I!
I Unscrew lOut Action
Speed Setup
Pressure Setup
RR
SSSSS
PP
QQQQQ

Switchover by Counter
II
Unscrew I Slowd
Oul Tum (BBD)
II, Unscrew I Fas~
Out Turn (AA A)
I
1---1 Tota) Grand Turn (CCCCC') r--

I Unscrew 1 Action bll the Counter

Unscrew In! Out Stage Unscrew I In Unscrew lOut

I Unscrew 1 In Action
Speed Setup DD FF
Pressure Setup EEEEE GGGGG

I Switchover by Timer Unscrew 1 Fast

In Time (LLLL)
II]InUnscrew
Time(MMM.M)!
!
I Slow i
I
;

I Unscrew lOut Action

Speed Setup
Pressure Setup
RR
SSSSS
pp"'_
QQQQQ
Unscrew I Slow
I~~~::'(\~:'~~I
I Switchover by Timer

Unscrew 1 Action bll the Timer

OutTime(XXX.X) i

I 2.9.4 Unscrew2 devicessetup (Optional)

To move the cursor by choice of the intended parameter setting item as desired and to key-in
the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I 1!!1 to end the command. To tum the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

I 1!!1 for selecting the action options, then to confirm by the confirming key of 1!!1 to end the

command, the related information ofthis menu (6) Unscrew Devices Setting is described as below:
A) aaa: The action counters setting value of the "Fast Unscrew 2 In / Out" turns.
B) bbb: The action counters setting value of the "Slow Unscrew 2 In / Out" turns.
I C) ccccc: Display the grand total action counters which is equals to "Fast Unscrew 2 In /
Out" turns + "Slow Unscrew 2 In / Out" turns.
D) dd: The speed setting value of the "Fast Unscrew 2 In" movement.
E) eeeee: The pressure setting value of the "Fast Unscrew 2 In" movement.
F) ff: The speed setting value of the "Slow Unscrew 2 In" movement and this speed will
be no use if the feedback form is selected by the limit switch.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-55
. ..0.·..•.C· E· ·14001
·.•
s
HOt·
ISO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

G) ggggg: The pressure setting value of the "Slow Unscrew 2 In" movement and this
pressure will be no use if the feedback form is selected by the limit switch.
H) hhhhhh: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Unscrew 2 In" function, please
choice the intended "Unscrew 2 In" mode by turning the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of I!J for selecting the action

options, then to confirm by the confirming key of I!:I to end the

command after setup, the function select content is described as below:

H.a) Off: It is cancelled the "Unscrew 2 In" function at "OFF" status.
H.b) Before Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Unscrew 2 In" functions that it will be
doing the mold clamping stroke after finishing the movement.
H.c) During Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Unscrew 2 In" functions to collocate with
the position of ".ijjj.j" in use that it will be activating the "Unscrew 2 In"
movement when the mo Id clamping stroke is reaching to the setting
position of "jiii.j".
H.d) After Clamp: It is a mode selection for the "Unscrew 2 In" functions that it will be doing
the movement after fmishing the moId clamping to the ending position.
I) jj.ij.j: The startup position setting for the "Unscrew 2 In" functions that it will be
actuating the movement when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to this position.
1) 111.1: The action time setting value of the "Fast Unscrew 2 In" movement.
K) mmm.m: The action time setting value of the "Slow Unscrew 2 In" movement. If the
feedback form is selected by the limit switch, this pressure is no use.
L) nnnnnn: It is a feedback form selection within 3-mode for the "Unscrew 2 In"
choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of I!:I for selecting the action

options, then to confirm by the confirming key of I!:I to end the

command after setup, the function select content is described as below:

L.a) Time: It is a mode selection setup by utilizing the timer to confirm the stroke finish. The
"Fast Unscrew 2 In" is setting at "111.1"which will be switchover to the "Slow
Unscrew 2 In" action after fmishing the time count.. The "Slow Unscrew 2 In" is
setting at "mmm.m" which will be stopping the "Unscrew 2 In" movement after
fmishing the time count..
L.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection setup by utilizing the foreign limit switch to
confirm the stroke fmish.
L.c) Counter: It is a mode selection setup by the action counter to confirm the stroke fmish.
The "ccccc" is display the grand total action counters, it will be actuating the
"Fast Unscrew 2 In" stage by "aaa" setting accordingly, then to activate the
"Slow Unscrew 2 In" stage by "bbb" later.
M) pp: The speed setting value of the "Fast Unscrew 2 Out" movement.
N) qqqqq: The pressure setting value of the "Fast Unscrew 2 Out" movement.
0) IT: The speed setting value of the "Slow Unscrew 2 Out" movement.
P) sssss: The pressure setting value of the "Slow Unscrew 2 Out" movement.

2.0perational Menu 2-56

August 27, 20] 0 Revision:2.0
I /~Ia/ CDC200QwiN Operation Manual
/1 7
Q) tttttt: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the "Unscrew 2 Out" functions, please
choice the intended "Unscrew 2 Out" mode by turning the shuttle knob -of

posterior to the Enter key of I!!J for selecting the action

options, then to confirm by the confirming key of !!:I to end the

command after selection, the function select content is described as below:

Q.a) Off: It is cancelled the "Unscrew 2 Out" function at "OFF" status.
Q.b) Before Open: It is a mode selection for the "Unscrew 2 Out" functions that it will be
I Q.c)
doing the mold opening stroke after fmishing the movement.
During Open: It is a mode selection for the "Unscrew 2 Out" functions to collocate with
the position of "uuuu.u" in use that it will be activating the "Unscrew 2

I Out" movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to the setting
position of ''uuuu.u''.
Q.d) After Open: It is a mode selection for the "Unscrew 2 Out" functions that it will be
doing the movement after fmishing the mold opening to the ending position.
R) uuuu.u: The startup position setting for the "Unscrew 2 Out" functions that it will be
actuating the movement when the mold opening stroke is reaching to this
position.
S) vvv.v: The action time setting value ofthe "Fast Unscrew 2 Out" movement.
T) xxx.x: The action time setting value of the "Slow Unscrew 2 Out" movement. If the

I U)
feedback form is selected by the limit switch, this pressure is no use.
yyyyyy: It is a feedback form selection within 3-mode for the "Unscrew 2 Out"
functio choice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle knob of

I posterior to the Enter key of !!:I for selecting the action

I
I
options, then to confirm by the confirming key of I!J to end the

command after choosing a mode vides the below functions.

U.a) Time: It is a mode selection setup by utilizing the timer to confirm the stroke finish. The
"Fast Unscrew 2 Out" is setting at "vvv.v" which will be switchover to the "Slow
Unscrew 2 Out" action after fmishing the time count .. The "Slow Unscrew 2 Out"
is setting at "xxx.x" which will be stopping the "Unscrew 2 Out" movement after
fmishing the time count ..
U.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection setup by utilizing the foreign limit switch to
confirm the stroke fmish.

I U.c) Counter: It is a mode selection setup by the action counter to confirm the stroke finish.
The "ccccc" is display the grand total action counters, it will be actuating the
"Fast Unscrew 2 Out" stage by "aaa" setting accordingly, then to activate the
"Slow Unscrew 2 Out" stage by "bbb" later.

2.9.5 Spareunscrew 2 devicessetup (Optional)

I A)
B)
all: The action counter setting value of the "Spare Unscrew 2 Devices" turns.
bl: The speed setting value of the "Spare Unscrew 2 Devices" movement.
C) cllll: The pressure setting value of the "Spare Unscrew 2 Devices" movement.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-57 ISO (·E
ft01 ISO
··14001
August 27, 2010 Re\'ision:2.0

;CDC200owiN Operation Manual

D) dlllll: It is a mode selection for the "Spare Unscrew 2 Devices" function. To move the
I
cursor in here and to tum the shuttle knob of posterior to the

Enter key of ~ for selecting the action options, then to confirm by the

confirming key of ~ to get the function, please vides the following

conditions.
D.a) Off: It is cancelled the "Spare Unscrew 2 Devices" function at "OFF" status.
D.b) During Open: It is a mode selection for the "Spare Unscrew 2 Devices" which has to set
the '~~' by "After Open" at "Unscrew 2 Out" function as
well as to collocate with the '~j)j' of "ell l.1" at the same time. It
will be actuating the "Spare Unscrew 2 Devices" function when the mold
opening is reaching to the position of "elll.l" and being activated the
"Unscrew 2 Out" movement after fmishing the mold opening.
E) e 111.1: The startup position setting for the "Spare Unscrew 2 Devices" function that it
will be doing the mold opening stroke after finishing the movement.
F) fll.l: The action time setting value of the "Spare Unscrew 2 Devices" movement.
G) gl1111: It is a feedback form selection within 3-mode for the "Spare Unscrew 2
Devices" lease cho ice the intended core mode by turning the shuttle

knob of posterior to the Enter key of I!::J for selecting the

action options, then to confirm by the confirming key of ~ to end the

command after choosing a mode vides the below functions.

G.a) Time: It is a mode selection setup by utilizing the timer to confirm the stroke fmish.
G.b) Limit Switch: It is a mode selection setup by utilizing the foreign limit switch to
confirm the stroke fmish.
G.c) Counter: It is a mode selection setup by the action counter of "a 11" to confirm the
stroke fmish.
2.9.6 Time sequencechart of the "Unscrew 2 Devices"
Unscrew In! Out Stage Unscrew 2 In Unscrew 2 Out

1_ln~~21I'}Action
Speed Setup
_j••••••••
dd ff
-----------1
Pressure Setup eeeee sssss
!
IIC:-U=-nscr-ew---::-2 III
F=-as-'·, Unscrew 2 Slow I
. i L In Tum (aaa). J Il
In Tum (hhb) I
Switchover by Counter] '--;:::===::.1:====:;---"
I---~
i
TOlar Grand Tum (ccccc) I-

Unscrew 2 OU1ACliOh_-------
Speed Setup
__ _J••• IIIII••• .__
rr pp
Pressure Setup SSSSS I qqqqq
I j ,

Switcbover by Counter
!II Unscrew
i Out
2 SIC'\'
Turn (bbb)
IIII j lOutUnscrew 2 Fastl!
Tum (aaa) :
! i i
I
! !
Unscrew 2 Action by the Counter

2.0perational Menu 2-58

fiGt ..
E. ISO
'SO ( ....
14t)tH
August 27, 2010 Re\'ision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

Unscrew Inl Out Stage Unscrew 2 In Unscrew 2 Out

Unscrew 2 In Action ¥("~E. "

Speed Setup dd If
Pressure Setup eeeee ggggg

Switchover by Timer Unscrew2 Fast Unscrew 2 Slow

i
I
In Time (111.1) In Time(mmru.m)

unscrcw20UtAction _. ~-
Speed Setup i rr i pp !
Pressure Setup I sssss I qqqqq i
II Unscrew 2 Slow III Unscrew 2 Fast H
II Out lime (xxx.x) I!lOut Time(vvv.....~ 1
Switchover by Timer
! ! I
I Unscrew 2 Action by the Timer

I 2.10 Air blower setting

I
I

I
I

Menu (156) Air Blower Setting

I To move the cursor by choice of the intended parameter setting item as desired and to key-in

I!J
the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of
I to end the command, the related information of this menu (156) Air Blower Setting is

described as below:

2.10.1 Air blow 1setup

A) AAAAAAAA: It is a mode selection within 5-mode for the "Air Blow 1" function,
choice the intended action mode by turning the shuttle knob of

I posterior to the Enter key of I!J for selecting the

I 2.0perational Menu 2-59 .$0

9001 .
C..E 14001
15
••.
0
.....
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

function items, then to confirm by the confirming key of I!J to

end the command after the usage selection, the function select content
is described as below:
A.a) No Use: It is cancelled the "Air Blow I" function at "OFF" status.
Ab) Before Open: It will be actuating the "Air Blow I" motion before the mold opening
movement that the "Air Blow I" is in need of those times setting control
collocation at "DDD.D" & "EEE.E". The "Air Blow I" setting value is
controlled by an action time of "EEE.E" that it will be stopping the "Air
Blow 1" motion after completing the timer count, then to carry out the
mold opening stroke. The delay time of"DDD.D" will be simultaneously
outputting the time during the "Air Blow 1" motion and it will be doing
the mold opening stroke after completing the delay time of "DDD.D"
count, at this time, if the action time of "EEE.E" is not finished yet, it
will be continuously the "Air Blow 1" motion during the mold opening
movement until an action time of "EEE.E" to end the count time or the
mold opening reaching to the ending position, then to stop the "Air Blow
1" motion just so.
Ac) Open Pos AT: The "Air Blow 1" is in need of those positions control collocation at
"BBBB.B" & "CCCC.C" which will be outputting the "Air Blow 1"
motion when the mold opening stroke is reaching to the "BBBB.B"
position and it will be stopping the "Air Blow 1" motion when the mold
opening stroke is reaching to the "cccc.c" or to the mold opening in
the ending position just so.
Ad) After Open: It will be actuating the "Air Blow 1" motion after the mold opening
movement that the "Air Blow 1" is in need of those times setting control
collocation at "DDD.D" & "EEE.E". The delay time of "DDD.D" will be
counting after the mold opening to the ending position, then to carry out
the "Air Blow 1" motion. The "Air Blow 1" setting value is controlled by
an action time of "EEE.E" that it will be stopping the "Air Blow 1"
motion after completing the timer count.
Ae) Function A: It is a spare function selection (Automatic cooling time counting). It will be
carrying out this function by actuating the plasticising movement under the
auto modes. The delay time of "DDD.D" will be counting when starting
the plasticising movement, then to output the "Air Blow 1" motion after
completing the timer count. The "Air Blow I" setting value is controlled
by an action time of "EEE.E" that it will be stopping the "Air Blow 1"
motion after completing the timer count.
A.f) Function B: It is a spare function selection. (Optional)
Ag) Function C: It is a spare function selection. (Optional)
B) BBBB.B: It is the startup position to actuate the "Air Blow 1" motion output when the
mold opening is reaching to this setting position.
C) CCCC.C: It is the stoppage position to stop the "Air Blow I" motion when the mold
opening is reaching to this setting position.
D) DDD.D: The delay time is done according to the motion select application within
2-kind of (1) Delay the mold opening time setting value then to for the "Air
Blow before the Mold Open" & (2) Delay the air blow time setting value
after the mold opening to the ending position.
E) EEE.E: The action time setting value for outputting the "Air Blow 1" motion.

2.0perational Menu 2-60 ISO CE·· 14001

·9001 ISO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I I~I-V :CDC200owiN Operation Manual
/1 ~
F) Manual Air Blow I Setup: ~

Under the manual mode, to press down the manual operation button of ~ on
I
the computer panel when it is selected the "Air Blow 1" function, the computer will be

I outputting the "Air Blow 1" motion and it will be stopping by releasing this button.

I 2.10.2 Ai, blow 2 setup (Optional)

I A) FFFFFFFF: It is a mode selection within 5-mode for the "Air Blow 2" function, please
choice the intended action mode by turning the shuttle knob of

I posterior to the Enter key of !:I for selecting the

I function items, then to confirm by the confirming key of I!J to end

I the command after the usage selection, the function select content is
described as below:
Aa) No Use: It is cancelled the "Air Blow 2" function at "OFF" status.
Ab) Before Open: It will be actuating the "Air Blow 2" motion before the mold opening
movement that the "Air Blow 2" is in need of those times setting control
collocation at "JJJ.J" & "KKK.K". The "Air Blow 2" setting value is
controlled by an action time of "KKK.K" that it will be stopping the "Air
Blow 2" motion after completing the timer count, then to carry out the
mold opening stroke. The delay time of "JJJ.J" will be simultaneously
outputting the time during the "Air Blow 2" motion and it will be doing
the mold opening stroke after completing the delay time of "JJJ.J" count,
at this time, if the action time of "KKK.K" is not fmished yet, it will be
continuously the "Air Blow 2" motion during the mold opening movement
until an action time of "KKK.K" to end the count time or the mold
opening reaching to the ending position, then to stop the "Air Blow 2"
I motion just so.
Ac) Open Pos AT: The "Air Blow 2" is in need of those positions control collocation at

I "GGGGG" & "HHHH.H" which will be outputting the "Air Blow 2"
motion when the mold opening stroke is reaching to the "GGGGG"
position and it will be stopping the "Air Blow 2" motion when the mold
opening stroke is reaching to the "HHHH.H" or to the mold opening in
the ending position just so.
Ad) After Open: It will be actuating the "Air Blow 2" motion after the mold opening
movement that the "Air Blow 2" is in need of those times setting control
collocation at "JJJ.f' & "KKK.K". The delay time of "JJJ.J" will be
counting after the mold opening to the ending position, then to carry out
I the "Air Blow 2" motion. The "Air Blow 2" setting value is controlled by
an action time of "KKK.K" that it will be stopping the "Air Blow 2"
motion after completing the timer count.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-61 '$0. ( ..E·•... tSO,.
9001 14001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

A,e) Function A: It is a spare function selection (Automatic cooling time counting). It will be
carrying out this function by actuating the plasticising movement under the
auto modes. The delay time of "JJJ.J" will be counting when starting the
plasticising movement, then to output the "Air Blow 2" motion after
completing the timer count. The "Air Blow 2" setting value is controlled
by an action time of "KKK.K" that it will be stopping the "Air Blow 2"
motion after completing the timer count.
At) Function B: It is a spare function selection. (Optional)
Ag) Function C: It is a spare function selection. (Optional)
B) GGGGG: It is the startup position to actuate the "Air Blow 2" motion output when the
mold opening is reaching to this setting position.
C) HHHH.H: It is the stoppage position to stop the "Air Blow 2" motion when the mold
opening is reaching to this setting position.
D) JJJ.J: The delay time is done according to the motion select application within 2-kind of
(1) Delay the mold opening time setting value then to for the "Air Blow before
the Mold Open" & (2) Delay the air blow time setting value after the mold
opening to the ending position.
E) KKK.K: The action time setting value for outputting the "Air Blow 2" motion.

[~[iJ>~I
F) Manual Air Blow 2 Setup:

Under the manual mode, to press down the manual operation button of on

the computer panel when it is selected the "Air Blow 2" function, the computer will be
outputting the "Air Blow 2" motion and it will be stopping by releasing this button.
2.10.3 Ai, blow 3setup (Optional)

A) LLLLLLLL: It is a mode selection within 5-mode for the "Air Blow 3" function, please
choice the intended action mode by turning the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of I!J for selecting the

function items, then to confirm by the confirming key of I!J to end

the command after the usage selection, the function select content is
described as below:
A.a) No Use: It is cancelled the "Air Blow 3" function at "OFF" status.
Ab) Before Open: It will be actuating the "Air Blow 3" motion before the mold opening
movement that the "Air Blow 3;' is in need of those times setting control
collocation at "PPP.P" & "QQQ.Q". The "Air Blow 3" setting value is
controlled by an action time of"QQQ.Q" that it will be stopping the "Air
Blow 3" motion after completing the timer count, then to carry out the
mold opening stroke. The delay time of "PPP.P" will be simultaneously
outputting the time during the "Air Blow 3" motion and it will be doing
the mold opening stroke after completing the delay time of "PPP.P"
count, at this time, if the action time of "QQQ.Q" is not finished yet, it
will be continuously the "Air Blow 3" motion during the mold opening
movement until an action time of "QQQ.Q" to end the count time or the
mold opening reaching to the ending position, then to stop the "Air Blow
3" motion just so.

2.0perational Menu 2-62

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I A.c) Open Pos AT: The "Air Blow 3" is in need of those positions control collocation at
"MMMM.M" & ''NNNN.N'' which will be outputting the "Air Blow 3"
motion when the mo ld opening stroke is reaching to the "MMMM.M"

I position and it will be stopping the "Air Blow 3" motion when the mold
opening stroke is reaching to the ''NNNN.N'' or to the mold opening in
the ending position just so.

I Ad) After Open: It will be actuating the "Air Blow 3" motion after the mold opening
movement that the "Air Blow 3" is in need of those times setting control
collocation at "PPP.P" & "QQQ.Q". The delay time of "PPP.P" will be
counting after the mold opening to the ending position, then to carry out
the "Air Blow 3" motion. The "Air Blow 3" setting value is controlled by
an action time of "QQQ.Q" that it will be stopping the "Air Blow 3"

I Ae)
motion after completing the timer count.
Function A: It is a spare function selection (Automatic cooling time counting). It will be
carrying out this function by actuating the plasticising movement under the

I auto modes. The delay time of "PPP.P" will be counting when starting the
plasticising movement, then to output the "Air Blow 3" motion after
completing the timer count. The "Air Blow 3" setting value is controlled
by an action time of "QQQ.Q" that it will be stopping the "Air Blow 3"
motion after completing the timer count.
At) Function B: It is a spare function selection. (Optional)

I Ag)
B)
Function C: It is a spare function selection. (Optional)
MMMM.M: It is the startup position to actuate the "Air Blow 3" motion output when
the mold opening is reaching to this setting position.

I C)

D)
NNNN.N: It is the stoppage position to stop the "Air Blow 3" motion when the mold
opening is reaching to this setting position.
PPP.P: The delay time is done according to the motion select application within 2-kind

I of (I) Delay the mold opening time setting value then to for the "Air Blow
before the Mold Open" & (2) Delay the air blow time setting value after the
mold opening to the ending position.
E) QQQ.Q: The action time setting value for outputting the "Air Blow 3" motion.
F) Manual Air Blow 3 Setup:

I Under the manual mode, to press down the manual operation button of I~~~I on

the computer panel when it is selected the "Air Blow 3" function, the computer will be
I outputting the "Air Blow 3" motion and it will be stopping by releasing this button.
2.10.4 Air blow 4 setup (Optional)

I A) RRRRRRRR: It is a mode selection within 5-mode for the "Air Blow 4" function,
choice the intended action mode by turning the shuttle knob of

I posterior to the Enter key of I!J for selecting the

function items, then to confrrm by the confirming key of I!J to

end the command after the usage selection, the function select content is
described as below:
Aa) No Use: It is cancelled the "Air Blow 4" function at "OFF" status.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-63 ISO
9001 C 'E'14001
' lSO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

A.b) Before Open: It will be actuating the "Air Blow 4" motion before the mold opening
movement that the "Air Blow 4" is in need of those times setting control
collocation at "UUU.U" & ''VVV.V''. The "Air Blow 4" setting value is
controlled by an action time of"VVV.V" that it will be stopping the "Air
Blow 4" motion after completing the timer count, then to carry out the
mold opening stroke. The delay time of "UUU.U" will be simultaneously
outputting the time during the "Air Blow 4" motion and it will be doing
the mold opening stroke after completing the delay time of "UUU.U"
count, at this time, if the action time of "VVV.V" is not finished yet, it
will be continuously the "Air Blow 4" motion during the mold opening
movement until an action time of "VVV.V" to end the count time or the
mold opening reaching to the ending position, then to stop the "Air Blow
4" motion just so.
Ac) Open Pos AT: The "Air Blow 4" is in need of those positions control collocation at
"SSSS.s" & "TTTT.T' which will be outputting the "Air Blow 4"
motion when the mold opening stroke is reaching to the "SSSS.S"
position and it will be stopping the "Air Blow 4" motion when the mold
opening stroke is reaching to the "TTTT.T" or to the mold opening in
the ending position just so.
Ad) After Open: It will be actuating the "Air Blow 4" motion after the mold opening
movement that the "Air Blow 4" is in need of those times setting control
collocation at "UUU.U" & "VVV.V". The delay time of "UUU.U" will be
counting after the mold opening to the ending position, then to carry out
the "Air Blow 4" motion. The "Air Blow 4" setting value is controlled by
an action time of "VVV.V" that it will be stopping the "Air Blow 4"
motion after completing the timer count.
A.e) Function A: It is a spare function selection (Automatic cooling time counting). It will be
carrying out this function by actuating the plasticising movement under the
auto modes. The delay time of "Ul.Il.l.U" will be counting when starting
the plastic ising movement, then to output the "Air Blow 4" motion after
completing the timer count. The "Air Blow 4" setting value is controlled
by an action time of "VVV.V" that it will be stopping the "Air Blow 4"
motion after completing the timer count.
A.f) Function B: It is a spare function selection. (Optional)
Ag) , Function C: It is a spare function selection. (Optional)
B) SSSS.S: It is the startup position to actuate the "Air Blow 4" motion output when the
mold opening is reaching to this setting position.
C) TTTT.T: It is the stoppage position to stop the "Air Blow 4" motion when the mold
opening is reaching to this setting position.
D) UUU. U: The delay time is done according to the motion select application within 2-kind
of (I) Delay the mold opening time setting value then to for the "Air Blow
before the Mold Open" & (2) Delay the air blow time setting value after the
mold opening to the ending position.
E) VVV.V: The action time setting value for outputting the "Air Blow 4" motion.

"E;.~I
F) Manual Air Blow 4 Setup:

Under the manual mode, to press down the manual operation button of [ on

the computer panel when it is selected the "Air Blow 4" function, the computer will be
outputting the "Air Blow 4" motion and it will be stopping by releasing this button.

2.0perational Menu
August 27, 2010 Re\'ision:2.0
2-64 1'0
MOl'"
CE' 14"'
ISO
I ;CDC200owiN Operation Manual
2.10.5 Time sequence chart/or the "AirBlow" action be/ore the mold opening
Mold Opening Sequence

I Mold Opening Stroke

I
Air Blow Action before the Mold Opening

(For example:AirBlow 1) Open position

2.10.6 Time sequence chartfor the "AirBlow" action among 0/ the mold opening
I Mold Opening Stroke

Synchronously Air Blow Action

at the StartupPosition of the Mold Opening

(Fore\llfllPlc: Air Blow I) Stoppage position Startup Position

(CCCC.C) (BBBBB)

Open END position Clamp END position

I 2.10.7 Time sequence chart/or the "AirBlow" action after the mold opening
Mold Opening Stroke

Air Blow Action alIer the Mold Opening

Action Time Delay

(Forcxample: Air Blow 1) (EEE.E)

Open END position

I 2.11 Modal thickness adjustment setting

I
I
I

I
I
Menu (7) Modal Thickness Adjustment
I 2.0perational Menu 2-65
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

2.11.1 Attention

It is only allowed the qualified maintenance personnel or the trained person for carrying out
the modal thickness adjustment & the operation.

If it had the core pulling function in use after switchover to this menu under the manual
mode, the computer will be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm1219>Has To Close The Core
Option While Doing The Modal Thickness Adjustment" to remind / warn of the user / operator on
the top screen, please inspect the present core position in status on the molds. If the core position is
normal able to no use the core pulling function, please cancel the core pulling function at this time,
otherwise, it shall not carry out the modal thickness adjustment.

If the front safety guard it is not closed yet, the computer will be appearing the alarm
message of "Alarm0918>Front Safety Guard Is Not Close Yet" to remind / warn of the user /
operator on the top screen, please detect the 2-limit switch in the front safety guard.

If the mold adjustment motor overload protection device is being actuated during the mold
adjustment motor running, it will be cut off the mold adjustment movement and the computer will
be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0916> Mold Thickness Motor Is Overload" on the top
screen, please detect the mold adjustment motor overload protection device and the mold
adjustment mechanism.

It is counted the modal adjustment distance by "Proximity Switch (Sensor) or Limit Switch"
while the mold adjustment motor is running, if there is no action within an inspection time for this
counting signal, the computer will be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0922>Mold Thickness
Counter Limit Switch Is Abnormal" on the top screen and stopping the motion, please detect the
counting switch & the mold adjustment mechanism, don't change the inspection time at random,
otherwise it will be damaged the mold adjustment mechanism at that time.

Please switch OFF the core pulling or unscrew devices functions of use to avoid the molds
being damaged at this time.

If the ejector backward is not returned back to the home position, the computer will be
appearing the alarm message of "Alarml006>Master Ejector Backward Did Not Return To Home

Position" on the top screen, please press down the manual Ejector backward button of [ ~ 1
till appearing the hinting message of "Message 1307>Ejector Backward Stroke Is Completed" on the
top screen that it is so. If the actual position of the ejector backward is being changed not in the set
ending position during the mold thickness adjustment, the computer will be appearing the alarm
message of" Alarm0986> Abnormal/Jitter Action" on the top screen.

If the feedback signal of the molds ejector backward is not confirmed yet, the computer will
be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0995>Molds ejector Backward Did Not Return To Home
Position" on the top screen, please detect the feedback signal on the molds ejector. At this time, if it
is fitted with the feedback confirmation signal on the machine ejector, but it is not confirmed yet,
the computer will be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0919>Ejector Backward Limit Switch
Failure Inspection", please detect the feedback signal of the molds ejector.
2.0perational Menu 2-66
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

I Ifit is smaller than the limit switch of the mold thickness forward when the mold thickness
forward is in action, the computer will be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0920>Minimum
Mold Thickness Stroke Is Over" on the top screen, at this time, it shall not carry out the mold
thickness forward movement.

If it is bigger than the limit switch of the mold thickness backward when the mold thickness
backward is in action, the computer will be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0921>Maximum
Mold Thickness Stroke Is Over" on the top screen, at this time, it shall not carry out the mold
thickness backward movement.

2.11.2 Modal ThicknessAdjustment menu description

To move the cursor by choice of the intended parameter setting item as desired and to key-in

I!:I
the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I to end the command, the related information of this menu (7) Modal Thickness

Adjustment is described as below:

I A) AAAA.A: Display the "Current Mold Height" on the machine.

B) BBBB.B: It is the mold height setting value for the intended production molds size.

I!:I'
C) CCCCCC: It is a soft key to startup the automatic mold thickness adjustment function,

just to move the cursor in here, then to press down the Enter key of

I at the time, the computer will be activating the automatic mold thickness
sequences in accordance with the production molds size.

I D) DDDDDD: Display the mold thickness adjustment status. Either of the mold thickness
backward is in action which will be displaying the corresponding message
of "~~" or the mold thickness forward is in action, which will be

I E)
displaying the corresponding message of'
action, it will be displaying the message of' J
" in here. If there is no

EEEE: This parameter is a clamping force setting for the production molds in demand
when carrying out the automatic clamping force adjustment.
F) FF: It is the speed setting value to operate the mold clamping movement in manual
under this menu.

I G)

H)
GGGGG: It is the pressure setting value to operate the mold clamping movement in
manual under this menu.
HH: It is the speed setting value to operate the mold opening movement in manual
under this menu.
I) 11111: It is the pressure setting value to operate the mold opening movement in manual
under this menu.
1) KKKK.K: It is stoppage position of the mold opening when carrying out the automatic
I clamping force adjustment. It will be opening the molds until reaching to this
position during the automatic clamping force sequences if it wants to act the
mold thickness backward movement.
K) LLLLLL: It is a soft key to startup the automatic clamping force adjustment, just to

move the cursor in here, then to press down the Enter key Of!!J ' at the

time, the computer will be carrying out the automatic clamping force
sequences in accordance the setting value.

2.0perational Menu 2-67 .so

9001
C"E.14G01
1$0
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

;CDC200owiN Operation Manual

L) MMMMM: Display the "Maximum Clamping Tonnage" with a maximum oils pressure
value on this machine.
M) NNN.N: Display the "Startup Position" of the moving platen when generates by the
maximum clamping force, if the position of the moving platen is over than
this position, the automatic clamping force sequences will be getting the
failure accordingly.
N) PPPP.P: Display the "Current Position" of the mold clamping. (mm)
0) QQQQQ: Display the "Current Position" of the mold clamping. (VoltlP)

I!!l'
P) RRRRRR: It is a soft key to startup the modal integrated sequences adjustment. To

move the cursor in here, then to press down the Enter key of the

computer will be carrying out the modal integrated sequences adjustment in

accordance the production molds size setting value, which will be doing the
automatic mold thickness adjustment sequences, then to act the automatic
clamping force adjustment after fmishing the mold height adjustment.

2.11.3 "Mold Height Adjustment" operation method

If the mold opening is not in the ending position when carrying out the "Modal Thickness
Adjustment" function, the computer will be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0975>Opening

Stroke Did Not Finish Yet", please press down the manual Mold Open button of [ ~~ 1 till
appearing the hinting message of "Message1305>Mold Open Stroke Is Completed" on the top
screen. If the ejector backward is not returned back to the ending position, the computer will be
appearing the alarm message of "Alarm I006>Master Ejector Backward Did Not Return To Home

Position", please press down the manual Ejector Backward button of [ ~ 1 till appearing the
hinting message of "Message1307>Ejector Backward Stroke Is Completed" on the top screen.

If the actual mold height is wrong not match with the "Current Mold Height ", please
modify the "~_Il1LBf~4It:Im~.i!IDtliq!" for resetting the setting value on the
menu (15) Home Position Reset Menu that it is so.

2.11.4 "Manual Mold ThicknessAdjustment" operation mode

Molds forward adjustment to decrease the mold height by raising up the

clam~ilorce, a!!~ the computer will be appearing the hinting message
~: of"~" at "Wil!Il,~~"
column on the screen.

Molds backward adjustment to increase the mold height by dropping down the
~. clamping force, at this time, the computer will be appearing the hinting message
~. of''_rj'' at "fll~Jlg" column on the screen.

2.0perational Menu 2-68 eso CEo ISO

9001 ." ' '1'14001
August 27,2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 2.11.5 The proceduresfor the automatic mold thickness adjustment

m'
A) To key-in the measuring value to the setting column of the mold height at "BBBB.B" for
the used mold thickness (For example: 430.0 mm), later to press down the Enter key of

then to move the cursor to the "CCCCCC" location by pressing down the

confirming key of I!:J again, at this time, the computer will be set out the

II
automatic mold thickness adjustment, if it wants to stop the motion on the midway,

I please press down the key of or escape out of this menu.

B) After finishing the automatic mold thickness adjustment, please load and put the molds
I into the machine clamp mechanism mating with the locating orifice of the stationary
platen by utilizing the mold locating ring for the mold centering as well as to close up the
stationary platen side, then to mount the molds at the stationary platen by employing the
I mold clamp.

I
C) It ought to full lock up the molds to be drawn near the molds by pressing down the

I manual Mold Clamp button of [ ~ and to mount the molds by employing the

I mold clamp to the machine, then to dismantle the eyebolt to end the command. (Please
be note that the clamp speed shall not too fast.)

I 2.11.6 The proceduresfor the automatic clampingforce adjustment

I A) After mounting the molds on the machine, to use the cursor keys and to move the cursor

!!J'
to the "EEEE" location, then to key-in the intended clamping force as desired and to

I press down the Enter key of again to move the cursor to the "LLLLLL"

location, finally to press down the confirming key of I!J ,at this time, the computer

will be carrying out the automatic clamping force adjustment sequences and appearing
the hinting message of "Message1385>Automatic Mold Clamping Force Adjustment Is

III
In Action" on the top screen, if it wants to stop the motion on the midway, please press

down the key of or escape out of this menu.

B) When fmishing the automatic clamping force adjustment, this hinting message will be

I automatically vanishing and reappearing the alarm message of "Alarm0975>Opening

Stroke Did Not Finish Yet", at this time, please open the molds that it is so. If the motion
is failed, the computer will be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0911>Preset

I Clamping Force Is Over" on the top screen, please review the setting parameters
correctly, then to move the cursor to the "LLLLLL" location over there for restarting the
automatic clamping force adjustment sequences.

I 2.0perational Menu 2-69

'•.0
$Oat..· C··E·.·J$
.·.·Q
'14001. :.'.
August 27,2010 Revisioo:2.0

,CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

2.12 Mold change adjustment

Menu (158) Mold Change Adjustment

2.12.1 Description

It is only allowed the qualified maintenance personnel or the trained person for carrying out
the mold change adjustment & the operation.

If it had the core pulling function in use after switchover to this menu under the manual
mode, the computer will be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm 1219>Has To Close The Core
Option While Doing The Modal Thickness Adjustment" to remind / warn of the user / operator on
the top screen, please inspect the present core position in status on the molds. If the core position is
normal and unavailable the core pulling function, please cancel the core pulling function at this time,
otherwise, it shall not carry out the mold change adjustment.

To move the cursor by choice of the intended parameter setting item as desired and to key-in

!!J
the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the command, the related information of this menu (158) Mold Change Adjustment

is described as below:

I!:I'
A) AAAAAA: It is a soft key to startup the mold change adjustment function, to move the

cursor in here by pressing down the key of at this time, the

computer will be forward the mold clamping movement till the mold halves
mating just, then to run an automatically home position calibration.
B) BB: The mold clamp speed setting value in operation under this menu.
C) CCCCC: The mold clamp pressure setting value in operation under this menu.
D) DD: The mold open speed setting value in operation under this menu.
E) EEEEE: The mold open pressure setting value in operation under this menu.
F) FFFF.F: Display the maximum opening stroke of the machine mechanism. (mm)
G) GGGGG: Display the minimum mold thickness of the machine mechanism. (mm)

2.0perational Menu 2-70 IS0.

.001 c. : .E·· ..1.400:1
.. 00
1$
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
H) HHHHH: Display the minimum origin analog value of the machine mechanism from
the computer computing. (Volt/P)
I) JJJJJ: Display the maximum origin analog value of the machine mechanism from the

I 1) KKKK.K:
computer computing. (VoltIP)
It is capable of the maximum opening stroke (mm) at the present molds
installed on the machine, which will be automatically verifying this parameter

I K)
after fmishing an automatic mold change adjustment.
LLLL.L: It is an offset difference value between the minimum mold height of the
machine mechanism and the used current mold thickness. After fmishing an
automatic mold change adjustment, it will be automatically modifying this
parameter (2.0 mm).
L) MMMMM: It is an offset difference analog value between the minimum mold height of

I the machine mechanism and the used current mo ld thickness, After

fmishing an automatic mold change adjustment, it will be automatically
modifying this parameter (VoltlP.

I 2.12.2 Manual mold open & mold clamp operation

A) Please don't operate the mold clamping movement ifthere is no molds inside the platen,
just to load and to put the molds into the machine clamp mechanism under this menu till
I mating with the locating orifice of the stationary platen by utilizing the mold locating
ring for the mold centering as well as to close up the stationary platen side, then to hold

I down unable to release the manual Mold Clamp button of I !.! 1, at this time, the

I computer will be carrying out the mold clamping movement via by the "1SI:~11i1
~ BB" & the "1f~i"11~~11 CCCCC" exempted the parameter control
from the menu (1) Mold Open / Clamp Setting, if it wants to stop the mold clamping
I movement on the midway, please release this button that it is so.

[~~I'
B) Under this menu, just to hold down unable to release the manual Mold Open button of

I at this time, the computer will he carry~g out the mold opening

I movement via by the "i!~df<ti~ ¥1'5~tI DO" & the "lillfiliJff~lIs1'j'lEEEEE"

l!1AW1i:;-,a;M'~~}~h"~~;~!'~ kW ..._-' ~~";h"Z~;~'

exempted the parameter control from the menu (1) Mold Open / Clamp Setting, if it
wants to stop the mold clamping movement on the midway, please release this button
I that it is so.

2.12.3 Automatic mold change adjustment setup

I A) To load and put the molds into the machine clamp mechanism under this menu till
mating with the locating orifice of the stationary platen by utilizing the mold locating
ring for the mold centering and to press down the manual Mold Clamp button of

inward the molds to close up the stationary platen side, then to dismantle

B)
I
2.0perational Menu 2-71
August 27,2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

"Message1383>Mold Thickness Adjustment Is In Action" on the top screen for carrying

II
out the mold change adjustment sequences, if it wants to stop the mold adjustment on

the midway, please press down the key of or switchover to the operation

monitoring menu just so.

C) Mold close confirm.
C.a) Hydraulic Clamping machine:
When it is getting the close confirmation of the mold mating from the 2-travel
cylinders, the computer will be computing an application data of the
mechanism in accordance with this mo Id thickness and automatically
molds "~Sil~ KKKK.K" and both of offset difference values at
LLLL.L" & the minimum mold height of the machine mechanism at
fiim'! MMMMM".
m"'~T-i"Z~,'1:>..Mikf1
C.b) Two-platen machine: (TP)
After confirming the mold mating from the 2-travel cylinders, it will be doing the tie
bars pitch match calibration motion (Mold thickness adjustment or high-pressure
cylinder charge) till completing the pitch match calibration and stop the pitch match
calibration motion. After the pitch match calibration motion finish, just to carry out the
split nut lock till fmishing the limit switch of the split nut lock confirm. When an
automatic mold thickness adjustment is ending the command, the computer will be
automatically vanishing the hinting message of "Message] 383>Mold Thickness
Adjustment Is In Action" on the top screen and computing an application data of the
machine mechanism at the same time and automatically modifying the molds "_1
fIimtI KKKK.K" and both of offset difference values at ' LLLL.L" & the
minimum mold height of the machine mechanism at' MMMMM".

If the mold is not fitted on the machine, please do not act the procedures of the mold
change adjustment, to avoid the molds being damaged.
2.13 High-pressure cylinder & Split nut cylinder setting

Menu (150) Lock-up Devices Setting

2.0perational Menu 2-72

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
This menu is only applied for the Two-platen (TP) series machines, to move the cursor by
choice of the intended parameter setting item as desired and to the intended parameter within

the alphanumeric key, or to tum the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

I !!:I for selecting the action options, then to confirm by the confirming key of !!J to end

I the command, the related information of this menu (150) Lock-up Devices Setting is described as
below:

I A) Split Nut In action setup (It is an optional function to collocate with the hydraulic oils
loop system).
A.a) AA: The speed setting value of the "Split Nut Lock" movement.
A.b) BBBBB: The pressure setting value of the "Split Nut Lock" movement.
It could be operated the "Split Nut Lock" movement by simultaneously pressing down those

I keys of II &11·
I B) "High-pressure Clamp" action setup (It is an optional function to be collocated with the
hydraulic oils loop system).

I B.a) CCC: The speed setting value of the "High-pressure Clamp" movement.
B.b) DDDDD: The pressure setting value of the "High-pressure Clamp" movement.
B.c) EEEE: The clamping force setting value of the "High-pressure Clamp" movement.
B.d) eeeee: Display the actual clamping force value of the "High-pressure Clamp".
C) "High-pressure Open" action setup (It is an optional function to be collocated with the
hydraulic oils loop system).
I C.a) GGGGG: The oils leaking pressure setting of the "High-pressure Open" that it is a lowest
ending pressure setting value.
C.b) HHH: The speed setting value of the "High-pressure Open" movement.
C.c) J1111:The pressure setting value of the "High-pressure Open" movement.
D) Split Nut Out action setup (It is an optional function to be collocated with the hydraulic

I oils loop system).

D.a) KK: The speed setting value of the "Split Nut Unlock" movement.
D.b) LLLLL: The pressure setting value of the "Split Nut Unlock" movement.
I It could be operated the "Split Nut Unlock" movement by simultaneously pressing down those

keys of II &11·
E) MMMMMM: It is a spare function selection to collocate with the hydraulic oils loop
system to be disposed for the molds options.
F) NNNNN: The maximum pressure limit of The high-pressure cylinder that it will be
appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0911>Preset Clamping Force Is Over"
I G)
if the actual clamping pressure is over than this setting value.
PPPPP: It is a spare pressure setting value.

I 2.0perational Menu 2·73 ISO CE ISO

9001··· 14001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

;CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

2.14 Injection setting

Menu (8) Injection Setting

2.14.1 Injectionsetup

A) wwwwwwwW: It is applied the "Action Stage" selections of the injection from 2nd
stage to 10th To move the cursor in here and to tum the shuttle

knob of posterior to the Enter key of I!l for

!!:I
selecting the intended "Action Stage", then to confirm by the

confirming key of to end the command after selection.

B) dddd.d: Display an actual "Current Position" of the injection. (Not allow setting)
C) ccc.cc: Display an action-time of the plasticising movement in operation. (Not allow
setting)
D) bbb.bb: Display an action-time of the injection movement in operation. (Not allow
setting)
E) aaaa.a: Display the cushion after fmishing the injection movement.(Not allow setting)
F) ZZZZ.Z: Display the "Ending Position" of the plasticising that it is also applied for the
100 % injection stroke.
G) All: The speed setting value of the "1 st stage (Step 1) injection" movement.
H) B 1111: The pressure setting value ofthe "1 st stage (Step 1) injection" movement.

m
I) C111.I: The ending position setting value of the "1st stage (Step 1) injection" movement.
To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm

by the confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating

and verifying the percentage of "D 11" in the proportional transposition & the
weight of "E 1111" setting values at "1 st stage (Step 1) injection" mutually in

2.0perational Menu 2·74

August 27, 20]0 Revision:2.0
I ,CDC200owiN Operation Manual

I
rI
accordance with the position of "C 111.1" at "I st stage (Step I) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

I 1) D 11: The percentage setting value of the" I ststage (Step 1) injection" in the proportional
transposition based on 100% of the plasticising ending position at "ZZZZ.Z". To

I
I!J
key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by

the confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating and

I verifying the position of"Cll1.I" setting value at "l " stage (Step 1) injection" in

II
accordance with the percentage of "D 11" at "1st stage (Step I) injection" if

I pressing down the key of again.

I K) E1111: The weight setting value of the "1st stage (Step 1) injection". To key-in the

I!J
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

I confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating and

verifying the position of "C 111.1" setting value at "1 st stage (Step 1) injection"

rI
in accordance with the weight of "E 1111" at "1 st stage (Step 1) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

I L) Fl1.11: Display the "Capture Time" of the "1st stage (Step 1) injection" movement in
operation. (Not allow setting)

I M)
N)
A22: The speed setting value of the "2nd stage (Step 2) injection" movement.
B2222: The pressure setting value of the "2nd stage (Step 2) injection" movement.
0) C222.2: The ending position setting value of the "2nd stage (Step 2) injection" movement.

I
by the confirming key of "1
To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm

to end the command. It will be calculating

and verifying the percentage of "D22" in the proportional transposition & the
weight of "E2222" setting values at "2nd stage (Step 2) injection" mutually in

1'1
accordance with the position of "C222.2" at "2nd stage (Step 2) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

I P) D22: The percentage setting value of the "2nd stage (Step 2) injection" in the proportional
transposition based on 100% of the plasticising ending position at "ZZZZ.Z". To

I I!J
key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by

the confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating and

I verifying the position of"C2222" setting value at "2nd stage (Step 2) injection" in

rI
accordance with the percentage of "D22" at "2nd stage (Step 2) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

Q) E2222: The weight setting value of the "2nd stage (Step 2) injection". To key-in the
I 2.0perational Menu 2·75
August 27, 2010 Re\'ision:2.0

CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

I
confirming key of m
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

to end the command. It will be calculating and

verifying the position of "C222.2" setting value at "2nd stage (Step 2) injection"

II
in accordance with the weight of "E2222" at "2nd stage (Step 2) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

R) F22.22: Display the "Capture Time" of the "2nd stage (Step 2) injection" movement in
operation. (Not allow setting)
S) A33: The speed setting value of the "3rd stage (Step 3) injection" movement.
T) B3333: The pressure setting value of the "3rd stage (Step 3) injection" movement.
U) C333.3: The ending position setting value of the "3rd stage (Step 3) injection" movement.
To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm

by the confrrming key Of!!J to end the command. It will be calculating

and verifying the percentage of "D33" in the proportional transposition & the
weight of "E3333" setting values at "3rd stage (Step 3) injection" mutually in

rI
accordance with the position of "C333.3" at "3rd stage (Step 3) injection" if

pressing down the key of again. I

V) D33: The percentage setting value of the "3rd stage (Step 3) injection" in the proportional
transposition based on 100% of the plasticising ending position at "ZZZZ.Z". To
I
e:J
key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to conftrm by

the confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating and I

verifying the position of"C333.3" setting value at "3rd stage (Step 3) injection" in

II
accordance with the percentage of "D33" at "3rd stage (Step 3) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

W) E3333: The weight setting value of the "3rd stage (Step 3) injection". To key-in the

I!:J
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to conftrm by the

confirming key of to end the command. It will he calculating and

verifying the position of"C333.3" setting value at "3rd stage (Step 3) injection"

rI
in accordance with the weight of "E3333" at "3rd stage (Step 3) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

X) F33.33: Display the "Capture Time" of the "3rd stage (Step 3) injection" movement.
(Not allow setting)
Y) A44: The speed setting value of the "4th stage (Step 4) injection" movement.
Z)
AA)
B4444: The pressure setting value of the "4thstage (Step 4) injection" movement.
C444.4: The ending position setting value of the "4th stage (Step 4) injection" movement.
I
To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm

2.0perational Menu 2-76

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 CDC20DOWiN Operation Manual

I by the confrrming key of I!J to end the command. It will be calculating

I and verifying the percentage of "D44" in the proportional transposition & the
weight of "E4444" setting values at "4th stage (Step 4) injection" mutually in

II
accordance with the position of "C444.4" at "4th stage (Step 4) injection" if

I pressing down the key of again.

I BB) D44: The percentage setting value of the "4th stage (Step 4) injection" in the proportional
transposition based on 100% of the plasticising ending position at "ZZZZ.Z". To

I!J
key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by

I the confrrming key of to end the command. It will be calculating and

I verifying the position of "C444.4" setting value at "4th stage (Step 4) injection" in

II
accordance with the percentage of "D44" at "4th stage (Step 4) injection" if

I CC)
pressing down the key of again.

E4444: The weight setting value of the "4th stage (Step 4) injection". To key-in the

I I!J
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

confrrming key of to end the command. It will he calculating and

I verifying the position of "C444.4" setting value at "4th stage (Step 4) injection"

II
in accordance with the weight of "E4444" at "4th stage (Step 4) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

DD) F44.44: Display the "Capture Time" of the "4th stage (Step 4) injection" movement in
operation. (Not allow setting)
EE) A55: The speed setting value of the "5th stage (Step 5) injection" movement.
FF) B5555: The pressure setting value of the "5th stage (Step 5) injection" movement.
GG) C555.5: The ending position setting value of the "5thstage (Step 5) injection" movement.

"1
To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm

I by the confrrming key of to end the command. It will be calculating

and verifying the percentage of "D55" in the proportional transposition & the
I weight of "E5555" setting values at "5th stage (Step 5) injection" mutually in

II
accordance with the position of "C555.5" at "5th stage (Step 5) injection" if

I pressing down the key of again.

HH) D55: The percentage setting value of the "5th stage (Step 5) injection" in the proportional
I transposition based on 100% of the plasticising ending position at "ZZZZ.Z". To
key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by

the confirming key Of!J to end the command. It will be calculating and

verifying the position of "C555.5" setting value at "5th stage (Step 5) injection" in
I 2.0perational Menu 2-77 '.0..· C E· rs. o.
900t 14001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

rI
accordance with the percentage of "D55" at "5th stage (Step 5) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

II) E5555: The weight setting value of the "5th stage (Step 5) injection". To key-in the

I!l
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating and

verifying the position of"C555.5" setting value at "5th stage (Step 5) injection"

fI
in accordance with the weight of "E5555" at "5th stage (Step 5) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

JJ) F55.55: Display the "Capture Time" of the "5th stage (Step 5) injection" movement in
operation. (Not allow setting)
KK) A66: The speed setting value of the "6th stage (Step 6) injection" movement.
LL) B6666: The pressure setting value of the "6thstage (Step 6) injection" movement.
MM) C666.6: The ending position setting value of the "6th stage (Step 6) injection" movement.

I!J
To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm

by the confrrming key of to end the command. It will be calculating

and verifying the percentage of "D66" in the proportional transposition & the
weight of "E6666" setting values at "6th stage (Step 6) injection" mutually in

pressing down the key of rI

accordance with the position of "C666.6" at "6th stage (Step 6) injection" if

again.

NN) D66: The percentage setting value of the "6th stage (Step 6) injection" in the proportional
transposition based on 100% of the plasticising ending position at "ZZZZ.Z". To
key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by

the confirming key Of!J to end the command. It will be calculating and

verifying the position of"C666.6" setting value at "6th stage (Step 6) injection" in

II
accordance with the percentage of "D66" at "6th stage (Step 6) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

00) E6666: The weight setting value of the "6th stage (Step 6) injection". To key-in the

I!J
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

confrrming key of to end the command. It will be calculating and

verifying the position of"C666.6" setting value at "6th stage (Step 6) injection"

PP)
rI
in accordance with the weight of "E6666" at "6th stage (Step 6) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

F66.66: Display the "Capture Time" of the "6th stage (Step 6) injection" movement in
operation. (Not allow setting)

2.0perational Menu
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
2-78 .'.$.0
9OOt· ( ,E•.,14001
'$0
I /~I·/ CDC2000wiN
t11'- '.
Operation Manual

I QQ)
RR)
A77: The speed setting value of the "th stage (Step 7) injection" movement.
B7777: The pressure setting value of the "7th stage (Step 7) injection" movement.
SS) C777.7: The ending position setting value of the "7th stage (Step 7) injection" movement.
I
!!I
To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm

by the confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating

I and verifying the percentage of "077" in the proportional transposition & the
weight of "E7777" setting values at "7th stage (Step 7) injection" mutually in

II
accordance with the position of "C777. 7" at "7th stage (Step 7) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

I TT) 077: The percentage setting value of the "7th stage (Step 7) injection" in the proportional
transposition based on 100% of the plasticising ending position at "ZZZZ.Z". To

I
I!J
key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by

the confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating and

verifying the position of "C777.7" setting value at "ih stage (Step 7) injection" in

II
accordance with the percentage of "077" at "7th stage (Step 7) injection" if

I pressing down the key of again.

E7777: The weight setting value of the "th stage (Step 7) injection". To key-in the
I UU)

I!J
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating and

verifying the position of "C777. 7" setting value at "th stage (Step 7) injection"

II
in accordance with the weight of "E7777" at "7th stage (Step 7) injection" if
I pressing down the key of again.

VV) F77.77: Display the "Capture Time" of the -r: stage (Step 7) injection" movement in
operation. (Not allow setting)
WW) A88: The speed setting value of the "8th stage (Step 8) injection" movement.
I XX) B8888: The pressure setting value of the "8th stage (Step 8) injection" movement.

m
YY) C888.8: The ending position setting value of the "8th stage (Step 8) injection" movement.
To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm

by the confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating

I and verifying the percentage of "088" in the proportional transposition & the
weight of "E8888" setting values at "8th stage (Step 8) injection" mutually in

II
accordance with the position of "C888.8" at "8th stage (Step 8) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

I ZZ) 088: The percentage setting value of the "8th stage (Step 8) injection" in the proportional
transposition based on 100% of the plasticising ending position at "ZZZZ.Z". To
key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by
I 2.0perational Menu 2-79
9001 .( E··
IS~ ... I'SO
..140101
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0

CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

the confirming key of I!:I to end the command. It will be calculating and

verifying the position of"C888.8" setting value at "8th stage (Step 8) injection" in

II
accordance with the percentage of "088" at "8th stage (Step 8) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

AAA) E8888: The weight setting value of the "8th stage (Step 8) injection". To key-in the

I!J
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating and

verifying the position of"C888.8" setting value at "8th stage (Step 8) injection"

II
in accordance with the weight of "E8888" at "8th stage (Step 8) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

BBB) F88.88: Display the "Capture Time" of the "8th stage (Step 8) injection" movement in
operation. (Not allow setting)
CCC) A99: The speed setting value of the "9th stage (Step 9) injection" movement.
DOD) B9999: The pressure setting value of the "9th stage (Step 9) injection" movement.
EEE) C999.9: The ending position setting value of the "9th stage (Step 9) injection" movement.

I!J
To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm

by the confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating

and verifying the percentage of "099" in the proportional transposition & the
weight of "E9999" setting values at "9th stage (Step 9) injection" mutually in

II
accordance with the position of "C999.9" at "9th stage (Step 9) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

FFF) 099: The percentage setting value of the "9th stage (Step 9) injection" in the proportional
transposition based on 100% of the plasticising ending position at "ZZZZ.Z". To

I!:I
key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by

the confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating and

verifying the position of "C999.9" setting value at "9th stage (Step 9) injection" in

II
accordance with the percentage of "099" at "9th stage (Step 9) injection" if

pressing down the key of again.

m
GGG) E9999: The weight setting value of the "9th stage (Step 9) injection". To key-in the
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating and

verifying the position of"C999.9" setting value at "9th stage (Step 9) injection"
in accordance with the weight of "E9999" at "9th stage (Step 9) injection" if

2.0perational Menu
August 27,2010 Revisioo:2.0
2-80 'SO C ·E·
11001..... I'SO
. 14001
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I pressing down the key of 1'1 again.

I HHH) F99.99: Display the "Capture Time" of the "9th stage (Step 9) injection" movement in
operation. (Not allow setting)

I III)
JJJ)
AAA: The speed setting value of the "10th stage (Step 10) injection" movement.
BBBBB: The pressure setting value of the "loth stage (Step 10) injection" movement.
KKK) CCCC.C: The ending position setting value of the "10th stage (Step 10) injection"
I movement. To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key,

then to confirm by the confirming key of !!J to end the command. It

will be calculating and verifying the percentage of "DDD" in the

proportional transposition & the weight of "EEEEE" setting values at "lOth
I stage (Step 10) injection" mutually in accordance with the position of
"cccc.c" at "lOth stage (Step 10) injection" if pressing down the key of

I 1'1 again.

DDD: The percentage setting value of the "10th stage (Step 10) injection" in the
I LLL)
proportional transposition based on 100% of the plasticising ending position at
"ZZZZ.Z". To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then

I to confirm by the confirming key of !!J to end the command. It will be

calculating and verifying the position of "cccc.c" setting value at "10th stage
I
I
(Step 10) injection" in accordance with the percentage of "DDD" at "lOth stage

(Step 10) injection" if pressing down the key of II again.

MMM) EEEEE: The weight setting value of the "lOth stage (Step 10) injection". To key-in the

I intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

confirming key Of!!J to end the command. It will he calculating and

I verifying the position of "cccc.c" setting value at "10th stage (Step 10)

injection" ifpressing down the key of II

injection" in accordance with the weight of "EEEEE" at "lOth stage (Step 10)

again.

NNN) FFF.FF: Display the "Capture Time" of the "lOth stage (Step 10) injection" movement
in operation. (Not allow setting)
With regard to the weight setting value in the every stage, it must be defmed the density
of the used raw material at first, otherwise, the whole weight settings will be getting
no function or given a wrong data after conversion, please refer to the section of 2.22
Common plastic material temperature memory setting.

I
2.0perational Menu 2-81
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

2.14.2 The time sequence chart of the injection
2.14.2.1 Time sequence chart of the 10-stage injection
10-stageInjection (WWWWWWWW)

-- .
SteplO Step9 Step8 Step7 Step6 Step5 Step4 Step3 Step2 Step1
I _l _l 1 I I _l I I
IDB__ gg(PPP.P)
~
.J ~
Position switchover to Holding"pr.(= .C~ "~
~'"
)_.E iI
~
Speed Setup
~
;; AAA A99 ASS A77 A66 ASS A44 A33 A22 All
Pressure Setup
f BBBBB B9999 BSBBS B7777 B6666 B5555 84444 83333 82222 B1111
or
-
"
Ending Position Setup =C C999.9 CBB8.S C777.7 C666.6 C555.5 C444.4 C333.3 C222.2 C111.1

2.14.3 Holding-pressuresetup

To move the cursor by choice of the injection setting item and to key-in the intended

parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of ~ to end

the command, the holding-pressure information of this menu (8) Injection Setting is described as
below:
A) XXXXXXXX: It is applied the "Action Stage" selections of the plastic ising from 2nd
stage to 10th To move the cursor in here and to turn the shuttle

knob of posterior to the Enter key of !!:Ifor selecting

I!J
the intended "Action Stage", then to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the command after selection.

B) Gll: The speed setting value of the "1 st stage (Step 1) holding-pressure" movement.
C) HIIII: The pressure setting value of the "1 st stage (Step 1) holding-pressure" movement.
D) 111.1: The action-time setting value of the "1 st stage (Step 1) holding-pressure" movement.
E) Kl: The RAMP setting of the "1 st stage (Step 1) holding-pressure" movement switchover
from "1st stage (Step 1) holding-pressure" to "2nd stage (Step 2) holding-pressure"
motion and the action-time is equal to "111.1 * KI % ".
F) G22: The speed setting value of the "2nd sta§e (Step 2) holding-pressure" movement.
G) H2222: The pressure setting value ofthe "2n stage (Step 2) holding-pressure" movement.
H) 122.2: The action-time setting value of the "2ndstage (Step 2) holding-pressure" movement.
J) K2: The RAMP setting of the "2nd stage (Step 2) holding-pressure" movement switchover
from "2nd stage (Step 2) holding-pressure" to "3rd stage (Step 3) holding-pressure"
motion and the action- time is equal to "122.2 * K2% ".
1) G33: The speed setting value of the "3rd stage (Step 3) holding-pressure" movement.
K) H3333: The pressure setting value of the "3rd stage (Step 3) holding-pressure" movement.
L) 133.3: The action-time setting value of the "3rd stage (Step 3) holding-pressure" movement.
M) K3: The RAMP setting of the "3rd stage (Step 3) holding-pressure" movement switchover
from "3rd stage (Step 3) holding-pressure" to "4th stage (Step 4) holding-pressure"
motion and the action-time is equal to "133.3 * K3% ".
N) G44: The speed setting value of the "4th stage (Step 4) holding-pressure" movement.
0) H4444: The pressure setting value of the "4th stage (Step 4) holding-pressure" movement.
P) J44.4: The action-time setting value of the "4th stage (Step 4) holding-pressure" movement.

2.0perational Menu 2-82 1$.·.0(·

M01.
.E1<4001
IS.!;O
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000WIN
•
Operation Manual

I Q) K4: The RAMP setting of the "4th stage (Step 4) holding-pressure" movement switchover
from "4th stage (Step 4) holding-pressure" to "5th stage (Step 5) holding-pressure"
motion and the action-time is equal to "J44.4 * K4% ".
I R)
S)
G55: The speed setting value of the "5th stage (Step 5) holding-pressure" movement.
H5555: The pressure setting value of the "5thstage (Step 5) holding-pressure" movement.
T) J55.5: The action-time setting value of the "5thstage (Step 5) holding-pressure" movement.
I U) K5: The RAMP setting of the "5th stage (Step 5) holding-pressure" movement switchover
from "5th stage (Step 5) holding-pressure" to "6th stage (Step 6) holding-pressure"
motion and the action-time is equal to "J55.5 * K5%".
I V)
W)
G66: The speed setting value of the "6th stage (Step 6) holding-pressure" movement.
H6666: The pressure setting value of the "6thstage (Step 6) holding-pressure" movement.

I X)
Y)
J66.6: The action-time setting value of the "6thstage (Step 6) holding-pressure" movement.
K6: The RAMP setting of the "6th stage (Step 6) holding-pressure" movement switchover
from "6th stage (Step 6) holding-pressure" to "7th stage (Step 7) holding-pressure"
motion and the action-time is equal to "J66.6 * K6% ".
I Z) G77: The speed setting value of the "7th stage (Step 7) holding-pressure" movement.
AA) H7777: The pressure setting value ofthe "7thstage (Step 7) holding-pressure" movement.
BB) 177.7: The action-time setting value of the "7thstage (Step 7) holding-pressure" movement.
CC) K7: The RAMP setting of the "7th stage (Step 7) holding-pressure" movement switchover
from "7th stage (Step 7) holding-pressure" to "8th stage (Step 8) holding-pressure"
I DD)
motion and the action-time is equal to "J77.7 * K7% ".
G88: The speed setting value of the "8th stage (Step 8) holding-pressure" movement.
EE) H8888: The pressure setting value of the "8thstage (Step 8) holding-pressure" movement.
I FF)
GG)
J88.8: The action-time setting value of the "8thstage (Step 8) holding-pressure" movement.
K8: The RAMP setting of the "8th stage (Step 8) holding-pressure" movement switchover
from "8th stage (Step 8) holding-pressure" to "9th stage (Step 9) holding-pressure"
I HH)
motion and the action-time is equal to "J88.8 * K8% ".
G99: The speed setting value of the "9th stage (Step 9) holding-pressure" movement.
II) H9999: The pressure setting value of the "9thstage (Step 9) holding-pressure" movement.
I J1)
KK)
J99.9: The action-time setting value of the ''9thstage (Step 9) holding-pressure" movement.
K9: The RAMP setting of the "9th stage (Step 9) holding-pressure" movement switchover
from "9th stage (Step 9) holding-pressure" to "lOth stage (Step 10) holding-pressure"
motion and the action-time is equal to "J99.9 * K9% ".
LL) GGG: The speed setting value of the "lOth stage (StepIO) holding-pressure" movement.

I MM)
NN)
HHHHH: The pressure settingvalue of the "1Olhstage (Step10) holding-pressure"movement.
JJJ.J: The action-time setting value of the "1Olhstage (Step10) holding-pressure" movement.
00) KK: The RAMP setting of the -io" stage (Step 10) holding-pressure" movement that the
I PP)
action-time is equal to "J1.J * KK% ".
MMM.M: The leaking position setting value for detecting the injection stroke. Under
the auto modes, it will be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0969>
I Plasticising Capacity Is Insufficient Or Material Leaking" on the top screen
if the injection stroke is over than this position.
QQ) LLL.L: The choke position setting value for detecting the injection stroke. Under the
I auto modes, it will be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0958>Nozzle
Orifice Is Choke" on the top screen ifthe injection stroke is not reaching to this
position after fmishing the injection time count.
I RR) PPP.P: The whole action-time setting value from 1st stage to io" stage injection
movements, which will be automatically switchover to the holding-pressure
stroke after finishing this time count.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-83 ISO
.00•... CE· 1~1
..15.0
August 27,2010 Revision:2.0

CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

SS) NNNNNN: It is a function selection for the boost injection that it is valid to use the

double-pump on this machine, please turn the shuttle knob of

!:I
for selecting 2-mode of (I) "Use" (2) "No Use" in here, then to confirm by

the confirming key of to end the command after selection.

!!:I'
TT) RRRRRR: It is a function selection to switchover to the "VIP Convert" control by the

pressure setting. Please press down the confirming key of then to

turn the shuttle knob of for selecting 2-mode of (1) "Use" (2)

''No Use" by the confirming key of I!J to end the command after

selection. If it is selected by "Use" status that it will be making the

comparison between the actual pressure of the Injection Cylinder and the
pressure setting at "TTTTT" during the injection sequences; if it is bigger
than the "TTTTT" setting value via by the system detected, the computer
will be automatically switchover to the Holding-pressure stroke.
UU) TTTIT: It is an action-pressure setting value to convert the injection stroke into the
Holding-pressure stroke that it will be switchover to the Holding-pressure
stroke when the actual oils pressure is over than this setting during the
injection sequences from 2nd stage to 10thstage.

fil Do not operate the injection movement when the barrel temperature is not reaching to
the reasonably proceeding temperature. Please do not carry out the carriage forward
~ movement to withstand the molds or to operate the injection movement if it is not fully
locked the molds, otherwise, it will be causing the molds being could be damaged.

2.14.4 The time sequence chart of the holding-pressure

2.14.4.1 Time sequence chart of the 10-stage holding-pressure

lO-stage Hcldieg-pressure StepiO Step 9 StepS Slep? S1ep6 S.q:>5 Step 4 Step 3 Step 2 Stept
(XX)()()()(XX)

Speed Setup GOG G99 G88 G77 G66 G55 G44 033 G22 Gil
Pressure Setup HHHHH H9999 H8888 H7777 H6666 H5555 H4444 H3333 H2222 Hllll
-- -- --
Action-time Setup JJJ.J J99.9 J88.8 J77.7 J66.6 J55.5 J44.4 133.3 J22.2 Jll.I

Slope (RAMP) Setup(%) KK% 1(9"/0 K8% K7"/O K6% K5% K4% K3% K2% Kl%

f~:ff::?~::::::::::U:IU)L:::IU?lnfT[[[[~f.:_:_:_::i::::...
I -- - -: I ( I --- -; I I -- -- -- ~

!::•••·-;···-···
H88 ~ ~_______ '
H99 --- ---- -- - - --- ----- ----- --:--- -- -- '
HHH-----HHHi2-::::-:-I~--~~'
~~~"""""","",""~

2.0perational Menu 2-84 C·E··

ISO .. . 140()1
9901 'SO
August 27, 2010 Re\'ision:2.0
I ,CDC2000W iN Operation Manual

I 2.15 Plasticising & Melt decompression setting

I
I
I
I
I
I Menu (17) Plasticising & Decompression Setting

To move the cursor to by choice of the plasticising & the suck back/melt decompression

I!:I
setting items and to key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by
I the confrrming key of to end the command, the holding-pressure information of this menu

I (17) Plastic ising & Decompression Setting is described as below:

2.15.1 Plosticising& melt decompression setup

A) PPPPPPPP: It is applied the "Action Stage" selections of the plasticising from 2nd stage

m
to 8th • To move the cursor in here and to tum the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of for selecting the

I
I B)
m
intended "Action Stage", then to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the command.

aaa.a: Display the "Ending Position" of the plasticising. (Not allow setting)
C) bbbb: Display the "Screw RPM " during the plasticising motion. (Not allow setting)
I D) ccc.cc: Display the action-time of the plasticising movement in operation. (Not allow
setting)
E) dddd.d: Display the actual "Current Position" of the injection. (Not allow setting)
I F)
G)
fff.f Display the machine collocation specification of an injection screw diameter.
AAAAA: The speed setting value of the "Suck Back" movement before the plasticising.
H) BBBBB: The pressure setting value of the "Suck Back" movement before the
I I)
plasticising.
CCC.C: The ending position setting value of the "Suck Back" movement before the
plastic ising.

2.0perational Menu 2-85 'SO

M01 C·E···14M1
'$0 ..
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

J) HIlI: The speed setting value of the "1 st stage (Step 1) plasticising" movement.
K) J 1111: The pressure setting value of the "1 st stage (Step 1) plasticising" movement.
L) KIll.I: The ending position setting value of the "l " stage (Step 1) plasticising"
movement. To move the cursor in here and to key-in the intended parameter

1!2
within .the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the command. It will be calculating and verifying the

percentage of "L 11" in the proportional transposition & the weight of "M 1111"
setting values at "1 st stage (Step 1) plasticising" mutually in accordance with

rI
the position of"Klll.I" at "1 st stage (Step I) plastic ising" ifpressing down the

key of again.

M) LII: The percentage setting value of the "1 st stage (Step 1) plasticising' in the proportional

1!2
transposition. To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then

to confirm by the confirming key of to end the command. It will be

calculating and verifying the position of "KIll. I " setting value at "1 st stage (Step

rI
I) plasticising" in accordance with the percentage of "L 11" at "1 st stage (Step 1)

plasticising" if pressing down the key of again.

N) MIlII: The weight setting value of the "1 st stage (Step 1) plasticising". To key-in the

I!l
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating and

verifying the position of "KIll.I" setting value at "1st stage (Step 1)

rI
plasticising" in accordance with the weight of "MIIlI" at "1st stage (Step 1)

plasticising" if pressing down the key of again.

0) NIIII: The back-pressure setting value of the "1 st stage (Step 1) plasticising' movement.
P) H222: The speed setting value of the "2nd stage (Step 2) plastic ising" movement.
Q) J2222: The pressure setting value of the "2nd stage (Step 2) plastic ising" movement.
R) K222.2: The ending position setting value of the "2nd stage (Step 2) plastic ising"
movement. To move the cursor in here and to key-in the intended parameter

!!:J
within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the command. It will be calculating and verifying the

percentage of "L22" in the proportional transposition & the weight of

"M2222" setting values at "2nd stage (Step 2) plasticising" mutually in

rI
accordance with the position of "K222.2" at "2nd stage (Step 2) plastic ising" if

pressing down the key of again.

S) L22: The percentage setting value of the "2nd stage (Step 2) plasticising" in the proportional
transposition. To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then

2.0perational Menu 2-86

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I to confirm by the confirming key of I!:I to end the command. It will he

I calculating and verifying the position of "K222.2" setting value at "2nd stage (Step

II
2) plasticising" in accordance with the percentage of "L22" at "2nd stage (Step 2)

I T)
plasticising' if pressing down the key of again.

M2222: The weight setting value of the "2nd stage (Step 2) plasticising". To key-in the

I I!J
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

confrrming key of to end the command. It will he calculating and

I verifying the position of "K222.2" setting value at "2nd stage (Step 2)

II
plasticising" in accordance with the weight of "M2222" at "2nd stage (Step 2)

I plasticising" if pressing down the key of again.

U) N2222: The back-pressure setting value of the "2nd stage (Step 2) plasticising" movement.
I V)
W)
H333: The speed setting value of the "3rd stage (Step 3) plasticising" movement.
13333: The pressure setting value ofthe "3rd stage (Step 3) plastic ising" movement.
X) K333.3: The ending position setting value of the "3rd stage (Step 3) plasticising"
I movement. To move the cursor in here and to key-in the intended parameter

I!:I
within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the command. It will he calculating and verifying the

percentage of "L33" in the proportional transposition & the weight of

I "M3333" setting values at "3rd stage (Step 3) plasticising" mutually in

II
accordance with the position of "K333.3" at "3rd stage (Step 3) plasticising" if

I pressing down the key of again.

Y) L33: The percentage setting value of the "3rd stage (Step 3) plasticising" in the proportional

I!l
transposition. To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then

to confirm by the confirming key of to end the command. It will he

I calculating and verifying the position of "K333.3" setting value at "3rd stage (Step

II
3) plasticising" in accordance with the percentage of "L33" at "3rd stage (Step 3)

I plasticising" ifpressing down the key of again.

I Z) M3333: The weight setting value of the "3rd stage (Step 3) plasticising". To key-in the

I!l
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

I confirming key of to end the command. It will he calculating and

verifying the position of "K333.3" setting value at "3rd stage (Step 3)

I II
plasticising" in accordance with the weight of "M3333" at "3rd stage (Step 3)

piasticising" if pressing down the key of again.

I 2.0perational Menu 2-87

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

AA) N3333: The back-pressure setting value of the "3rd stage (Step 3) plasticising" movement.
BB) H444: The speed setting value of the "4th stage (Step 4) plasticising" movement.
CC) J4444: The pressure setting value of the "4th stage (Step 4) plasticising" movement.
DD) K444.4: The ending position setting value of the "4th stage (Step 4) plasticising"
movement. To move the cursor in here and to key-in the intended parameter

!!J
within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the command. It will he calculating and verifying the

percentage of "L44" in the proportional transposition & the weight of

"M4444" setting values at "4th stage (Step 4) plastic ising" mutually in

II
accordance with the position of "K444.4" at "4th stage (Step 4) plastic ising" if

pressing down the key of again.

EE) L44: The percentage setting value of the "4thstage (Step 4) plasticising" in the proportional

1!3
transposition. To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then

to confirm by the confirming key of to end the command. It will he

calculating and verifying the position of "K444.4" setting value at "4th stage (Step

II
4) plasticising" in accordance with the percentage of "L44" at "4th stage (Step 4)

plasticising" ifpressing down the key of again.

FF) M4444: The weight setting value of the "4th stage (Step 4) plasticising". To key-in the

I!l
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

confirming key of to end the command. It will he calculating and

verifying the position of "K444.4" setting value at "4th stage (Step 4) I

II
plasticising" in accordance with the weight of "M4444" at "4th stage (Step 4)

plasticising" ifpressing down the key of again.

GG) N4444: The back-pressure setting value of the "4th stage (Step 4) plasticising" movement.
HH) H555: The speed setting value of the "5th stage (Step 5) plasticising" movement.
II) J5555: The pressure setting value of the "5th stage (Step 5) plasticising" movement.
JJ) K555.5: The ending position setting value of the "5th stage (Step 5) plasticising"
movement. To move the cursor in here and to key-in the intended parameter

I!:J
within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the command. It will he calculating and verifying the

percentage of "L55" in the proportional transposition & the weight of

"M5555" setting values at "5th stage (Step 5) plasticising" mutually in

II
accordance with the position of "K555.5" at "5th stage (Step 5) plasticising" if

pressing down the key of again. .

KK) L55: The percentage setting value of the "5th stage (Step 5) plasticising" in the proportional
transposition. To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then

2.0perational Menu 2-88 lS0

,"1
C·E 1:4001
lSO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I to confirm by the confrrming key of !!J to end the command. It will he

I calculating and verifying the position of "K555.5" setting value at "5th stage (Step

II
5) plasticising" in accordance with the percentage of "L55" at "5th stage (Step 5)

I pIasticising" if pressing down the key of again.

LL) M5555: The weight setting value of the "5th stage (Step 5) plasticising". To key-in the
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

confirming key Of!!J to end the command. It will he calculating and

verifying the position of "K555.5" setting value at "5th stage (Step 5)

II
plasticising" in accordance with the weight of "M5555" at "5th stage (Step 5)

I plasticising" if pressing down the key of again.

MM) N5555: The back-pressure setting value of the "5th stage (Step 5) plastic ising" movement.
I NN)
00)
H666: The speed setting value of the "6th stage (Step 6) plasticising" movement.
J6666: The pressure setting value ofthe "6th stage (Step 6) plasticising" movement.
PP) K666.6: The ending position setting value of the "6th stage (Step 6) plasticising"
I
m
movement. To move the cursor in here and to key-in the intended parameter
within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I to end the command. It will he calculating and verifying the

percentage of "L66" in the proportional transposition & the weight of

"M6666" setting values at "6th stage (Step 6) plastic ising" mutually in

rI
accordance with the position of "K666.6" at "6th stage (Step 6) plastic ising" if

I pressing down the key of again.

QQ) L66: The percentage setting value of the "6th stage (Step 6) plasticising" in the proportional

I!:I
transposition. To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then

to confirm by the confrrming key of to end the command. It will he

I calculating and verifying the position of "K666.6" setting value at "6th stage (Step

II
6) plastic ising" in accordance with the percentage of "L66" at "6th stage (Step 6)

plasticising" ifpressing down the key of again.

I RR) M6666: The weight setting value of the "6th stage (Step 6) plasticising". To key-in the
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

I confirming key of I!l to end the command. It will he calculating and

verifying the position of "K666.6" setting value at -s" stage (Step 6)

I rI
plasticising" in accordance with the weight of "M6666" at "6th stage (Step 6)

plasticising' if pressing down the key of again.

I 2.0perational Menu 2-89 '1.0

$001· C·E·.. 1$0.
··14001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

SS) N6666: The back-pressure setting value of the "6th stage (Step 6) plasticising" movement.
TT) H777: The speed setting value of the "7th stage (Step 7) plasticising" movement.
UU) 17777: The pressure setting value of the "7th stage (Step 7) plasticising" movement.
VV) K777.7: The ending position setting value of the "7th stage (Step 7) plasticising"
movement. To move the cursor in here and to key-in the intended parameter

!!J
within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the command. It will he calculating and verifying the

percentage of "L 77" in the proportional transposition & the weight of

"M7777" setting values at "7th stage (Step 7) plasticising" mutually in I
rI
accordance with the position of "K777. 7" at "7th stage (Step 7) plasticising" if

pressing down the key of again.

wW) L77: The percentage setting value of the "7th stage (Step 7) plasticising" in the proportional

I!l
transposition. To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then

to confirm by the confirming key of to end the command. It will he

calculating and verifying the position of "K777. 7" setting value at "ih stage (Step

XX)
II
7) plastic ising" in accordance with the percentage of "L 77" at "7th stage (Step 7)

plasticising" ifpressing down the key of again.

M7777: The weight setting value of the "7th stage (Step 7) plastic ising". To key-in the

!!J
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

confirming key of to end the command. It will he calculating and

verifying the position of "K777.7" setting value at "7th stage (Step 7)

rI
plasticising" in accordance with the weight of "M7777" at "7th stage (Step 7)

plasticising" if pressing down the key of again.

YY) N7777: The back-pressure setting value of the "ih stage (Step 7) plastic ising" movement.
ZZ) HHHH: The speed setting value of the "8th stage (Step 8) plastic ising" movement.
AAA) JJJJJ: The pressure setting value of the "8th stage (Step 8) plasticising" movement.
BBB) KKKK.K: The ending position setting value of the "8th stage (Step 8) plasticising"
movement. To move the cursor in here and to key-in the intended parameter

!!J
within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the command. It will be calculating and verifying the

percentage of "LLL" in the profOrtional transposition & the weight of

"MMMMM" setting values at "8t stage (Step 8) plasticising" mutually in

rI
accordance with the position of "KKKK.K" at "8th stage (Step 8)

plasticising" ifpressing down the key of again.

CCC) LLL: The percentage setting value of the "8th stage (Step 8) plasticising" in the proportional
transposition. To key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then

2.0perational Menu 2-90

t001· E. 1400"t
'10 ·C.· . '$0
.:..
.
August 27,2010 Revision:2.0
I /~Ir CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I to confirm by the conforming key of I!:I to end the command. It will be

I calculating and verifying the position of "KKKK.K" setting value at "8th stage

II
(Step 8) plasticising" in accordance with the percentage of "LLL" at "8th stage

I (Step 8) plasticising" if pressing down the key of again.

DDD) MMMMM: The weight setting value of the "8th stage (Step 8) plasticising". To key-in

I!J
the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

confirming key of to end the command. It will be calculating and

I verifying the position of "KKKK.K" setting value at "8th stage (Step 8)

II
plasticising" in accordance with the weight of "MMMMM" at "8th stage

I (Step 8) plasticising" ifpressing down the key of again.

I EEE) NNNNN: The back-pressure setting value of the "8th stage (Step 8) plasticising"
movement.
FFF) DDDDD: The speed setting value of the "Melt Decompression" movement after the
I GGG)
plasticising.
EEEEE: The pressure setting value of the "Melt Decompression" movement after the

I HHH)
plastic ising.
FFFEF: The flight distance setting value of the "Melt Decompression" movement after
the plasticising.

I III)
JJJ)
eeee.e: Display the ending stroke of the actual screw back movement.
QQQQQQ: It is a function selection for the boost plasticising that it is valid to use the

I double-pump on this machine, please tum the shuttle knob of

I for selecting 2-mode of (1) "Use" (2) ''No Use" in here, then to confirm by

tbe confirming key Of!!J to end the command after selection.

KKK) SSSSSS: It is an optional function selection of the synchronous plastic ising during the
mold . that it is an optional equipment, please tum the shuttle knob of
I
for selecting 2-mode of (1) "Use" (2) ''No Use" in here, then to

I
I conform by the confirming key of

selection. At this time, it must be collocated with a spare time of T#O10 at

!!J to end the command after

"EEEEE.E" on the menu (40) Spare Time Setting that it will be appearing the
I alarm message of "Alarm0959>No Material Or Hopper Choke" on the top
screen if it could not fmished the synchronous plastic ising movement within
this monitoring time.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-91
August 27, 2010 Revisiou:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

LLL) RRR.R: It is a buffer time setting value to delay the plasticising movement, which will
be carrying out the plasticising movement after finished the injection
movement under the auto modes.
MMM) TTT.T: It is a cooling time setting value by setting out to count the time after fmishing
the injection movement under the auto modes that it will be appearing the alarm
message of "Alarm0959>No Material Or Hopper Choke" on the to,!'-screen if it
f!*jnot~~ished the pla~ticising ~ov~ment. If it i.sselected the '~;;'~IPJI!I[~]I
19_' function that It will be contmuously carrymg out the mold
opening movement after fmishing this counting time ..
NNN) tI.ff: Display the "Density" of the current raw plastic for the reference only.
000) UUU.U: It is a buffer time setting value to delay the alarm output when there is no
material.
Do not operate the plasticising movement when the barrel temperature is not reaching to
the reasonably proceeding temperature. With regard to the weight setting value in the
every stage, it must be defined the density of the used raw material at first, otherwise,
the whole weight settings will be getting no function or given a wrong data after
conversion the value, please refer to the section of 2.22 Common plastic material
temperature memory setting.

2.15.2 The time sequence chart of the plasticising + melt decompression

2.15.2.1 The time sequence chart of the 8-stage plasticising + melt decompression

Action stage Suck Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 StepS Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Melt
Back

.....
Plasticizing Stroke

Suck Back stroke

Decompression stroke

Speed Setup AAAAA Hll1 H222 H333 H444 HS55 H666 H7n HHHH 00000
Speed Unit mm/s RPM RPM RPM RPM RPM RPM RPM RPM mm/s

Pressure Setup BBBBB J1111 J2222 13333 J4444 J5555 J6666 trrn JJJJJ EEEEE

Back-pressure Setup N1111 N2222 N3333 N4444 N5555 N6666 N7777 NNNNN
Distance FFFF.F

Ending Position Setup cec.e K111.1 K222.2 K3333 K444.4 K555.5 K666.6 K777.7 KKKK.K

2.0perational Menu 2-92

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I ,CDC200owiN Operation Manual

I 2.16 Carriage setting

I
I Menu (136) Carriage Setting
2.16.1 Tomove the cursor to the intended parameter of the carriagesetting items in place and to key-in

I I!:I
the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the command, the holding-pressure Information of 'his menu (136) Carriage

I Setting is described as below:

A) dddd.d: Display the actual position of the carriage stroke (It must be collocated with the
"Analog Potentiometer" in the carriage unit).
B) CC: The speed setting value of the "1 st stage Carriage Forward (For. 1)".
C) JJJJJ: The pressure setting value of the" 1SI stage Carriage Forward (For.l)".
D) PPP.P: The motion stroke time adjustment of the "I" stage Carriage Forward (For.1)" that
it will be switchover to the "2nd stage Carriage Forward (For.2)" after finishing

I E)
the time count.
VVV.V: The ending position setting value of the "1 st stage Carriage Forward (For. 1)" (It
must be collocated with the "Analog Potentiometer" in the carriage unit).

I F)
G)
BB: The speed setting value of the "2nd stage Carriage Forward (For.2)".
HHHHH: The pressure setting value of the "2nd stage Carriage Forward (For.2)".
H) UUU.U: The ending position setting value of the "2nd stage Carriage Forward (For.2)" (It

I I)
1)
must be collocated with the "Analog Potentiometer" in the carriage unit).
AA: The speed setting value of the "3fd stage Carriage Forward (For.3)".
GGGGG: The pressure setting value of the "3rd stage Carriage Forward (For.3)".

I K)

L)
NNN.N: It is a buffer time to delay the carriage forward movement finish time adjustment
. when the carriage forward is reaching to the ending position.
TTT.T: The ending position setting value of the "3rd stage Carriage Forward (For.3)" (It

I M)
must be collocated with the "Analog Potentiometer" in the carriage unit).
ZZZ.Z: It is an inspection time setting value for monitoring the "Carriage Forward"
stroke under the auto modes, when this inspection time is completed the time

I 2.0perational Menu
count but the carriage forward movement is not fmished yet, at this time, the
2-93
August 27,2010 Revisioo:2.0

CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

computer will be appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0956>Carriage Forward
Limit Switch Inspection" on the top screen.
N) DD: The speed setting value of the "1 st stage Carriage Backward (Back. 1).
0) KKKKK: The pressure setting value of the "1st stage Carriage Backward (Back.I).
P) QQQ.Q: The motion stroke time adjustment of the "1 st stage Carriage Backward (Back. 1)
that it will be switchover to the "2nd stage Carriage Backward (Back.2)" after
finishing the time count..
Q) WWW.W: The ending position setting value of the "1st stage Carriage Backward (Back. 1)
(It must be collocated with the "Analog Potentiometer" in the carriage unit).
R) EE: The speed setting value of the "2nd stage Carriage Backward (Back.2)".
S) LLLLL: The pressure setting value of the "2nd stage Carriage Backward (Back.2)".
T) RRR.R: The motion stroke time adjustment of the "2nd stage Carriage Backward
(Back.2)" that it will be switchover to the "3rd stage Carriage Backward (Back.3)"
after finishing the time count..
U) XXXX: The ending position setting value of the "2nd stage Carriage Backward (Back.2)"
(It must be collocated with the "Analog Potentiometer" in the carriage unit).
V) FF: The speed setting value of the "3rd stage Carriage Backward (Back.3)".
W) MMMMM: The pressure setting value of the "3rd stage Carriage Backward (Back.3)".
X) SSS.S: The motion stroke time adjustment of the "3rd stage Carriage Backward (Back.3)"
that it will be stopping the movement after fmishing the time count..
Y) YYY.Y: The ending position setting value of the "3rd stage Carriage Backward (Back.3)"
(It must be collocated with the "Analog Potentiometer" in the carriage unit).
Z) bbbbbbbb: It is a function selection within 4-mode for carrying out "~'i~.ql1t)lgs
, function under the auto modes. Please turn the

shuttle knob of for selecting the intended action mode as

desired, then to confirm by the confirming key of !!:I to end the

command after selection.

Z.a) No Use: It is cancel the "Automatic Carriage Backward" function at "OFF" status.
Z.b) After Plasticising Motion: It will be actuating the carriage backward movement after
fmishing the plastic ising movement under the auto modes.
Z.c) Before Plastic ising Motion: It will be actuating the carriage backward movement before
the plasticising movement under the auto modes.
Z.d) Spare Function: It is a spare function.

Do not operate the carriage forward movement if it is not full locked up the molds, so as
to avoid an insufficient locking force of the mold clamp, it could be intruding into a
looseness to push over the molds by reason of the over force from the carriage forward
movement, to cause the molds & the machine being damaged.

2.0perational Menu 2-94 ISC) C· ,E· '$0

900t '. . 1.4001
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0
I
,Jlr CDC2000WIN
•
Operation Manual

I 2.16.2 The time sequence chart of the carriageforward

For.3 For.2 For.l

I Carriage Forward Stroke

AA BB CC SpeedSetup

GGGGG HHHHH JJJJJ PressureSetup

SensorInduced-Range

I NNN.N PPP.P Action-time Setup

DelayTime for
m.z
I Car.FWD.

Standard Sensor Seguence

Stroke Monitoring Time

I For.3
I
For.2 For.1

I UUU.U VVV.V
age Forward Stroke

Ending Position Setup

,
I AA
GGGGG
I
HHHHH
BB CC
JJJJJ
SpeedSetup

PressureSetup
DelayTime for I
I
Car.FWD. I
I NNN.NI DelayTime Setup
I_ "I 1
I_

I Potentiometer
ZZZ.Z

Sequence
., Stroke Monitoring Time
1

2.16.3 The time sequence chart of the carriagebackward

Back.1 Back.2 Back.3

CarriageBackwardStroke
I I

I Speed Setup DD
I
I
I
EE I
I
I
FF
I
I
I
Pressure Setup KKKKK I lllll I MMMMM I

I Action-time Setup QQQ.Q

I
I
I RRR.R
I
I
I 555.5
I
I
I
Ending Position Setup I I I

I (Potentiometer only) WWW.W XXX.X YVY.Y

I 2.0perational Menu 2-95

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

2.16.4 The time sequence chart of an automatic carriagebackward

For.3 For.2 For.1

r
Forward Setup
BB CC Speed Setup
JJJJJ Pressure Setup
Sensor Induced-Range
,
Injection/ ,- ,-, ..,I
Holdlng-pressure , I NNN.N
I , PPP.P Action-time Setup
Ending Position Setup

1
Plasticizing/ Melt
,
TTT.T UUU.U
zzz..Z
VW.V (Potentiometer only)
Stroke Monitoring Time

Decompression

Carriage Backward Setup

DD EE FF Speed Setup
KKKKK LLLLL I MMMMM I Pressure Setup
QQUQ RRR.R SSS.S Action-time Setup

No Car. Backward
I I I Ending Position Setup
WlNWW XXX.X YYY.Y (Potentiometer only)

2.17 Auto purge setting

Menu (37) Auto Purge Setting

the plastic material on this menu. To move the cursor or to tum the

shuttle knob of by choice of the intended parameter setting item as desired, then to

key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric ; suppose that it wants to the choice the

function item, please tum the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of 1!3
2.0perational Menu
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
2-96
,", C'E
·.••0 .....'14001
'8...
00..•
I /~Ir CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I for selecting the intended item as desired and confirm by the confirming key of I!:J to end the

command after setup, the related information of this menu (37) Auto Purge Setting is described as
below:

I!l
A) UUUUUU: It is a soft key to switch "ON "the "Auto Purge Start", to move the cursor in

here by pressing down the confirming key of to directly actuate

II
the auto purge sequences; if it wants to cancel this sequence, please press

I B)
down the key of or escape this menu to stop the moment thereof.

VVVV: The action counter setting value of the auto purge movement.

I C)
D)
WWWWW: Display the "Current Counter" in action of the auto purge movement.
XXXX.X: Display the "Current Position" of the injection screw.

2.17.1 Auto purge at injection setup

I A) BBBB: The speed setting value of the auto purge "1stInjection (Inj.l)" movement.
B) DDDDD: The pressure setting value of the auto purge "I stInjection (Inj.l)" movement.
I C) FFFF.F: The ending position setting value of the auto purge "1 st Injection (Inj.l)"
movement.
D) 11:The percent setting value of the auto purge "1 stInjection (lnj.l)" movement.
I E)
F)
AAAA: The speed setting value of the auto purge "2nd Injection (Inj.2)" movement.
CCCCC: The pressure setting value ofthe auto purge "2nd Injection (lnj.2)" movement.
G) EEEE.E: The ending position setting value of the auto purge "2nd Injection (Inj.2)"
I H)
movement.
HH: The percent setting value of the auto purge "2nd Injection (Inj.2)" movement.
I) GGGGG: Display the ending position value of the plasticising.
I 2.17.2 Auto purge at plasticising setup

I A)
B)
KKKKK: The speed setting value of the auto purge "1stPlasticising (Plast.1)" movement.
MMMMM: The pressure setting value of the auto purge "1st Plasticising (Plast.l)"
movement.
I C) PPPP.P: The position setting value of the auto purge "I st Plasticising (Plast.l)"
movement.
D) RR: The percent setting value of the auto purge "I stPlasticising (Plast.l)" movement.
E) SSSSS: The back-pressure setting value of the auto purge "1st Plastic ising (Plast.1)"
movement.
F) LLLLL: The speed setting value of the auto purge "2nd Plastic ising (Plast.2)" movement.
I G) NNNNN: The pressure setting value of the auto purge "2nd Plasticising (Plast.2)"
movement.
H) QQQQ.Q: The position setting value of the auto purge "2nd Plasticising (plast.2)"
I I)
movement.
TTTTT: The back-pressure setting value of the auto purge "2nd Plasticising (plast.2)"
movement.
I J) YYY.YY: It is applied for monitoring the plasticising motion that it will be appearing
the alarm message of "Alarm0959>No Material Or Hopper Choke" on the
top screen when it is not finished the movement within this inspection time.

2.0perational Menu 2-97 tSO.

$OOt·. ~t.°...
C ·E··1-.. .;":1·
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

2.18 Injection speed I pressure outline

I
Menu (19) Injection Speed / Pressure Outline

It displays the velocity & pressure snapshot curves

menu. To move the cursor or to tum the shuttle knob of by choice of the intended

parameter setting item as desired, then to key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric
that it wants to the choice the function item, please tum the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of I!:J for selecting the intended item as desired .and

confirm by the confirming key of I!:J to end the command after setup, the related information

of this menu (19) Injection Speed / Pressure Outline is described as below:

A) AAAA.A-EEEE.E: Display the pressure scale.

B) FFFF-KKKK: Display the velocity scale.
C) LLLLLL: It is a snap button to memory the last snapshot curves to a standard curve.
D) MMMMM: It is a mode selection within 2-mode for the snapshot curves in demand on
the menu. To move the cursor in here, again to tum the shuttle knob of

by choice of (I) No Display: No display the snapshot curves

or (2) Display: Display the snapshot curves, then to confirm by the

confirming key of ~ to end the command after selection.

2.0perational Menu 2-98 ISO (. 'E·· t~O

NOt .., 14fl.'()1
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

E) N: It is modulo selection of the snapshot curves on the menu. To turn the shuttle knob

I of posterior to the Enter key of I!!:I by selecting the intended

I 5-mode as desired, then to confirm by the confirming key of I!J to end the

command after selection, the function is described as below:

E.a) o : Display the current snapshot curves only.
E.b) 1: Display up to the last 1 modulo & the current snapshot curves.
E.c) 2: Display up to the last 2 modulo & the current snapshot curves.
E.d) 3 : Display up to the last 3 modulo & the current' snapshot curves.
I E.e) 4 : Display up to the last 4 modulo & the current snapshot curves.

2.19 Theoretical injection pressure chart

I
I
I

I Menu (36) Theoretical Injection Pressure Chart

It displays the theoretical injection pressure curve on this menu that it is collocated with the
corresponding barrel on this machine. The X-axis is represented the injection pressure and the
Y-axis is the meaning of the hydraulic oils pressure in the injection cylinder on the machine.

I
I
I 2.0perational Menu 2·99 ISO
toOt·
CE···•.14001
,'$Q
August 27,2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

2.20 Mold shut-off valve + sequence valve 1-2 setting

Menu (157) Mold Shut-off Valve + Sequence Valvel-2 Setting

It is applied for the mold shut-off valve on this menu. To move the cursor or to turn the

shuttle knob of by choice of the intended parameter setting item as desired; suppose

that it wants to the choice the function item, please turn the shuttle knob of posterior

to the Enter key of I!!:I for selecting the intended item as desired and confirm by the

confirming key of I!!:I to end the command after setup, the related infurmation of this menu I
(157) Mold Shut-off Valve + Sequence Valvel-2 Setting is described as below:

2.20.1 Mold shut-off valve setup

A) AAAAA: It is the choice for the mold shut-off valve, To turn the shuttle knob

of posterior to the Enter key of I!:J by choice of 2-mode

of (1) No Use: It is not used to the mold shut-off valve control function or (2)

I!:I
Use: It is used to the mold shut-off valve control function, then to confirm by

the confirming key of to end the command after the usage

selection.

2.0perational Menu 2-100

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 •
CDC2000WIN Operation Manual

I B) BBB.B: It is a buffer time setting to delay the injection motion action time that it will be
actuating the "Mold Shut-off Open" movement at first when starting the
injection sequences.
C) CCC.C: It is a buffer time setting to delay the "Mold Shut-off Close" movement after
finishing the injection sequences.
D) DDDDD:It is a mode selection for the mold sequence valve 1. To tum the shuttle knob

of posterior to the Enter key of !:I by choice of 4-mode,

then to confirm by the confirming key of I!:I to end the command after

the usage selection, the function select content is described as below:

I D.a)
D.b)
No Use: It is no use to the mold sequence valve 1 control function.
Position: It must be collocated with the injection position to control the mold sequence
valve 1 at "Valve Gate 1 Open/Close".

I D.c) Time: It is utilizing the time to control the mold sequence valve 1 at "Valve Gate 1
Open/Close".
D.d) Pos-Hold Time: It is controlled the mold sequence valve 1 at "Valve Gate 1 Open/Close"
I by position during the injection movement, it will be closing the mold
sequence valve 1 after entering the holding-pressure stage, then to
utilize the time to control the mold sequence valve 1 at "Valve Gate 1
I E)
Open/Close" .
EEEE.E: It must be collocated with the injection position to actuate the startup position
setting of the mold sequence valve 1.
I F) FFFF.F: It must be collocated with the injection position to terminate the stoppage
position setting of the mold sequence valve 1.

I G) GGGG: If it is selected by "Time" at "DDDDD", it will be synchronously counting this

delay time when setting out the injection movement and actuating the mold
sequence valve 1 after fmishing the time count. If it is selected by "Pos-Hold

I Time" at "DDDDD", it will be synchronously counting this delay time when

setting out the holding-pressure movement and actuating the mold sequence
valve 1 after fmishing the time count.

I H) HHH.H: It is the action time for actuating the mold sequence valve 1 if it selected by
"Time" or "Pos-HoldTime" at "DDDDD", it will be stopping the mold
sequence valve 1 after fmishing the time count.

I I) JJJJJ: It is a mode selection for the mold sequence valve 2. To tum the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of "1 by choice of 4-mode, then to

I confirm by the confirming key of !!J to end the command after the usage

selection, the function select content is described as below:

I La)
Lb)
No Use: It is not used to the mold sequence valve 2 control function.
Position: It must be collocated with the injection position to control the mold sequence
valve 2 at "Valve Gate 2 Open/Close".

2.0perational Menu 2-101

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I.c) Time: It is utilizing the time to control the mold sequence valve 2 at "Valve Gate 2
Open/Close" .
Ld) Pos-Hold Time: It is controlled the mold sequence valve 2 at "Valve Gate 2 Open/Close"
by position during the injection movement, it will be closing the mold
sequence valve 2 after entering the holding-pressure stage, then to
utilize the time to control the mold sequence valve 2 at "Valve Gate 2
Open/Close" .
J) KKKK.K: It must be collocated with the injection position to actuate the startup position

K)
setting of the mold sequence valve 2.
LLLL.L: It must be collocated with the injection position to terminate the stoppage position
I
setting of the mold sequence valve 2.
L) MMM.M: If it is selected by "Time" at "JJJJJ", it will be synchronously counting this
delay time when setting out the injection movement and actuating the mold
sequence valve 2 after finishing the time count. If it is selected by "Pos-Hold
Time" at "JJJJJ", it will be synchronously counting this delay time when
setting out the holding-pressure movement and actuating the mold sequence
valve 2 after fmishing the time count.
M) NNN.N: It is the action time for actuating the mold sequence valve 2 if it selected by
"Time" or "Pos-Hold Time" at "JJJJJ", it will be stopping the mold sequence
valve 2 after finishing the time count.

2.20.2 The time sequence chart of the mold shut-off valve & the sequence valve

sequence start

Sequence Valve control at Position

Jr-----l---+-
Startup position
FFFF.F Stoppage position

r--- -+__ -+_sequence Valve at Time

Delay ON time

H Sequence Valve action time

Valve at Pas-Hold Time

Startup position
FFFF.F Stoppage position

GGG.G Delay ON time

IE----~I
HHH.H Sequence Valve action time

I
2.0perational Menu 2-102 ·,.0
t001' CE ISO
" i~1
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 2.21 Barrel Temperature setting

I
I
I

I
I
I Menu (21) Barrel Temperature Setting

It is applied for the barrel temperature setting on this menu. To move the cursor or to tum the

shuttle knob of by choice of the intended parameter setting item as desired; suppose

I
that it wants to the choice the function item, please tum the shuttle knob of posterior
I
I to the Enter key of !!J for selecting the intended item as desired and confirm by the

I confirming key Of!!J to end the command after setup.

I 2.21.1 The actual temperature display & its code description as below

A) IAA: Display the current l " temperature zone (nozzle). If the background color at
I "IKK" column is changing to the cyan color that it will be appearing the signal
of"---" in here and it is represented the proportional "Interval" control.
B) IBB: Display the current 2nd temperature zone (T2). If the background color at "ILL"
I column is changing to the cyan color that it will be appearing the signal of"---" in
here and it is represented the proportional "Interval" control.

I C) ICC: Display the current 3rd temperature zone (T3). If the background color at "IMM"
is changing to the cyan color that it will be appearing the signal of "---" in here
and it is represented the proportional "Interval" control.

2.0perational Menu 2-103 '" C··..·E··14001

.15.·.0.:
9001
August 27,2010 Revision:2.0

,CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

D) IDD: Display the current 4th temperature zone (T4). If the background color at "INN"
column is changing to the cyan color that it will be appearing the signal of"---" in
here and it is represented the proportional "Interval" control.
E) lEE: Display the current 5th temperature zone (T5). If the background color at "IPP"
column is changing to the cyan color that it will be appearing the signal of "---" in
here and it is represented the proportional "Interval" control.
F) IFF: Display the current 6th temperature zone (T6). If the background color at "IQQ"
column is changing to the cyan color that it will be appearing the signal of "---"
in here and it is represented the proportional "Interval" control.
G) IGG: Display the current 7thtemperature zone (T7). If the background color at "IRR"
column is changing to the cyan color that it will be appearing the signal of "---" in
here and it is represented the proportional "Interval" control.
H) IHH: Display the current oils temperature in value.

2.21.2 The setting temperature control & its code description as below

A) IKK: The temperature setting at l " temperature zone (nozzle). If its background color is
changing to the cyan color means the proportional "Interval" control.
8) ILL: The temperature setting at 2nd temperature zone (T2). If its background color is
changing to the cyan color means the proportional "Interval" control.
C) IMM: The temperature setting at 3rd temperature zone (T3). If its background color is
changing to the cyan co lor means the proportional "Interval" contro I.
D) INN: The temperature setting at 4th temperature zone (T4). If its background color is
changing to the cyan color means the proportional "Interval" control.
E) IPP: The temperature setting at 5th temperature zone (T5). If its background color is
"changing to the cyan color means the proportional "Interval" control.
F) IQQ: The temperature setting at 6th temperature zone (T6). If its background color is
changing to the cyan color means the proportional "Interval" control.
G) IRR: The temperature setting at 7th temperature zone (T7). If its background color is
changing to the cyan color means the proportional "Interval" control.

2.21.3 The high alarm tolerance temperature setup & its code description as below

A) ISS: The actual high alarm tolerance setting at 1st SET temperature zone (nozzle).
8) ITT: The actual high alarm tolerance setting at 2nd SET temperature zone (T2).
C) IUU: The actual high alarm tolerance setting at 3rd SET temperature zone (T3).
D) IVV: The actual high alarm tolerance setting at 4thSET temperature zone (T4).
E) I WW: The actual high alarm tolerance setting at 5thSET temperature zone (T5).
F) IXX: The actual high alarm tolerance setting at 6thSET temperature zone (T6).
G) IYV: The actual high alarm tolerance setting at 7th SET temperature zone (T7).

2.21.4 The low alarm tolerance temperature setup & its code description as below

A) laa: The actual low alarm tolerance setting at 1st SET temperature zone (nozzle).
8) I bb: The actual low alarm tolerance setting at 2nd SET temperature zone (T2).
C) lee: The actual low alarm tolerance setting at 3rd SET temperature zone (T3).
D) Idd: The actual low alarm tolerance setting at 4th SET temperature zone (T4).
E) lee: The actual low alarm tolerance setting at 5thSET temperature zone (T5).
F) I ff: The actual low alarm tolerance setting at 6thSET temperature zone (T6).
G) Igg: The actual low alarm tolerance setting at 7thSET temperature zone (T7).

2.0perational Menu 2-104

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 :CDC2000 WiN Operation Manual

I 2.21.5 Thehigh heat-sink tolerance temperature setup (Optional) & its code description as below

A) Ikk: The actual heat-sink setting higher than 1st SET temperature zone (nozzle).
B) Ill: The actual heat-sink setting higher than "2nd SET temperature zone (T2).
C) 1mm: The actual heat-sink setting higher than "3rd SET temperature zone (T3).
D) Inn: The actual heat-sink setting higher than "4th SET temperature zone (T4).
E) Ipp: The actual heat-sink setting higher than "5th SET temperature zone (T5).
F) lqq: The actual heat-sink setting higher than "6th SET temperature zone (T6).
G) 1rr: The actual heat-sink setting higher than "7th SET temperature zone (T7).

I 2.21.6 The temperature control mode setup

JJJJJJ: It is a mode selection within 4-mode for the temperature control function, please

I choice the intended temperature mode by turning the shuttle knob of posterior to the

Enter key of I!:I in here, then to confirm by the confirming key of to end the

command after the usage selection, the function items are described as below:
I A) OFF: It is cancelled the barrel heating function, at this time, the selection key of

is in vain on the computer panel.

I B) Heating: It is the normal function selection to heat up the barrel temperature that it must

be collocated with the selection key of mutually, at this time, the

LED light will be getting at "ON" status after pressing down this key.
C) Keep: It is the preheat function selection to keep the barrel te at thermoset

status that it must be collocated with the selection key of mutually, at

this time, the LED light will be flashing after pressing down this key.
D) TIMER: It is the preheating function selection weekly.
zzzz.z: Display the residual time for the cold start protection function, the operator shall be
waiting till this time count fmish so as to carry out the screw rotation.

I 2.21.7 Thekeep temperature setup & its code description as below:

It will be giving the target value for preheating the barrel temperature when it is selected by
I "Keep" at "JJJJJJ", the function items are described as below:

A) 1ss: The actual pre-heat temperature setting at I st temperature zone (nozzle).

I B)
C)
1tt: The actual pre-heat temperature setting at 2nd temperature zone (T2).
1uu: The actual pre-heat temperature setting at 3rd temperature zone (T3).
D) Ivv: The actual pre-heat temperature setting at 4thtemperature zone (T4).
I E)
F)
Iww: The actual pre-heat temperature setting at s" temperature zone (TS).
Ixx: The actual pre-heat temperature setting at 6thtemperature zone (T6).
G) Iyy: The actual pre-heat temperature setting at 7thtemperature zone (T7).

2.0perational Menu 2-105

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

2.22 Common plastic materials temperature memory setting

Menu (73) Common Plastic Temperature Setting

The CDC2000WIN controller could be accessing 40-set of the temperature memories for the
common plastic materials, the operation method is described as below:

2.22.1 Quick raw materials temperature setup

To utilize those keys either of or to move the scroll cursor

rI
of the small sight-window in center to the upward / downward directions for selecting the intended

raw materials location as desired, then to press down the key of on the computer panel, at

this time, it will be automatically setting the barrel control temperature.

2.22.2 Different raw materials temperature setup

To utilize those keys either of or to scro II the small

sight-window in center to the upward / downward directions in place, again to utilize those keys

either of : or to the leftward / rightward directions and to key-in the intended

value as desired, then to confirm by the confirming key of 1111 to end the command, the

related information of this menu (73) Common Plastic Temperature Setting is described as below:
A) AAAAAAAA: It is a place of the raw material name input.
B) BBB: The 1st temperature zone (nozzle) setting value.
C) CCC: The 2nd temperature zone (T2) setting value.

2.0perational Menu
August 27, 2010 Re\'ision:2.0
2-106 ISO
MOl', C'E.
ISO
' 14001
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

D) DOD: The 3rd temperature zone (T3) setting value.

E) EEE: The 4thtemperature zone (T4) setting value.
F) FFF: The 5thtemperature zone (T5) setting value.
G) GGG: The 6thtemperature zone (T6) setting value.
H) HHH: The 7thtemperature zone (T7) setting value.
J) TT.TT: The density setting for the used raw materials that it must be setting in here,
otherwise, the whole weight settings will be getting no function or given a
wrong value after conversion the data, please certainly setting the correct
density in accordance with the used raw materials.

2.23 Weekly TIMER setting

I
I
I

I
I Menu (22) Weekly TIMER Setting

I It is applied for the barrel TIMER temperature setting and ancillary equipment (Optional)
TIMER setting on this menu.

2.23.1 Barrel temperature TIMERsetup

I Please go into the menu (21) Barrel Temperature Setting and set the action mode by
"TIMER" at "JJJJJJ" at first, again to enter this menu and to move the cursor to the intended weekly
time in place, then to key-in the action time within the alphanumeric key and to confirm by the

confirming key of ~ , later to move the cursor to the corresponding column at "TIMER

I SW", just to turn the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of ~ by choice

I of 2-mode of (I) "ON" or (2) "OFF" and to press down the Enter key of I!:I' please tum

I 2.0perational Menu 2-107

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

;CDC200owiN Operation Manual

OFF the pump motor by pressing down the key of and keep the power electricity of the

controller having an electrification status to end the command when it is selected the operation
mode by "ON" status.

When the current time is reaching to the target of the preheating time, the "_I"
will
be automatically switchover to the "Heating" mode at "1JJ1JJ" on the menu (21) Barrel Temperature

Setting, at this time, the LED light of the barrel heating mode selection key of i will be

getting at "ON" status on the computer panel.

2.23.2 Spare TIMER1external devicessetup (Optional)

To move the cursor to the "2YYYYY" column and to turn the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of I!l by choice of 3-mode under the following conditions, then to

press down the Enter key of I!J to end the command after the usage selection, the function

select content is described as below:

A) NO USE: It is no use for the spare TIMER 1 external devices.
8) HEATING: It is used to the spare TIMER 1 external devices.
C) TIMER: It is selected the spare TIMER 1 external devices. To move the cursor to the

I!J'
intended "Start-up Time" location and to key-in the action time within the

alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of later to

move the cursor to the "TIMER SW" column by turning the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of I!l by choice of2-mode of (I)

"ON" or (2) "OFF" and to press down the Enter key of m

spare TIMER 1 external devices setup when it is selected the operation mode
to end the

by "ON" status.

2.23.3 Spare TIMER2 external devicessetup (Optional)

To move the cursor to the "3YYYYY" column and to turn the shuttle knob of

posterior to the Enter key of I!l by choice oO-mode under the following conditions, then to

2.0perational Menu 2-108 '.0,,. ('.,.

9001 E....•...
"$0.:,
1'400'1
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I press down the Enter key of I!l to end the command after the usage selection, the function

I select content is described as below:

A) NO USE: It is no use for the spare TIMER 2 external devices.
B) HEATING: It is used to the spare TIMER 2 external devices.

I C) TIMER: It is selected the spare TIMER 2 external devices. To move the cursor to the

I!:I '
intended "Start-up Time" location and to key-in the action time within the

I alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confuming key of

move the cursor to the "TIMER SW" column by turning the shuttle knob of
later to

I posterior to the Enter key of !!:I by choice of2-mode of (I)

I "ON" or (2) "OFF' and to press down the Enter key of 111 to end the

I spare TIMER 2 external devices setup when it is selected the operation mode
by "ON" status.

I 2.24 Temperature setting curve

I
I
I
I
I

Menu (64) Temperature Setting Curve

It displays the setting values of the barrel temperature and the bar chart of an actual
temperature on this menu.
A) - : The high alarm tolerance of the barrel temperature setting value index.
B) liliiii : The barrel temperature setting value index.

I C) _ : The low alarm tolerance of the barrel temperature setting value index.

D) ] : The actual barrel temperature index.

I 2.0perational Menu 2-109

August 27, 20]0 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

2.25 Temperature record curve
I

Menu (96) Temperature Record Curve

It is recorded the heating temperature within the past 4 hours on this menu.

2.25.1 The barrel temperature heating zone record looking up

To utilize those keys either of or or to tum the shuttle

by moving the setting cursor by choice of the intended parameter setting item

that it wants to the choice the function item, please tum the shuttle knob of I
posterior to the Enter key of !!:I for selecting the function item as desired, then

to confirm by the confuming key of I!J to end the command after setup, the related

information of this menu (96) Temperature Record Curve is described as below:

I!:I
A) 1CCCCC: It is applied for the temperature zone selection, please press down the Enter

key of at first, then to utilize those keys by turning the shuttle knob

of by choice of the function selection, or to press down both of

2.0perational Menu 2-110 18.0..

900f c. E•.14001
IS. 0....
I
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

the dual keys of II + or II +

!!J
for reviewing the intended temperature zone as desired, then to confirm by

the confirming key of to end the command after selection.

I B) lA: To review the display value with a maximum temperature.

C) IB: To review the display value with a minimum temperature.

2.25.2 The review the heating time record

I
I To utilize those keys either of or to change the time scale at the X-axis,

the heating
I it will be displaying the interval range of 80 minutes in the every time and only

I tendency with a maximum time scale of 4 hours when pressing down the key of toward to

I demonstrate the past time.

I 2.26 Mold temperature setting (Optional)

I
I
I
2.0perational Menu 2-111 '$0
toOl
CE·.· ISO
. 1,40i(t1
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0

>CDC200owiN Operation Manual

Menu (88) Mold Temperature 33-64 Setting

It is an optional function to apply for the mold temperature setting on this menu that it could
be monitoring the maximum 64 sets of the "Multi-point Temperature Control Unit", the related
information ofthe mold temperature control on those menus are described as below:
A) ##A: Display the current mold temperature.
B) ##B: The mold temperature setting. If it is setting at "0" (zero) that is the meaning of
no use unable to monitor the function any of the alarms.
C) ##C: The high alarm tolerance setting mold temperature If it is setting at "0 " (zero) that
it will not monitor the function of those high alarm tolerances.
D) ##D: The low alarm tolerance setting mold temperature If it is setting at "0" (zero) that
it will not monitor the function of those low alarm tolerances.
*: The prior mark of "##" is represented the mold temperature control zone in everywhere.
2.27 Mold no setti

Menu (10) Mold No Setting

2.0perational Menu 2-112

August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0
 ,Jlr CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 2.~7.l It'displays the content 0/ the mold no and its comment to the small sight-window in center on this
menu that it could be inputting the maximum 0/30 alphanumeric characters in the every mold no
and it is possible to access l00-set o/the mold no memories (mold name: DATA-OO'" DAr. to
the controller. To move the cursor by pressing down those keys 0/ &

I , or to turn the shuttle knob 0/ to move the cursorscrollin the small

sight-window, it could quick search the lS-set 0/ the mold no to the upward direction as desired if

pressing down both 0/ the dual keys 0/ + , or to press down both 0/ the

I
duo' keys 0,11 + to move to the downward direction 0/ the lS-set 0/ the

I mold no, or to move the cursor by pressing down those keys either 0/ or

the related in/ormation 0/ this menu (10)Mold No Setting is described as below:

A) SWITCH I(LoadiSave): To move the scroll cursor to the upwardldownward directions

I by utilizing the shuttle knob of in the small

I sight-window by choice of the appointed mold no and read in

the formation data, then to move the cursor in here by pressing

I
down those keys either of or , at this time,

I
it will be accessing to the used mold data at first, then to load

I the mold no in accordance with the scroll cursor of the small

sight-window.
B) AAAAAAAA: Display the appointed comment content of the mold no and the column

I modification in the scroll cursor of the small sight-window at present, it

must be pressed down the Enter key Of!!l giving the

I modification at first if it wants to change the comment content at that

I time, then to confirm by the confirming key Of!!l to end the

command. It could be inputting the alphanumeric characters on this

column, please refer to the section of "1.4 Alphanumeric keys".
I C)
D)
BBBB: The input the source mold no column number (Num.).
CCCC: The input the target mold no column number (Num.).
E) SWITCH 2: After fmishing the source & target mold no column number (Num.), to
I 2.0perational Menu 2-113
August 27, 2010 Re\'ision:2.0

coczooovi« Operation Manual

I!l
move the cursor in here, then to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the copy command,

F) DDD: Display the current mold no in use.

G) EEEEEEEE: Display the on-line working status for an "USB Devices" (Universal Serial
Bus), it will be appearing the hinting message of "Has USB" in this column
after inserting into the "USB Devices", if no, it will be displaying the
hinting message of ''NO USB", an exterior "USB Disk" could be accessing
to 100-set of the mold no memories (mold name: DATA-lOOO -
DATA-l 099 and the mold number will be 1,000 - 1,099).

Figure: USB Port

2.27.2 Mold no searching operation

It displays as the contents of 16-set of the mold no in the small sight-window in center in the
every time. When the presence column is changing to the gray color means the scroll cursor being
moved to the site position, it will be moving 1 set of the mold no down the key of
to upward the scroll cursor or pressing down the key of to downward

the scroll cursor or to tum the shuttle knob of to upwardldownward the scroll cursor.

2.27.3 Mold no in use renewing

To search the intended formation mold no as desired by moving the scroll cursor to choose
one in the small sight-window in center, then to move the scroll cursor by pressing down those keys

either of or to the "SWITCH 1" column and to make sure that the scroll cursor

I!l'
is the used formation mold no from the small sight-window, again to press down the Enter key of

at the first time, it will be appearing the small inquiry sight-window to be asked the used

formation data at present for saving to the original mold no, please press down the reconfirmation

key of if it wants to save it, otherwise, please press down the cancel key of II to

end the command. Again it will be appearing the small inquiry sight-window in the wake of the
second time, just to ask for loading the used formation data from the appointed mold no, please

2.0perational Menu 2-114 ,SO C: iE. 'SO

9001 '.',' 140()1
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I Jlr CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I press down the reconfirmation key of II if it wants to access it, otherwise, please press down

I the cancel key of iii to end the command.

I Save inquiry sight-window Load inquiry sight-window

I 2.27.4 Mold no copying

To move the cursor to the "BBBB" column and to key-in the source mold no (The copy
I source has two kinds, one is acquired from the controller inside with the file number of 0-99,
another is loading from the "USB Disk" with the file number of 1,000-1,099), then to move the
cursor the "CCCC" column to key-in the target mold no (It is the same as 2-kind of the controller

!!:I
inside and the "USB Disk"), fmally to move the cursor to the "SWITCH 2" location by pressing

down the Enter key of ,at this time, it will he carry out the copy command right away.

..
Please be careful to carry out the copy command, ensure to avoid overwriting the

I old/used mold no that it is unavailable to undo the command after an error operation .
. .

2.28 Quality record setting

I

I
Menu (IlA) Quality Record Setting

2.0perational Menu 2-115

9001·· CE
,so ... 101001
1$0
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

HUI5 MU1 Z41 246 24.!! 250

HQ IUS 24~ 14'i1 2:42 244 24'
9.13$ 9.~S 241 2.47 2.4$ 1}1i 145- t!6
10.l9 9.92 247 lSI 240 .2'{Z 142 25& 241
[O.OS lil.iS 245 2.o1l1 244 241 :iSl 243 239
IO.n HJ.Z9 242 24-4 :145 247 244 24~ 251
9.90 re.n 244 244 141 240 2.49 2~ 24&
1II.l1 HI.O'? 246 2A? 2M! 141 250 2.40 250 245
U6 lG.B 14S :24~ 144 U6 2.4~ :244 2:49 z;~
Hl,l~ IO.n 150 242 :251 250 2$0 M:t 2·f} 2;46
HU15 10,10 2:4:1 249 251] 240 242 241
10.:12: 10.00 24t 241 24$ U4. 249
2AS :245 244
251
2$1
HU4 Ui.'U t44 2.41 141 ,m 2.4~ 2043 ZSO Z42
HU)';l:
liU2.
1O.OI
(0.39
t44
Z4B
2<$5
t41
~49 24() 24<1
2....142. 14$
2)1
:24&
251
i«
~o
241
iUS HUI) 149 loU 24:1 2kl lSI us 239 246
HUg !,~.~ 2>9 241 247 249 141 Z41 Z50 .2A4
!lUlS 10.11 :tAl 251.:M? 2.511 24~ 2.5ft 24e 146
ue ro.};! Z4i 242 24t 249 ~.40 241 W 143.·
llUlll. Ml 14.2 242 Z4! ~9 146 2-41 244 M(l
111.13 w,n 250 245 241 24~ 2,44 2A~ 2,(1 247
11l.iZ H~.14 241 l4~ 244 ZSO 146 .W· 241 24f,
HI.~ H/.19 iSt) :2-42 249 i47 2.40 2-1). 250 24$
t1H5 t6.19 m 2.42 246 Z47 2$0 2~t z.t6 441
llL2Z m.}4 U4 149 242 ~40. 241 :242 2« 249
US lO.Z2 2..{~ i4J Z4:5 2,44 lSl l42; :U~
1l1.1~ HI. 10 :l4S 24$ 241 243- 241 24' 2M
HUI:S UUl2 24~ lA.t 247 249 245 243 .2S1
9.94 :i4~ 244 2Al 2Al ~9 13·Q

Menu (lIB) Quality Record Setting

It could be recording the recent production within a maximum 200-set of the formation data in
the small sight-window on this menu.
2.28.1 Quality record menu code description as below

A) AAA: Please key-in the number in accordance with the first column of when it is 'II'"
measured up a good part from the product judgment, then to conform by the soft
key of "Switch 1" for monitoring the quality records as a standard value.
B) Switch 1 (Confirm): It is a confirm key to put in the quality records of the production
number at "AAA" rewriting to the menu (148) Quality Control

I!!:I
Setting as a standard value, just to move the cursor in here and to

confirm by the confrrming key of to end the command.

C) Switch 2 (LEFT): To move the small sight-window to the leftward direction.

D) Switch 3 (UP): To move the small sight-window to the upward direction.
E) Switch 4 (DOWN): To move the small sight-window to the downward direction.
F) Switch 5 (RIGHT): To move the small sight-window to the rightward direction.
2.28.2 Eachcolumn 0/ the small sight-window description as below

A) 1st column: To record in the number of the recent 200 sets of the memories in recent.
B) 2nd column: To record in the grand total modulo quantities display value of the modulo
production / yield in record.
C) 3rd column: To record in the grand total quantities display value of the defect production /
yield in record.
D) 4thcolumn: It is the determination note to record the used grand total time in the every
cycle of the machine formation that it is in line with a setup to distinguish the
defect part from the output part as an judgment data on the menu (148) Quality
Control Setting and it will be changing to the red background color to
reminder the operator on this column if there is a defect part. It will be
counting the defect part counter when selecting the corresponding defect class
by "ON" status at "f1~1ti~.I"
on the menu (148) Quality Control Setting.

2.0perational Menu 2-116

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I :CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I E) 5thcolumn: It is the determination note to record the injection time (excluded the holding-
pressure) that it is in line with a setup to distinguish the defect part from the
good part as an judgment data on the menu (148) Quality Control Setting and
I it will be changing to the red background color to reminder the operator on this
column if there is a defect part. It will be counting the defect part counter when
selecting the corresponding defect class by "ON " status at "V~" on
I the menu (148) Quality Control Setting.
F) 6thcolumn: It is the determination note to record the actual maximum injection velocity
during the injection stroke that it is in line with a setup to distinguish the defect
part from the good part as an judgment data on the menu (148) Quality Control
Setting and it will be changing to the red background color to reminder the
operator on this column if there is a defect part. It will be counting the defect
part counter when selecting the corresponding defect class by "ON" status at
"~~" on the menu (148) Quality Control Setting.
G) 7thcolumn: It is the determination note to record the actual maximum injection pressure
I during the injection stroke that it is in line with a setup to distinguish the defect
part from the good part as an judgment data on the menu (148) Quality Control
Setting and it will be changing to the red background color to reminder the
I operator on this column if there is a defect part. It will be counting the defect
part counter when selecting the corresponding defect class by "ON" status at
"m£g~I" on the menu (148) Quality Control Setting.
I H) 8thcolumn: It is the determination note to record the injection cushion (ending position)
that it is in line with a setup to distinguish the defect part from the good part as
an judgment data on the menu (148) Quality Control Setting and it will be
I changing to the red background color to reminder the operator on this column
if there is a defect part. It will be counting the defect part counter when
selecting the corresponding defect class by "ON" status at "mr~' on
I the menu (148) Quality Control Setting.
I) 9thcolumn: It is the determination note to record the injection VIP switchover position
converting the injection ending motion into the hold-pressure movement that it
I is in line with a setup to distinguish the defect part from the good part as an
judgment data on the menu (148) Quality Control Setting and it will be
changing to the red background color to reminder the operator on this column
I if there is a defect part. It will be counting the defect part counter when
selecting the corresponding defect class by "ON " status at "Dil:~li§~" on
the menu (148) Quality Control Setting.
I J) 10thcolumn: It is the determination note to record the injection VIP switchover pressure of
the hydraulic fluid oils working pressure converting the injection ending
motion into the hold-pressure movement that it is in line with a setup to
I distinguish the defect part from the good part as an judgment data on the menu
(148) Quality Control Setting and it will be changing to the red background
color to reminder the operator on this column if there is a defect part. It will be
counting the defect ;~~~I}!er when selecting the corr~sponding defe~t class
by "ON" status at "Il~~" on the menu (148) Quality Control Settmg.
K) 11thcolumn: It is the determination note to record the hold-pressure time that it is in line
I with a setup to distinguish the defect part from the good part as an judgment
data on the menu (148) Quality Control Setting and it will be changing to the
red background color to reminder the operator on this column if there is a
I defect part. It will be counting the defect part couTlter when selecting the
corresponding defect class by "ON" status at "m~&B' on the menu (148)
Quality Control Setting.

2.0perational Menu 2-117

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

,CDC200owiN Operation Manual

L) 12thcolumn: It is the determination note to record the actual maximum holding-pressure
during the holding-pressure stroke that it is in line with a setup to distinguish
the defect part from the good part as an judgment data on the menu (148)
Quality Control Setting and it will be changing to the red background color to
reminder the operator on this column if there is a defect part. It will be
counting the defect part counter when selecting the corresponding defect class
,.~.ym"'i':"Y:&

by "ON" status at "!l~~~W' on the menu (148) Quality Control Setting.

M) 13thcolumn: It is the determination note to record the plasticising time that it is in line with
a setup to distinguish the defect part from the good part as an judgment data on
the menu (148) Quality Control Setting and it will be changing to the red
background color to reminder the operator on this column if there is a defect
part. It will be counting the defect part counter when selecting the
corresponding defect class by "ON" status at 'i'~\1"on the menu (148)
Quality Control Setting.
N) 14thcolumn: It is the determination note to record the plasticising ending position that it is
in line with a setup to distinguish the defect part from the good part as an
judgment data on the menu (148) Quality Control Setting and it will be
changing to the red background color to reminder the operator on this column
if there is a defect part. It will be counting the defect part. counter. when
selecting the corresponding defect class by "ON " status at "lili~.~' on
the menu (148) Quality Control Setting.
0) 15thcolumn: It is the determination note to record the actual maximum screw RPM during
the plasticising stroke that it is in line with a setup to distinguish the defect part
from the good part as an judgment data on the menu (148) Quality Control
Setting and it will be changing to the red background color to reminder the
operator on this column if there is a defect part. It will be counting the defect
part counter when selecting the corresponding defect class by "ON" status at
"fllfml,~"
on the menu (148) Quality Control Setting.
P) 16thcolumn: It is the determination note to record the cooling time that it is in line with a
setup to distinguish the defect part from the good part as an judgment data on
the menu (148) Quality Control Setting and it will be changing to the red
background color to reminder the operator on this column if there is a defect
part. It will be counting the defect part counter when selecting the
corresponding defect class by "ON" status at '11.$1\1"
on the menu (148)
Quality Control Setting.
Q) 17thcolumn: To record in an action time display value of the mold clamping stroke.
R) 18thcolumn: To record in an action time display value of the mold opening stroke.
S) 19thcolumn: To record in an actual temperature display value at 1st temperature zone (nozzle).
T) zo" column: To record in an actual temperature display value at 2nd temperature zone (T2).
U) 21st column: To record in an actual temperature display value at 3rd temperature zone (T3).
V) 22nd column: To record in an actual temperature display value at 4thtemperature zone (T4).
W) 23rd column: To record in an actual temperature display value at 5thtemperature zone (T5).
X) 24thcolumn: To record in an actual temperature display value at 6thtemperature zone (T6).
Y) 25thcolumn: To record in an actual temperature display value at 7th temperature zone (T7).
Z) 26thcolumn: To record in an actual oils temperature display value (T8).

2.0perational Menu 2-118 ••.0 C.·.·,'·1~1

E·. ISO...
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0 .
9001'·
I CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

2.29 Quality control setting

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.29.1 To move the cursor by choice of the intended parameter setting item as desired and to key-in the

I
!I
intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, just to confirm by the confirming key of

to end the command. The .S" value (Standard Value) of this column could be

automatically inputting via by utilizing the number at "AAA" & pressing down the "Switch 1" key
from the menu (11) Quality Record Setting, the related information of this menu (148) Quality

I A)
ControlSetting is described as below:
IAA.AA: The standard time setting for the used grand total time in the every cycle of
the machine formation.
B) lBB.BB: The upper limit setting value for the used grand total time in the every cycle
of the machine formation.
C) ICC.CC: The lower limit setting value of the used grand total time in the every cycle

I D)
of the machine formation.
IDDDDD: It is a switch selection to distinguish the good part or the defect part as per
cycle by utilizing the standard & upper/lower limit setting values set forth in
the row of the cycle time. It will be no counting thedefect part counter when
selecting the defect class by "OFF" status at "~.'SJ".
E) 2AA.AA: The standard time setting for the injection time.
F) 2B.BB: The upper limit setting value for the injection time.
I G)
H)
2C.CC: The lower limit setting value of the for the injection time.
2DDDDD: It is a switch selection to distinguish the good part or the defect part as per
cycle by utilizing the standard & upper/lower limit setting values set forth in
I the row of the injection time. It will be no counting the, defect part counter
when selecting the defect class by "OFF" status at "'nf~I".
I) 3AAA: The standard time setting for the actual maximum injection velocity during
I J) 3BB:
the injection stroke.
The upper limit setting value for the actual maximum injection velocity
during the injection stroke.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-119
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0

,CDC200owiN Operation Manual

K) 3CC: The lower limit setting value of the for the actual maximum injection
velocity during the injection stroke.
L) 3DDDDD: It is a switch selection to distinguish the good part or the defect part as per
cycle by utilizing the standard & upper/lower limit setting values set forth in
the row of the actual maximum injection velocity during the injection stroke.
It will be no counting the defect part counter when selecting the defect class
by "OFF" status at "12_'.
M) 4AAAA: The standard time setting for the actual maximum injection pressure during
the injection stroke.
N) 4BB: The upper limit setting value for the actual maximum injection pressure
during the injection stroke.
0) 4CC: The lower limit setting value of the for the actual maximum injection
pressure during the injection stroke.
P) 4DDDDD: It is a switch selection to distinguish the good part or the defect part as per
cycle by utilizing the standard & upper/lower limit setting values set forth in
the row of the actual maximum injection pressure during the injection stroke.
It will be no counting the defect part counter when selecting the defect class
by "OFF" status at "~7.fS!&~.'.
Q) 5AA.A: The standard time setting for the injection cushion.
R) 5B.B: The upper limit setting value for the injection cushion.
S) 5C.C: The lower limit setting value of the for the injection cushion.
T) 5DDDDD: It is a switch selection to distinguish the good part or the defect part as per
cycle by utilizing the standard & upper/lower limit setting values set forth in
the row of the injection cushion. It will be no counting the defect part counter
when selecting the defect class by "OFF" status at "R~~".
U) 6AA.A: The standard time setting for the injection VIP switchover position converting
the injection ending motion into the hold-pressure movement.
V) 6BB.B: The upper limit setting value for the injection VIP switchover position
converting the injection ending motion into the hold-pressure movement.
W) 6CC.C: The lower limit setting value of the for the injection VIP switchover position
converting the injection ending motion into the hold-pressure movement.
X) 6DDDDD: It is a switch selection to distinguish the good part or the defect part as per
cycle by utilizing the standard & upper/lower limit setting values set forth in
the row of the injection VIP switchover position converting the injection
ending motion into the hold-pressure movement. It will be no counting the
defect part counter when selecting the defect class by "OFF" status at
"r~"e'"
,-
"e"~~'{SC""tt~"
-,~,t,;:, JY¥~ •

Y) 7AAAA: The standard time setting for the injection VIP switchover pressure converting
the injection ending motion into the hold-pressure movement.
Z) 7BB: The upper limit setting value for the injection VIP switchover pressure
converting the injection ending motion into the hold-pressure movement
AA) 7CC: The lower limit setting value of the for the injection VIP switchover pressure
converting the injection ending motion into the hold-pressure movement
BB) 7DDDDD: It is a switch selection to distinguish the good part or the defect part as per
cycle by utilizing the standard & upper/lower limit setting values set forth in
the row of the injection VIP switchover pressure converting the injection
ending motion into the hold-pressure movement. It will be no counting the
d~~fect £~.~~ counter when selecting the defect class by "OFF" status at
"t~'·
CC) SAAA.AA: The standard time setting for the hold-pressure time.
DD) SBBB.BB: The upper limit setting value for the hold-pressure time.
EE) SCCC.CC: The lower limit setting value of the for the hold-pressure time .

2.0perational Menu 2-120 C"E"

•• 0 ' ",1,4001
,"1 ISO
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0
I CDC2000WIN
•
Operation Manual
FF) 8DDDDD: It is a switch selection to distinguish the good part or the defect part as per
cycle by utilizing the standard & upper/lower limit setting values set forth in
the row of the hol?-pressure time. It wi,l} be ,~o count~~",~~e ;~.~~:~tpart
I GG) 9AAAA:
counter when selectmg the defect class by OFF status at UE~~)I
The standard time setting for the actual maximum holding-pressure during
.

the holding-pressure stroke.

I HH) 9BB: The upper limit setting value for the actual maximum holding-pressure
during the holding-pressure stroke.
II) 9CC: The lower limit setting value of the actual maximum holding-pressure during
I JJ) 9DDDDD:
the holding-pressure stroke.
It is a switch selection to distinguish the good part or the defect part as per
cycle by utilizing the standard & upperllower limit setting values set forth in
I the row of the actual maximum holding-pressure during the holding-pressure
stroke. It will be no counting the defect part counter when selecting the
'·IIII!~lt,.
I KK) lIAA.AA:
defect class by "OFF" status at
The standard time setting for the plasticising time.
LL) I1BB.BB: The upper limit setting value for the plastic ising time.

I MM)
NN)
lICC.CC:
IIDDDD:
The lower limit setting value of the plasticising time.
It is a switch selection to distinguish the good part or the defect part as per
cycle by utilizing the standard & upper/lower limit setting values set forth in
I the row of the plasticising time. It will be no counting the defect part counter
when selecting the defect class by "OFF" status at "lIII[G"·
00) 12AA.A: The standard time setting for the plastic ising ending position.
PP) 12BB.B: The upper limit setting value for the plastic ising ending position.
QQ) 12CC.C: The lower limit setting value of the plasticising ending position.
RR) 12DDDD: It is a switch selection to distinguish the good part or the defect part as per
cycle by utilizing the standard & upper/lower limit setting values set forth in
the row of the plastic ising ending position. It will be no counting the defect
part counter when selecting the defect class by "OFF" status at "§er~.iB".
~~~ ,'''''''%;@Plf/'~~

SS) 13AAA: The standard time setting for the actual maximum screw RPM during the
plasticising stroke.

I TT) 13BB: The upper limit setting value for the actual maximum screw RPM during the
plasticising stroke.
UU) 13CC: The lower limit setting value of the actual maximum screw RPM during the
plasticising stroke.
VV) 13DODD: It is a switch selection to distinguish the good part or the defect part as per
cycle by utilizing the standard & upper/lower limit setting values set forth in
I the row of the actual maximum screw RPM during the plasticising stroke. It
will be no counting the defect part counter when selecting the defect class by
"OFF" status at "~~'1l~'.
I WW)
XX)
14AA.AA:
14B.BB:
The standard time setting for the actual cooling time.
The upper limit setting value for the actual cooling time.
YY) 14C.CC: The lower limit setting value of the actual cooling time.
I ZZ) 14DDDD: It is a switch selection to distinguish the good part or the defect part as per
cycle by utilizing the standard & upper/lower limit setting values set forth in
the row of the actual cooling time. It will be no counting the defect part
I AAA) EEEEE:
counter when selecting the defect class by "OFF" status at "DrJ1I§B".
The modulo production / yield quantities setting as per batch under the auto
modes.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-121 .ISO
1KIOf
C·E·.14001
I'SO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

Jlr CDC2()OOWiN Operation Manual

BBB) eeeee: Display the grand total quantities setting of the modulo production / yield in
the modulo production / yield quantities as per batch.
CCC) FFFFF: It is a function selection for counting the modulo production / yield
quantities.
ODD) GGGGG: It is generated the alarm setting when it is over production quantities under
the auto modes.
EEE) ggggg: Display the grand total quantities of the defect production / yield.
FFF) HHHHH: It is a function selection for counting the defect production / yield quantities.
GGG) 11111: The batch production / yield quantities setting under the auto modes.
HHH) lilii: Display the grand total quantities of the batch production / yield.
III) KKKKK: It is a function selection for counting the batch production / yield quantities.
JJJ) LLLLL: It is an interval setting for accessing the quality records to the "USB Devices".
KKK) MMMMM: It is a switch selection to 0l!.tp_utthe data of the quality records, please press

down the Enter key Of!!J at first, then to utilize by turning the shuttle

knob of for selecting the function item, or to select by "Off' or

:ua:b:e:: o:~ut the dot: to "USB DeVice:~blng+ down both of the

please make sure that the "USB Disk" being inserted into the USB port.

2.29.2 Theproceduresfor accessingthe quality record to the USBDisk

To insert the "USB Disk" into the USB port and to move the cursor to the "LLLLL" column

I!l
and to key-in the interval modulo (For example: Please set the recommended value at 199 modulo),

again to move the cursor to the "MMMMM" column by pressing down the Enter key of

at first and to tum shuttle knob of for selecting it by "USB", then to confirm by the

confirmingkey of I!:J to end the command in use. Under the auto modes, it will be outputting

li
a ftIename within 199 modulo to the "USB Disk" during the production.
Ilf it wants to remove the "USB Disk", please move the cursor to the .'MMMMM ,

column just to utilize by turning the shuttle knob of for selecting it by at

"Off", then to take out the "USB Disk", otherwise, the access data of the file archives
will be disappearing at that time.

2.0perational Menu
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
2-122 '.OC··E· 'SO
9001 ... 1'4001
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

2.30 SPC diagram

I
I
I
I
The left 2-segment menus of the small sight-window is in accordance with the data on the

I menu (11) Quality Record Setting that it is making up of 5-sample of the quality records averages
into l-point data by means of 200 samples of the formation data acquiring 40 points, the computer
will be automatically drawing the "X-Graph" at the upper left side and the "R-Graph" at the lower
left side.

The right 2-segment menus of the small sight-window is in accordance with the data on the
menu (11) Quality Record Setting and the standard value within the upper/lower limit values setup
I on the menu (148) Quality Control Setting, it will be drawing the "Line Chart" at the upper right
side and the "Histogram" at the lower right side to control the production quality for the user
convenience, the SPC Diagram of this menu is described as below:

A) AAA: Display the standard value setup by the quality control menu page, refer to the

I B)
operation explanations on the menu (148) Quality Control Setting.
BBB: Display an upper limit value setup by the quality control menu page, refer to the
operation explanations on the menu (148) Quality Control Setting.
I C) CCC: Display the lower limit value setup by the quality control menu page, refer to the
operation explanations on the menu (148) Quality Control Setting.

The lower right segment is shown as the ''Normal Distribution" that it consists of the "Upper
Limit" value' "Lower Limit" value with the maximum of 9-bar diagrams at "Histogram". The
frequency (quantity) is measuring up the logarithm & "Standard Deviation (o=Sigma)" within these
limit ranges from the random sample of the formation data that it will be showing the group by
means of "Bar Diagram". The distribution field indicates the SPC diagram toward to a "Gaussian
I Distribution" such as bell curve that it could be freely switchover to the intended mode with the
corresponding field from the below 2-row menus.

2.0perational Menu 2-123

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

It is the graph display selection column of the quality record at the bottom side, please press

down those keys either of or to move the cursor, then to confirm by the

confirming key of 1!!3 for displaying the graph real-time after setup.

2.31 Malfunction record

Menu (25) Malfunction Record

The menu function is recorded the alarm messages occurrence in use within 2,000 sets of the
malfunction select contents in the past, To move the scroll cursor . down those keys of

& , or to tum the shuttle knob of for moving the scroll

II II
cursor of the small sight-window. If it wants to quick search to the upward direction just to press

down the dual keys of + or to press down the dual keys of +

to the downward direction that it could be reviewing the alarm time & its description,
for the malfunction, the related information of this menu (25) Malfunction Record is described as
below:

A) Log Time: To record in the occurrence time.

2.0perational Menu 2-124

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0 .'. ..C ...·E··14001
toOt 1:50
I Jlr CDC2000WiN Operation Manual

I B) Subject: To record in the alarm contents. It could be movin the scroll cursor of the small

I window by utilizing those keys either of ' or to the known

alarm row as desired, then to press down the help key of to call forth the

tlie, ~GI)~(p~tt"
Is sel~.;:tet b,·CO'llu" ."eli Ue ba~¢11 "
"..l·,""~'.i'!,by OFF $t~t1j,~ IJI), th~ Pr(ld~<:t IufolPtlO~ .Ul'l), .. ken the
i~ t~a.ehj~ 'th ~.:Ue1,Gildel tt~ ~'IHo .od~~, 't1l~:~!;It•
. (m th.e tD2 '~r~elJ" (R~Jlea;,1: ,bdeJ the. ~ltDQaI ltO~~;
N;ClI.net·l...:. kfiY o.n',~L.¢(I)~I,!~H ;Plied IIl1rlot.,tl)t.

ty t~ fQf' 't~.'
he .ca.ri<:4Jitll' tile 1I1ll1l 'ae.$,saie: and ieset:tiq tile
~*to lie~~ p;fOdilet,ioa:. .'

I
I
On-line help window

2.32 Parameter modified record

I
Menu (27) Parameter Modified Record

2.0perational Menu 2-125 ISO.,.C.'.' .E·· 14001

ISo
9001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

;CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

This menu function is recorded the formation parameter change records and this menu could
be recording in 2,000 sets of the change parameter modified content. To move the cursor g

down those keys of & , or to turn the shuttle knob of

direction just to press down the dual keys of II

moving the scroll cursor of the small sight-window. If it wants to quick search to the upward

+ or to press down the dual

keys of + to the downward direction that it could be reviewing the alarm

time & its description, for the malfunction, the related information of this menu (27) Parameter
Modified Record is described as below:

A) Screen Name: To record in the menu name with the corresponding parameter change.
B) Item Number: To record in the parameter object name of the parameter change.
C) Before: To record in an original data before the parameter change.
D) After: To record in the data after the parameter change.
E) Date: To record in modified date/time of the parameter change.
F) User: To record in the user name of the parameter change.

2.33 Input monitoring review

Menu (31) Input Monitoring Review

This menu provides the client for monitoring an action status of an external input signal, when
it is changing to the red background color in the column that it is meaning of this input signal at
"ON" status under the conduct electricity situation.

2.0perational Menu
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
2-126 '.0 C'E 160
MOt .' "'14001
I ,CDC 2000 w: iN Operation Manual

2.34 Output monitoring review

I
I
I
I
I
I
I Menu (32) Output Monitoring Review

This menu provides the client for monitoring an action status of an external output signal.

I when it is changing to the red background color in the column that it is meaning of this output signal
at "ON" status under the conduct electricity situation.

2.35 SetRelay review

I

I
I
I SlflG
:m~
:illl::
~
:1181
"191
!;2U
:;w
~u :;:us

I
I
Menu (34) Set Relay Review
I This SetRelay Review menu provides the technician in repair for monitoring an initial relays.
when it is changing to the red background color in the column that it is meaning of this output signal
at "ON" status in action.
I 2.0perational Menu 2·127 'so ('E
toOl ISO
.. '14001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

:CDC200QwiN Operation Manual

2.36 KeepRelay review

L'OiJ.! )too
~ !mll ~l$
£1I'i 1:Il. Km
K!~ !;n. Y.140
KI .... KISG :Kl~
KI~ 1:1(;6 KIll>' r.m
n1Q iClSl I:;IS5 t:l'ae
P;!~ ICIW iOQl ):al4
t.:~
£12C
IOU
!Q3I)
t(:m r.m
yo.Zltl
ii:2JJ
P4D 1Cl-46 1:2411 l:".sl

Menu (33) Keep Relay Review

This KeepRelay Review menu provides the technician in repair for monitoring an initial
relays. when it is changing to the red background color in the column that it is meaning of this output
signal at "ON" status in action.

2.37 Relay monitoring review

iUml ~JKl'Jj P.I)l).i ~..cms

,..mt ~19 P.OON ~Wit ...am e.Ol3l
PJJ)U J!:&,"S 2r):l;l6 1<00.."7 atXl38 R0041
~g ~I P.OOS2 ROOS;! R0054 Rroil
RlXlS4 Il.~ ~ 11.0067 ROOti8 ~ ....ctr1tJ P.qm
RrmJ ROOSt ~. [RDJ RlXl84 l«mS P.ool& RlmS
Rt(t;16 fi.!l!m p~ R~ PitJIOO ~OIO' M!W Mll!
ROII'2 M<l-tJ
t<OI2a lOl79 ~g:~
Ril!44 f'.ilU5 1'>.014$
f,&11, f'JJ!l6 Rj),117 ROlle
Pm.n P.~!11 Mm MI34
JWH1· ~.p'Clt l\-lJlolQ ~.ii!SIJ
RDI'21
~IO
~.o)5iI
F.O!~ f\!ll.t'il Flil~ P;li{63 ~.I.lI~ ~4)[&S P.oI60 7t017t) P.Q17S
RfJl~ IWrn Rona Rol79 P.OlilQ! 1<,f;IB! P.oI81 !';O!~ Rt1l91.
ROI$ll P.\It9,1 ~I~$ 1(0196 Rl)l97 f.0l98 ~ P..Q2ll1
RW f.,WW ~~~. ~u P.(l2l? 1il1i.3 Ea2U l!.(]Zl~ Foam
R022' i!«l225 P.o..'25. JW221 Ri'm8iUrm P.£l2.!1l M2J:.I W.J.9
RfI'..Ai 1t014! Rlmt ~ ROZU RlI24$ F.Q"~ M2SO RtI251 ~:;

Menu (28) Relay Monitoring Review

This KeepRelay Review menu provides the technician in repair for monitoring an initial
relays.

2.0perational Menu 2-128

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
2.38 Function selection

I
I
I

I
I
I Menu (38) Function Selection

To move the cursor to the modified parameter location and to tum the shuttle knob of

I posterior to the Enter key of I!l or to press down both of the dual keys of

I
II + or II +. by choice of the function mode, then to

confirm by the confirming key of I!l to end the command after selection, the description

column will be giving the different name in accordance with the user requirement or a specific
variety function, the related information of this menu (38) Function Selection is described as below:
A) AAAAAAAA: It is a function selection for the "Photocell Devices" detection.
I A.a)
A.b)
No Use: To cancel this function.
Use: To use this function.
B) BBBBBBBB: It is a spare 2 function selection just to use when the client has an
optional function, please refer to the user manual from the appendix and
the function code is described as below:
B.a) No Use: To cancel this function.
I B.b)
C)
Use: To use this function.
CCCCCCCC: It is a spare 3 function selection just to use when the client has an
optional function, please refer to the user manual from the appendix and
the function code is described as below:
C.a) No Use: To cancel this function.
C.b) Use: To use this function.
D) DDDDDDDD: It is a spare 4 function selection just to use when the client has an
optional function, please refer to the user manual from the appendix
and the function code is described as below:
I 2.0perational Menu 2-129 ,.0
900"
CE. 1:4001
ISO
August 27,2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wi:N Operation Manual

D.a) No Use: To cancel this function.
D.b) Use: To use this function.
E) EEEEEEEE: It is a spare 5 function selection just to use when the client has an optional
function, please refer to the user manual from the appendix and the
function code is described as below:
E.a) No Use: To cancel this function.
E.b) Use: To use this function.
F) FFFFFFFF: It is a spare 6 function selection just to use when the client has an optional
function, please refer to the user manual from the appendix and the
function code is described as below:
F.a) No Use: To cancel this function.
F.b) Use: To use this function.
G) GGGGGGGG: It is a spare 7 function selection just to use when the client has an
optional function, please refer to the user manual from the appendix
and the function code is described as below:
G.a) No Use: To cancel this function.
G.b) Use: To use this function.
H) I-IHI-llll-IH1-: It is a spare 8 function selection just to use when the client has an
optional function, please refer to the user manual from the appendix
and the function code is described as below:
H.a) No Use: To cancel this function.
H.b) Use: To use this function.
I) JJJJJJJJ: It is a spare 9 function selection just to use when the client has an optional
function, please refer to the user manual from the appendix and the function
code is described as below:
La) No Use: To cancel this function.
Lb) Use: To use this function.
1) KKKKKKKK: It is a spare 10 function selection just to use when the client has an
optional function, please refer to the user manual from the appendix
and the function code is described as below:
J.a) No Use: To cancel this function.
J.b) Use: To use this function.
K) LLLLLLLL: It is a spare 11 function selection just to use when the client has an
optional function, please refer to the user manual from the appendix and
the function code is described as below:
K.a) No Use: To cancel this function.
K.b) Use: To use this function.
L) MMMMMMMM: It is a spare 12 function selection just to use when the client has an
optional function, please refer to the user manual from the appendix
and the function code is described as below:
L.a) No Use: To cancel this option function.
L.b) Function 1: To use the 1st option function.
L.c) Function 2: To use the 2nd option function.
L.d) Function 3: To use the 3rd option function.
M) NNNNNNNN: It is a spare 13 function selection and the function code is described as
below:
M.a) No Use: To cancel this option function.

2.0perational Menu 2-130

9001 CE
,.0 '. '- 14001
1$0
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

M.b) Function I: To use the 1st option function.

M.c) Function 2: To use the 2nd option function.
M.d) Function 3: To use the 3rd option function.
I N) PPPPPPPP: It is a spare 14 function selection and the function code as below description.
No Use: To cancel this option function.
N.a)
N.b) Program 1: To use the 1st sequence for this option function.
N.c) Program 2: To use the 2nd sequence for this option function.
N.d) Program 3: To use the 3rd sequence for this option function.
I 0) QQQQQQQQ: It is a spare 15 function selection and the function code is described as
below:
O.a) No Use: To cancel this option function.
O.b) Program 1: To use the 1st sequence for this option function.
O.c) Program 2: To use the 2nd sequence for this option function.

I O.d)
P)
Program 3: To use the 3rd sequence for this option function.
RRRRRRRR: If there is no any operation condition under the manual mode and later to
set out the screen protection hierarchy, it will delay a span, then to

I
I!:J
proceed the shut-off machine function setting, just to press down the

Enter key of to end the command after selection, the function

I code is described as below:

P.a) No Use: To cancel this shut-off machine function.
I P.b)
P.c)
Stop: Just to switch OFF the barrel heating control circuit.
Keep: To switchover to the barrel preheating control mode.
Q) TTTTTTTT: It is a function select to shut-off the pump under the manual mode and the
function code is described as below:.
Q.a) No Use: To cancel this shut-offpump motor function.

I Q.b)
R)
Stop: Just to shut-off the pump motor.
UUUUUUUU: It is buffer time to delay the screen protection hierarchy, then to start-up
the shut-off machine function under the manual mode.
S) SSSSSSSS: It is a shut-off machine condition selection if the machine malfunction

under the auto modes, just to press down the Enter key of

setup, the function code is described as below:

I!I after

No Use: To cancel this shut-offmachine function.

Stop: Just to switch OFF the barrel heating control circuit.
Keep: To switchover to the barrel preheating control mode.
VVVVVVVV: It is a function select to shut-off the pump under the auto modes and the
function code is described as below:.
UUUUUUUU: It is buffer time to delay the screen protection hierarchy, then to start-up
the shut-off machine function.
No Use: To cancel this shut-off pump motor function.
Stop: Just to shut-off the pump motor.
WWWWWWWW: It is buffer time to delay the shut-off function when the machine
malfunction, then to start-up the shut-off machine function under
the manual mode.

2.0perational Menu
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
2·131 ..0 (."E
9<101 . ISO
14001

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

2.39 Spare speed I pressure setting

Menu (14) Spare Speed / Pressure Setting

Of!!l
To move the cursor to the parameter setting item in place and to key-in the intended parameter

within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key to end the

command, the related information of this menu (14) Spare Speed / Pressure Setting is described as
below:
A) The spare Kl (R0384): (Optional)
A.a) AA: The speed setting of the spare KI "Split Nut Lock".
A.b) BBBBB: The pressure setting of the spare KI "Split Nut Lock".
B) The spare K2 (R0385): (Optional)
B.a) CC: The speed setting of the spare K2.
B.b) DDDDD: The pressure setting of the spare K2.
C) The spare LI (R0387): (Optional)
C.a) EE: The speed setting of the spare Ll.
C.b) FFFFF: The pressure setting of the spare LI.
D) The spare L2 (R0388): (Optional)
D.a) GG: The speed setting of the spare L2.
D.b) HHHHH: The pressure setting of the spare L2.
E) The spare Ml (R0390): (Optional)
E.a) JJ: The speed setting of the spare Ml.
E.b) KKKKK: The pressure setting of the spare Ml.
F) The spare M2 (R0391): (Optional)
F.a) LL: The speed setting of the spare M2.
F.b) MMMMM: The pressure setting of the spare M2.
G) The spare Al (R0360): (Optional)
G.a) NN: The speed setting of the spare AI.
G.b) PPPPP: The pressure setting of the spare AI.
H) The spare A2 (R036I): (Optional)
H.a) QQ: The speed setting of the spare A2.
H.b) RRRRR: The pressure setting ofthe spare A2.

2.0perational Menu 2-132 ••.0

9OOt·
.
C:E· 1400'1
. JS.·O
....
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I I)
I.a)
The spare A3 (R0364): (Optional)
SS: The speed setting of the spare A3.
I.b) TTTIT: The pressure setting of the spare A3.

I 1)
J.a)
The spare A4 (R036S): (Optional)
UU: The speed setting of the spare A4.
1.b) VVVVV: The pressure setting of the spare A4.

I K)
K.a)
The spare AS (R036S): (Optional)
SS: The speed setting of the spare AS.
Kb) TTTIT: The pressure setting of the spare AS.
L) The spare A6 (R0369): (Optional)
L.a) UU: The speed setting of the spare A6.
L.b) VVVVV: The pressure setting of the spare A6.
M) The spare 12 (R032S): (Optional)
M.a) aa: The speed setting of the spare 12.
M.b) bbbbb: The pressure setting of the spare 12.
N) The spare 14 (R0327): (Optional)
N.a) cc: The speed setting of the spare 14.
N.b) ddddd: The pressure setting of the spare 14.
0) The spare 16 (R0331): (Optional)
O.a) ee: The speed setting of the spare 16.
O.b) fffff The pressure setting of the spare 16.

I P)
P.a)
P.b)
The spare IS (R0333): (Optional)
gg: The speed setting of the spare IS.
hhhhh: The pressure setting ofthe spare IS.

I 2.40 Spare time setting

I
I
I
I
I
I
I Menu (40) Spare Time Setting

I!:I
To move the cursor to the parameter setting item in place and to key-in the intended parameter

I within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confrrming key of to end the

command, the related information ofthis menu (40) Spare Time Setting is described as below:

2.0perational Menu 2-133

900t C.'.E
,so .. 140M
t,ff.SS x,
.. ·O
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC·200owiN Operation Manual

A) AAAA.A: It is a buffer time to delay the next mold clamp start after finishing the
ejector movement under the auto modes.
B) BBBB.B: It is a monitoring alarm time of an automatic machine in one cycle.
C) CCCC.C: The spare time T#006.
D) DDDD.D: The spare time T#007.
E) EEEE.E: The spare time T#010
F) FFFF.F: The spare time T#O11.
G) GGGGG: The spare time T#012.
H) HHHH.H: The spare time T#O13.
I) JJl1.1: The spare time T#014.
1) KKKK.K: The spare time T#015.
K) LLLL.L: The spare time T#016.
L) MMMM.M: The spare time T#017.
M) NNN.NN: The spare time T#OIS.
N) PPP.PP: The spare time T#OS4.
0) QQQ.QQ: The spare time T#08S.
P) RRR.RR: The spare time T#092.
Q) SSS.SS: The spare time T#093.
R) TTT.TT: The spare time T#094.

2.41 Spare counter setting

Menu (39) Spare Counter Setting

I!:I
To move the cursor to the spare counter item and to key-in the intended parameter within the

alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the confirming key of to end the command, the

related information of this menu (39) Spare Counter Setting is described as below:
A) AAAAA: The spare counter.
B) BBBBB: The spare counter.

2.0perational Menu 2-134 tso (.E

9001 .SO
. . ...140001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I C) CCCCC: The spare counter.

D) DDDDD: The spare counter.
E) EEEEE: The spare counter.
F) FFFFF: The spare counter.

I G) GGGGG: The spare counter.

H) HHHHH: The spare counter.

I I) JJJJJ: The spare counter.

I 2.42 Interface setting

I
I
I

Menu (13) Interface Setting

licable settings for the user on this menu. To move the cursor or to tum the

I shuttle knob of by choice of the intended parameter setting item as desired; suppose

I
that it wants to the choice the function item, please tum the shuttle knob of posterior

I
to the Enter key of !J for selecting the intended item as desired and confirm by the

I
confirming key of I!J to end the command after setup, the related infurmation of this menu

(13) Interface Setting is described as below:

2.0perational Menu 2-135

August 27, 2010 Revisiou:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

A) AAAAAA: It is applied for the user ......0 .....0'" selections menu after login, just to tum

the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of (!3

I!:I
for selecting the intended 3-mode user languages among of (1) Chinese (2)

English (3) Japanese, then to confirm by the confirming key of

I
to end the command. If it is different from the user language alternative
requirement that the display item is unlike as well.
B) BBBBBB: It is a mouse interface selection in use if it is installed to the controller, just

to tum the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of

!!:I for selecting the parameter setting item, the content is involved in

2-mode of (1) ''No Use" or (2) "USE".

The column of the user defining menu name will be changing from the dim yellow
color to the navy yellow color when the mouse interface item is in use, also it will be
influencing on the monitor energy saving function by reason of the existed mouse
locator.
C) CC: The human-machine menu monitor energy saving time setting.
D) DDDDDDDD: It is a soft key to backup the controller data, please insert the "USB
Disk" into the controller at first and view the right column display the

!l
hinting message of "Has USB" thereat, then to move the cursor in here

by pressing down the Enter key of fur automatically backup

the data, which consists of the malfunction records file, the parameter
modified records file, the production information file, the common
plastic materials temperature setup file and the machine default

m
parameter and so on.
The backup data will be accessing to the \\ ..\US8 Disk\xxxxxxxx (this machine series
no) direction, the user could be managing this backup data for a contingent use. If it
wants to read the filename please contact with the manufacturer.
E) EEEEEE: Display the OS language when booting the computer in the every time,
please refer to the section of"2.53 User choice information".
F) FFFF/FFIFF FF:FF: Display the issued date I time of the system program.
G) GGGG/GG/GG GG:GG: Display the issued date I time of the project PLC sequences.
H) HHHHHHHHH.PLC: Display the filename of the project PLC sequences.
I) MMM.MMINNN.NN: Display the version information of the system control program.
J) JJJJJJJJ: It is the "Job Mode" mode selection in operation when connecting to the iChen

m
network system, To move the cursor to the modified parameter location and to

tum the shuttle knob of posterior to the Enter key of or

2.0perational Menu 2-136

9001 C'E'
,so . . ..1[4001
I$Q
August 27, 2010 Revisiou:2.0
I
JI~ CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I to directly pressing down both of the dual keys of II + or

I or to turn the shuttle knob of by

I!l
choice of the intended job mode as desired, then to confirm by the confirming

key of to end the command after selection, the selection item content

of the production status is described as below:

I J.a)
J.b)
No Job: It is produced in operation under no production scheduling on the machine.
Work: It is produced in operation according to the production scheduling on the machine.
J.c) Change Color: It is a prototype test of the change color in operation on the machine.
I J.d)
J.e)
Repair Mold: It lay in the shut-off machine of the mold repair on the machine.
Test Mold: It lay in the mold prototype test in operation on the machine.

I J.f)
J.g)
Change Mold: It is proceeding with the mold change on the machine.
Transform Material: It is proceeding with the materials transformation on the machine.
J.h) Wait Material: It is waiting for the materials on the machine.
I J.i)
J.j)
Wait Mold: It is waiting for the molds on the machine.
Mend Machine: It is the machine malfunction under the shut-off machine on the machine.

I J.k)
J.l)
Stop Machine: It is lying in no production status on the machine.
Adjust Machine: It is proceeding with the adjustable calibration on the machine.
J.m) Other: Others reason situation.
I K) NNNNNNNN: Display the menu program codes of this controller.

2.43 User level key-in menu

I
I
I
I
I
I
Menu (94) User Level Key-in

2.0perational Menu 2-137 ISO C.E· (SO

9001· ... 14001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

It provides an input menu by login in use to 0 this machine for the user on this menu. To

move the cursor or to turn the shuttle knob of by choice of the intended parameter

setting item as desired, then to confirm by the confirming key of m to end the command

after setup, the related information ofthis menu (94) User Level Key-in is described as below:

A) AAAAAAAA (LOGOUT):

move the cursor in here by pressing down the Enter key of

user's authority on the machine.

!!:I
If the user wants to escape the operation status by means of login the machine, please

for logout the

B) BBBBBBBB: The input column of the user name for login this machine.
C) CCCCCCCC: The input column of the user password for login this machine.
D) DDDDDDDD: (LOGIN)

Of!J
To login this machine after inputting the correct data, then to move the cursor in here by

pressing down the Enter key to make a final reconfirmation.

E) EEEEEEEE: Display the login user name in use on this machine at present.
F) F: Display the login user level of the user name on this machine at present.

2.44 User login authority review

Menu (95) User Login Authority Review

2.0perational Menu 2-138

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000WiN Operation Manual

I It is an applicable menu to create / delete the user for login this machine on this menu.

2.44.1 Creatingmethod of the user

To move the cursor to the leftward/rightward directions by utilizing those keys either of

I or ,just to move to the "AAAAAAAA" setting column and to key-in the new

I user name, then to press down the Enter key of I!!:J' again to move the cursor to the

I!J
"BBBBBBBB"setting column and to key-in the intended password no, anew to press down the

I Enter key of ,once again to move the cursor to the "C" setting column by inputting an

I enable control user level and to press down the Enter key of I!:J ,finally to move the cursor

to the "DDDD" confirm column and to confirm by the confirming key of !!J to end the

I cfini
<• ;
I ,Ii
command,
It must be remembered the defined user password when creating the new user name,
otherwise, it shall not reclaim if forgot. It is unavailable to use the user data if it is
- " connecting to the iChen production management system network coalition on account
I of the management authority being manipulated by iChen production management
system in a centralized management control.

I 2.44.2 Deleting method of the user

Please be careful that the delete function. To move the scroll cursor to the leftward/rightward
I
I directions by utilizing those keys of & , just to move to the "FFFFFFFF"

I deletion column, then to utilize the those keys either of & or to tum the

I shuttle knob of to move the scroll cursor by choice of the intended elimination of the

I user, fmally to confirm by the confirming key Of!!J to end the deleting command.

I [i1 Wb~n the u:er is left who had registered on this machine, please do a deleting work, to
~ aVOIdthe misuse of the others non-related personnel.

2.0perationaI Menu 2-139 ISC)

M01'
('E' ISO
" 14001
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

2.45 PLC Diagnostic

0000 U10
filiOl, S£l
OMt Uili
000$ .~Il
Ji(IQ~ 1),,1
Q,OOS ltlt)
OODC Oil,
o OI)'T I!t~e:I
MO~ lOti
OOl)~ AIIl'OI!l
onl; 001
onil t1iJ1 RQ I,e~
COlt Hip ~OHt
Qlih ~u
D'otc ~OtL
OC I'
OQ1~ 4liQ
(rtff
R}Hfl
iO,SfI'
~tlltl

It provides to monitor the computer program for the technician in repair and displays the project
program data of this machine in the small sight-window in center to press down those keys of

& or to turn the shuttle knob of to move the scroll cursor

of the small sight-window, or to pressing down those keys either of or to the

leftward / rightward directions of the small sight-window, the related information of this menu (12)
PLC Diagnostic is described as below:

A) AAAA: To quick search a common initiation output node program of the controller
program.
B) BBB:To quick search a timer program of the controller program.
C) CC: To quick search a counter program of the controller program.
D) DDD: To quick search a service interrupt type of an initiation output node program of
the controller program.
E) EEE: To quick search a self holding type of an initiation output node program of the
controller program.
F) FFFFF: To quick move to the line number of the program.
G) GGGGGGG: Display the filename of the project PLC sequences.
H) HHHl-ll-I: Display the 1st commentary content of the project PLC sequences.
I) J1111:Display the 2nd commentary content of the project PLC sequences.
1) KKKKK: Display the 3rd commentary content of the project PLC sequences.

2.0perationaI Menu 2-140 ••0 ('E I,SO

MOt'.' , 140:{}1
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0
 ,CDC200owiN Operation Manual

I 2.46 Home position reset menu

I
I
I
Menu (15) Home Position Reset Menu

It must be carried out this reset operation to ensure the correct work of the feedback devices,
when the position feedback devices are happened an abnormal condition with performed a change
of the position feedback devices or after fixed up the adjustment.

I If it used to an analog potentiometer of the position feedback devices, please do not firm up
the connection section of the after the analog potentiometer change, otherwise, it could be damaged
the analog potentiometer change. Just to do the procedures of the minimum value reset and to
switch OFF the machine after reaching to the minimum position of the mechanism, then to connect
I it to the end and to reboot the computer for redoing the sequences of the home position reset.

2.46.1 Thesequenceslor the "Clamp Mechanism Home Position Reset" as below description

Before operating the clamp mechanism home position reset, please unload the molds
and close the safety guard, then to carry out the ejector backward movement to the
I ending position, to avoid the personnel hurt or the molds being damaged. If the machine
type is belongs to the hydraulic clamping, please make sure to dismantle the molds,
then to operate after login the user level of 4.
A) Toggle machine home position reset.
A.a) Toggle machine mold clamp home position reset.
This is the minimum home position calibration function, in order to prevent misemploying
in operation at the clamp area, it shall not have any molds or a standard molds before carrying out
the movement, so that it has to login the user level of 2 or above with the user name just to allow
operating. Please close the safety guard at first and turn ON the pump motor, then to carry out the
ejector backward movement till to the ending position, then to review whatever to switch OFF the
core pulling function, again to move the cursor to the soft key of "AAAAAA" column by holding

down the Enter key Of!!J ' at the same time, the computer will be carrying out the mold

clamping movement and appearing the hinting message of "Message1386>Mold Clamp Home

2.0perational Menu
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
2-141
MOt
.
C.E.
1•.0 ... ·140()1
~SO

;CDC200owiN Operation Manual

Position Reset Is In Action" on the top screen that it will be detecting the clamping stroke by the
controller till to the end without reposition, then to proceed the minimum value reset and to replace
the minimum home position value of the mold clamp / open mechanism to the current analog value
of the mold clamp / open mechanism; suppose that it is an analog potentiometer, an actual analog
value of the mold clamp / open mechanism will be replacing the maximum home position value and

I!l
simultaneously appearing the alarm message of the "Alarm0904>Home Position Reset Is

Completed" on tbe top screen, at this time, just to release the Enter key of to end the mold

clamp home position reset command.

A.b) Toggle machine mold open home position reset.
This is the maximum home position calibration function, in order to prevent misemploying
in operation at the clamp area, it shall not have any molds or a standard molds before carrying out
the movement, so that it has to login the user level of 2 or above with the user name just to allow
operating. Please turn ON the pump motor at first and to carry out the ejector backward movement
till to the ending position, then to review whatever to switch OFF the core pulling function, again to

move the cursor to the soft key of "BBBBB" column by holding down the Enter key of !!J '

at the same time, the computer will be carrying out the mold opening movement and appearing the
hinting message of"Message1387>Mold Open Home Position Reset Is In Action" on the top screen
that it will be detecting the opening stroke by the controller till to the end without reposition, then to
proceed the maximum value reset and to replace the maximum home position value of the mold
clamp / open mechanism to the current analog value of the mold clamp / open mechanism; suppose
that it is an analog potentiometer, an actual analog value of the mold clamp / open mechanism will
be replacing the maximum home position value and simultaneously appearing the alarm message of
the "Alarm0904> Home Position Reset Is Completed" on the top screen, at this time, just to release

the Enter key of (I!;I to end the mo Id open home position reset command.

B) Hydraulic Clamping machine home position reset.

B.a) Hydraulic Clamping machine mold clamp home position reset.
This is the minimum home position calibration function, in order to prevent misemploying in
operation at the clamp area, it shall not have any molds or a standard molds before carrying out the
movement, so that it has to login the user level of 4 or above with the user name just to allow
operating. Please close the safety guard at first and turn ON the pump motor, then to carry out the
ejector backward movement till to the ending position, then to review whatever to switch OFF the

fill '
core pulling function, again to move the cursor to the soft key of "AAAAAA" column by holding

down the Enter key of at the same time, the computer will be carrying out the mold

clamping movement and appearing the hinting message of "MessageI371>Please Unload Mold

II
Then Reset Clamp To Zero" on the top screen, at this time, please confirm to unload the molds and

press down the Cancel key of to release the alarm message, later to hold down the Enter

key Of!!:J after releasing the message, at now the computer will be carrying out the mo Id

clamping movement and appearing the hinting message of "Message1386>Mold Clamp Home
Position Reset Is In Action" on the top screen that it will be detecting the clamping stroke by the
controller till to the end without reposition, then to proceed the minimum value reset and to replace
the minimum home position value of the mold clamp / open mechanism to the current analog value
2.0perational Menu 2-142 C·:E·
_ISO.... ··.·1:4001
ISO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

I
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I of the mold clamp I open mechanism; suppose that it is an analog potentiometer, an actual analog
value of the mold clamp I open mechanism will be replacing the maximum home position value and

I!:J
simultaneously appearing the alarm message of the "Alarm0904>Home _~osition Reset Is

Completed" on the top screen, at this time, just to release the Enter key of to end the mold

I clamp home position reset command.

B.b) Hydraulic Clamping machine mold open home position reset.
This is the maximum home position calibration function, in order to prevent misemploying in
operation at the clamp area, it shall not have any molds or a standard molds before carrying out the
movement, so that it has to login the user level of 2 or above with the user name just to allow
operating. Please close the safety guard at first and tum ON the pump motor, then to carry out the

I ejector backward movement till to the ending position, then to review whatever to switch OFF the

I!:J,
core pulling function, again to move the cursor to the soft key of "BBBBBBB" column by holding

I down the Enter key of at the same time, the computer will he carrying out the mo Id

opening movement and appearing the hinting message of "MessageI387>Mold Open Home

I Position Reset Is In Action" on the top screen that it will be detecting the opening stroke by the
controller till to the end without reposition, then to proceed the maximum value reset and to replace
the maximum home position value of the mold clamp I open mechanism to the current analog value

I of the mold clamp I open mechanism; suppose that it is an analog potentiometer, an actual analog
value of the mold clamp I open mechanism will be replacing the maximum home position value and

I!:J
simultaneously appearing the alarm message of the "Alarm0904> Home Position Reset Is

I Completed" on the top screen, at this time, just to release the Enter key of to end the mold

open home position reset command.

2.46.2 Injection + melt decompressionhome position reset

I Before operating the injection mechanism home position reset, please switch ON the
barrel heating switch and retract the carriage unit to the ending position, just to wait the
barrel temperature until heating up to the setting, then to carry out this procedure,
I A)
ensure to avoid the barrel being damaged.
Injection home position reset.
This is the minimum home position calibration function, in order to prevent misemploying in
operation at the clamp area, it shall not have any molds or a standard molds before carrying out the
movement, at this time, it shall not have raw materials exists on the barrel & hopper inside and
switch ON the barrel heating switch, just to wait the barrel temperature till heating up to the setting,
I then to carry out the operation, assure to avoid the injection screw being damaged. In order to
prevent misemploying in operation, it has to login the user level of 2 or above with the user name
just to allow operating. Please close the safety guard at first and turn ON the pump motor, just to

I!:J,
wait the barrel temperature till heating up to the setting, the to move the cursor to the soft key of

"CCCCCC" column by holding down the Enter key of at the same time, the computer
I will be carrying out the mold clamping movement and appearing the hinting message of
"Message 1388>Injection Home Position Is In Action" on the top screen that it will be detecting the
I injection stroke by the controller till to the end without reposition, then to proceed the minimum
value reset and to replace the minimum home position value of the injection mechanism to the
current analog value of the injection mechanism; suppose that it is an analog potentiometer, an

2.0perational Menu 2-143 tSO(E

$001 ... .'SO
140()1
August 27,2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

m
actual analog value of the injection mechanism will be replacing the minimum position value and
simultaneously appearing the alarm message of the "Alarm0904>Home Position Reset Is

Completed" on the top screen, at this time, just to release the Enter key of to end the

injection home position reset command.

B) Melt Decompression home position reset.
This is the minimum home position calibration function, in order to prevent misemploying in
operation at the clamp area, it shall not have any molds or a standard molds before carrying out the
movement, at this time, it shall not have raw materials exists on the barrel & hopper inside and
switch ON the barrel heating switch, just to wait the barrel temperature till heating up to the setting,
then to carry out the operation, assure to avoid the injection screw being damaged. In order to
prevent misemploying in operation, it has to login the user level of 2 or above with the user name
just to allow operating. Please close the safety guard at first and turn ON the pump motor, just to

I!J,
wait the barrel temperature till heating up to the setting, the to move the cursor to the soft key of

"DDDDDD" column by holding down the Enter key of at the same time, the computer

will be carrying out the mold clamping movement and appearing the hinting message of
"Message1389>Melt Decompression Home Position Is In Action" on the top screen that it will be
detecting the melt decompression stroke by the controller till to the end without reposition, then to
proceed the maximum value reset and to replace the maximum home position value of the injection
mechanism to the current analog value of the mold clamp I open mechanism; suppose that it is an
analog potentiometer, an actual analog value of the injection mechanism will be replacing the
maximum home position value and simultaneously appearing the alarm message of the

I!:J
"Alarm0904> Home Position Reset Is Completed" on the top screen, at this time, just to release the

Enter key of to end the melt decompression home position reset command.

2.46.3 Thesequencesfor the "Ejector Mechanism Home Position Reset" as below description

00
Before operating the ejector mechanism home position reset, please unload the molds
and close the safety guard, then to carry out the mold opening movement to the ending
position, to avoid the personnel hurt or the molds being damaged.

2.46.4 Ejectorforward & backward home position reset

A) Ejector forward home position reset.

This is the maximum home position calibration function, in order to prevent misemploying
in operation at the clamp area, it shall not have any molds or a standard molds before carrying out
the movement, so that it has to login the user level of 2 or above with the user name just to allow

m'
operating. Please turn ON the pump motor at first and to carry out the mold opening movement till
to the ending position, then to move the cursor to the soft key of "EEEEEE" column by holding

down the Enter key of at the same time, the computer will he carrying out the mold

opening movement and appearing the hinting message of "Message 1390>Ejector Forward Home
Position Is In Action" on the top screen that it will be detecting the ejector forward stroke by the
controller till to the end without reposition, then to proceed the maximum value reset and to replace
the maximum home position value of the ejector mechanism to the current analog value of the
ejector mechanism; suppose that it is an analog potentiometer, an actual analog value of the ejector

2.0perational Menu 2-144

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 ;CDC200owiN Operation Manual
mechanism will be replacing the maximum home position value and simultaneously appearing the
alarm message of the "Alarm0904> Home Position Reset Is Completed" on the top screen, at this

I time, just to release the Enter key Of!:J to end the ejector forward home position reset

command.
B) Ejector backward home position reset.
This is the minimum home position calibration function, in order to prevent
misemploying in operation at the clamp area, it shall not have any molds or a standard molds before

I carrying out the movement, so that it has to login the user level of 2 or above with the user name
just to allow operating. Please close the safety guard at first and turn ON the pump motor, then to
carry out the ejector backward movement till to the ending position, then to review whatever to

I
I!:I'
switch OFF the core pulling function, again to move the cursor to the soft key of"FFFFFF" column

by holding down the Enter key of at the same time, the computer will be carrying out

I the ejector backward movement and appearing the hinting message of "Message1391>Ejector
Backward Home Position Is In Action" on the top screen that it will be detecting the ejector

I backward stroke by the controller till to the end without reposition, then to proceed the minimum
value reset and to replace the minimum home position value of the ejector mechanism to the current
analog value of the ejector mechanism; suppose that it is an analog potentiometer, an actual analog
value of the ejector mechanism will be replacing the maximum home position value and
I
I!l
simultaneously appearing the alarm message of the "Alarm0904>Home Position Reset Is

Completed" on the top screen, at this time, just to release the Enter key of to end the
I ejector backward home position reset command.

I 2.46.5 Thespare 1position (Optional)

A) GGGGGG: It is a soft key to reset the minimum spare 1 position.

I B) HHlll-IHH: It is a soft key to reset the maximum spare 1 position.

2.46.6 Thespare 2 position (Optional)

I A) cccccc: It is a soft key to reset the minimum spare 2 position.
B) dddddd: It is a soft key to reset the maximum spare 2 position.
I 2.46.7 Thespare 3position (Optional)

A) eeeeee: It is a soft key to reset the minimum spare 3 position.

B) ffffff: It is a soft key to reset the maximum spare 3 position.

I 2.46.8 Thespare 4 position (Optional)

A) gggggg: It is a soft key to reset the minimum spare 4 position.

I B) hhhhhh: It is a soft key to reset the maximum spare 4 position.

2.46.9 Thede/ault parameter calibration 0/ the pressure transducer

I Either of the display value of the pressure feedback device has an inconsistent with the
measuring tool of the pressure gauge or it has to proceed the calibration procedures when the
I 2.0perational Menu 2-145
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000 WiN Operation Manual

pressure transducer was out of order, if it wants to change the different specification of the pressure
transducer, except that the most principal voltage is requirement of note in the power supply (Please
don't use to the specification of the minimum working voltage lower than 8V in the pressure
transducer by reason of the current circuit provides 10V with the controller, it is possible to make an
unstable status by using the wrong one that it has to modify the circuit wiring if there is no
alternative but to apply one, please contact with AP customer service department), it must be noted
the maximum pressure and the maximum output voltage in the pressure transducer too. The
maximum pressure could be referred to the display value of the working voltage specific faction for
the cylinder that is applied for an applicable column on the menu home (15) Home Position Reset
and it accepts the maximum vo ltage at 10V,just to login the user level of 2 or above with the user
name to allow operating after the confrrmation. Please recognize as the element's specification of
the pressure transducer in use, just to calculate the minimum working voltage [This value is setting
at "0 " (zero) in accordance with an example] of the pressure transducer by the following formula
on the controller and to modify the setting value of the minimum working voltage, then to calculate
the maximum working voltage [This value is setting at "10 " in accordance with an example] of the
pressure transducer on the controller and to modify the setting value of the maximum working
__,....volt.
age, then to move the cursor to the "Confirm Key" column by pressing down the Enter key of

i.iiiII to end the command after setup.

A) Spare 1 pressure (Optional)
A.a) JJJJ.JJ: The minimum output voltage by choice of the pressure transducer at the spare 1
pressure.
A.b) KKKKK: The maximum working pressure by choice of the pressure transducer at the
spare 1 pressure.
A.c) LLLL.LL: The maximum output voltage by choice of the pressure transducer at the
spare 1 pressure.
A.d) MMMMMM: It is a soft key to convert the initial data After fmishing the specification
key-in by choice of the pressure transducer at the spare 1 pressure.
B) Spare 2 pressure (Optional)
B.a) NNNN.NN: The minimum output voltage by choice of the pressure transducer at the
spare 2 pressure.
B.b) PPPPP: The maximum working pressure by choice of the pressure transducer at the
spare 2 pressure.
B.c) QQQQ.QQ: The maximum output voltage by choice of the pressure transducer at the
spare 2 pressure.
B.d) RRRRRR: It is a soft key to convert the initial data After fmishing the specification
key-in by choice of the pressure transducer at the spare 2 pressure.
C) Spare 3 pressure (Optional)
C.a) SSSS.SS: The minimum output voltage by choice of the pressure transducer at the spare
3 pressure.
C.b) TTTTT: The maximum working pressure by choice of the pressure transducer at the
spare 3 pressure.
C.c) UUUU.UU: The maximum output voltage by choice of the pressure transducer at the
spare 3 pressure.
C.d) VVVVVV: It is a soft key to convert the initial data After finishing the specification
key-in by choice of the pressure transducer at the spare 3 pressure.
D) Spare 4 pressure (Optional)
D.a) WWWW.WW: The minimum output voltage by choice of the pressure transducer at the
spare 4 pressure.
D.b) XXXXX: The maximum working pressure by choice of the pressure transducer at the
spare 4 pressure.

2.0perational Menu 2-146

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

D.c) YYYY.YY: The maximum output voltage by choice of the pressure transducer at the
spare 4 pressure.
D.d) ZZZZZZ: It is a soft key to convert the initial data After fmishing the specification
I key-in by choice of the pressure transducer at the spare 4 pressure.

I 2.46.10 The modified procedure of the current mold height for the toggle mechanism as belaw description
{Itis no use for the hydraulicclamping type machine}

'~I"iI'l1IiIiimM~\qJf<l1m'"
I When the current mold height between the at "AAAA.A"

I
on the menu (7) Modal Thickness Adjustment and the actual mold daylight is incorrect, please

unload the molds at first and to press down the manual mold clamp key of [ ~ till to the

I ending position, later to measure the distance between the fixed platen and the moving platen and to

I!:I
directly move the cursor to the "aaaa.a" column, then to key-in the correct data by pressing down

the Enter key of to end the command.

2.47 Lubrication system setting

I
I

Menu (41) Lubrication System Setting

I It provides an applicable menu for the machine mechanism lubrication maintenance on this
menu. To move the cursor by pressing down the cursor keys to the lubrication parameter setting

I!:I
item and to key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by the

confirming key of to end the command, the related information of this menu (41)
I Lubrication System Setting is described as below:

2.0perational Menu 2·147

August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0

I
- -~--------------------,.

,CDC200owiN Operation Manual

2.47.1 Togglelubrication oilssetup

A) AAAAA: The intervals modulo setting for the toggle lubrication oils.
B) BBBBB: Display the ''Next Lubrication Oils" modulo for the toggle lubrication oils.
C) CCCC.C: The action time setting as modulo for the toggle lubrication oils.
D) DD.D: It is an inspection time setting to monitor the toggle lubrication oils. (Optional)
E) EEEEE: It is a soft key for the compulsory lubrication oils operating by manual.

2.47.2 The operation method of an automatic toggle lubrication system

A) The operation method of an automatic toggle lubrication system, is no matter what the
I
machine running under the manual/auto modes that it will be calculating by downward
count circulation when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to the high-pressure stage,
at this time, the counter of "BBBBB" will be automatically minus" -1 " by itself. It will
I
be actuating the "Auto Lubrication" function after reaching to the "0 " (zero) at
"BBBBB" and the duration of an action time is controlled by "CCCC.C". If the oils
level is insufficient in the oils reservoir, at this time, the computer will be appearing the
alarm message of "Alarm0913>Lubrication Oils Tank Is Lower Level" to remind of the
client on the top screen, please immediately stop the machine and fill up with the new
oils for releasing the alarm, ensure to avoid the toggle mechanism being damaged.

I!J
B) If it wants to reinforce the lubrication effect, please move the cursor to the "EEEEE"

column by pressing down the key of to set out the automatic lubrication

motion.

2.47.3 The periodic greases maintenance setup for the clamp mechanism (Optional)

A) FFFFF: The intervals modulo setting for the periodic greases maintenance.
B) GGGGG: Display the ''Next Clamp Greases" modulo for the periodic greases maintenance.
C) HH: The cyclic counter setting as modulo for the periodic greases maintenance.
D) JJ.JJ It is an inspection time setting to monitor the periodic greases maintenance. (Optional)
E) KKKKK: It is a soft key for the compulsory greases operating by manual. (Optional)
F) RR: The cyclic counter setting as modulo for the moving platen greases.
G) SS.SS It is an inspection time setting to monitor the moving platen greases. (Optional)
H) TTTTT: It is a soft key for the compulsory greases operating of the moving platen by
manual. (Optional)

2.47.3.1 Toggleoperation method by manual greases device

The calculation method of the periodic greases maintenance for the machine is no matter
what the machine running under the manual/auto modes that it will be calculating by downward
I
count circulation when the mold clamping stroke is reaching to the high-pressure stage, at this time,
the counter of "GGGGG" will be automatically minus "-1 " by itself. It will be appearing the
hinting message of "MessageI373>Clamp Periodical Maintenance Target Is Completed, Please
Maintain" on the top screen after reaching to the "0 " (zero) at "GGGGG", at this time, please
immediately stop the machine for the greases maintenance job that it will be automatically releasing
the alarm after fmishing the maintenance job.

2.47.3.2 Toggleoperation method by automatic greases device

A) It is no matter what the machine running under the manual/auto modes that it will be
calculating by downward count circulation when the mold clamping stroke is reaching

2.0perational Menu 2-148 ,.0

9001CE-
--_ ISO
- 14001
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0

I
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
to the high-pressure stage, at this time, the counter of "GGGGG" will be automatically
minus "-1 " by itself. It will be actuating the "Auto Lubrication" function after reaching
to the "0 " (zero) at "GGGGG" and the action counter is controlled by "HH". If there is
no change from the feedback confirmation signal within an inspection time of "11.1J"
when the automatic greases motion is in action under way, at this time, the computer
will be appearing the alarm message of "Alann0924>Clamping Lubrication Oils Piping
Is Leaking Or Block", please immediately stop the machine to detect the feedback
confrrmation signal.

I!::I
B) If it wants to reinforce the lubrication effect, please move the cursor to the "KKKKK"

I column by pressing down the key of to set out the automatic lubrication

I motion.

2.47.4 Theperiodic greasesmaintenance setup for the injection mechanism (Optional)

I A)
B)
LLLLL: The intervals modulo setting for the periodic greases maintenance.
MMMMM: Display the "Next Clamp Greases" modulo for the periodic greases

I C)
maintenance.
NN: The cyclic counter setting as modulo for the periodic greases maintenance.
D) PP.PP: It is an inspection time setting to monitor the periodic greases maintenance.

I E)
(Optional)
QQQQQ: It is a soft key for the compulsory greases operating by manual. (Optional)

I 2.47.4.1 Injection operation method by manual greasesdevice

The calculation method of the periodic greases maintenance for the machine is no matter

I what the machine running under the manual/auto modes that it will be calculating by downward
count circulation when carrying out the injection movement, at this time, the counter of
"MMMMM" will be automatically minus "-1 " by itself. It will be appearing the hinting message of

I "Message 1377>Injection Periodical Maintenance Target Is Completed, Please Maintain" on the top
screen after reaching to the "0 " (zero) at "MMMMM", at this time, please immediately stop the
machine for the greases maintenance job that it will be automatically releasing the alarm after

I fmishing the maintenance job.

2.47.4.2 Injection operation method by automatic greasesdevice (OPtional)

A) It is no matter what the machine running under the manual/auto modes that it will be
calculating by downward count circulation when carrying out the injection movement,
at this time, the counter of"MMMMM" will be automatically minus "-1 " by itself. It
I will be actuating the "Auto Lubrication" function after reaching to the "0 " (zero) at
"MMMMM" and the action counter is controlled by ''NN''. If there is no change from
the feedback confirmation signal within an inspection time of "PP.PP" when the
I automatic greases motion is in action under way, at this time, the computer will be
appearing the alarm message of "Alarm0976>Injection Lubrication Oils Piping Is
Leaking Or Block", please immediately stop the machine to detect the feedback
I confrrmation signal,

I!J
B) If it wants to reinforce the lubrication effect, please move the cursor to this "QQQQQ"

I column location by pressing down the key of to set out the automatic

lubrication motion.
I 2.0perational Menu 2-149 _, E'
ISO ('..' "'1,4001
,$;O
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

If it is appearing the hinting messages either of "MessageI373>Clamp Periodical
Maintenance Target Is Completed, Please Maintain" or "Message1377>lnjection
Periodical Maintenance Target Is Completed, Please Maintain" or "Alarm0976>
Injection Lubrication Oils Piping Is Leaking Or Block" on the top screen, please
certainly do the maintenance to the every lubrication point, enable to release the alarm
motion, otherwise, it is possible to cause the machine not being fixed condition.

2.48 Periodical maintenance

To check the oils level of the hydraulic fluid oils.e> The oils level shall be kept at the top line (green line) of the hydraulic oils gauge at any time.
To check the Pump airborne level.=>No rattling noise.
To check the Each cylinder and piping connection.=>No oils k!aks.
To check the Cooling water hose connection.=>No water leaks.
To check the EMERGENCYSTOP pushbutton.=>To press down the EMERGENCYSTOP pushbutton during the pump motor running, the pump motor shall be
stopped at that time.
Electric guard interlocking device check on the operator side.=>To open the movable safety guards during the pump motor running, No motions to be
happened by mean of: 1. tt shall not be activated the mold opening or the mold clamping on the mokts.2. It shall not be activated the ejector forward or the
ejector backward.
Electric guard interlocking device check on the non-operator side.=>To open the movable safety guards during the pump motor running, l.The pump motor
shall be stopped at that time.2.No any motions can be occurring at all the time.

To check the barrel heating condition.=>l.To check up the barrel temperature can be arising up to 60°C within 20 minutes.2.lo check up the difference
range between the setting value and the measuring point.

Menu (143) Periodical Maintenance

It provides an applicable menu to carry out the semi-annual maintenance calibration

m
information for the machine. To move the cursor by pressing down the cursor keys to the lubrication
parameter setting item and to key- in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to

confirm by the confirming key of to end the command, the related infurmation of this

menu (143) Periodical Maintenance is described as below:

A) AAAAAAAA: If it is appearing the hinting message of "Message1378>Machine

Periodical Maintenance Target Is Completed, Please Maintain" on the
top screen on the machine, it shall be carrying out the periodic

I!!l
maintenance calibration j~~, j~~t to move the cursor in here by pressing

down the Enter key of to successfully release the alarm after

completed that it will be automatically resetting the next periodic

maintenance date for the machine.
If it is appearing the hinting messages of "Message1378>Machine Periodical
Maintenance Target Is Completed, Please Maintain" on the top screen, please certainly
do the maintenance to the every lubrication point, enable to release the alarm motion,
otherwise, it is possible to cause the machine not being fixed condition.
B) B: It is a counter setting for the spare periodical maintenance function.

2.0perational Menu 2-150 '$0 ( .. E·

1001··.. '14001
1'50
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 •
,CDC2000WIN Operation Manual

I C)
D)
cccccccc: It is a soft key to release the spare periodical maintenance after completed.
DDDD: Display the year of the "Last Periodical Maintenance".
E) EE: Display the month of the "Last Periodical Maintenance".
F) FF: Display the day of the "Last Periodical Maintenance".

I G)
H)
GGGG: Display the year of the "Next Periodical Maintenance".
HH: Display the month of the ''Next Periodical Maintenance".

I I)
1)
JJ: Display the day of the "Next Periodical Maintenance".
KKKKK: Display the current counter for the spare periodical maintenance.

I K) PPPPPPPP: It is a mode selection of the maintenance content, please

Enter key of I!:I' later to tum the shuttle knob of by

I!:I
choice of 4-mode of (1) Every day, (2) Three months, (3) Six months or (4)

One year, then to confirm by the confirming key of to end the

command after the usage selection.

L) UP: To move the scroll cursor to the upward direction.

I M) DOWN: To move the scroll cursor to the downward direction.

00
The detection content of the maintenance is only for the reference on this machine, the
correct procedures of the machine repair/maintenance, please refer to the Operating &
Maintenance Instruction.

2.49 Time monitoring review

I
I

I
I
I
I
Menu (30) Time Monitoring Review 1

2.0perational Menu 2·151

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

Menu (66) Time Monitoring Review 2

Menu (67) Time Monitoring Review 3

2.0perational Menu 2-152 .•0 C:E·. 'SO

'1001 ..' , 14001
August 27,2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

Menu (68) Time Monitoring Review 4

I Menu (69) Time Monitoring Review 5

I
2.0perational Menu 2-]53 1.0
$OOt"
C'" E' 1:40,01
I'SO
August 27, 20]0 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

Menu (70) Time Monitoring Review 6

I
This Time Monitoring Review menu provides the technician in repair for monitoring the
operation status of an initial timer, please do not change the setting value at random. The description
column will be giving the different name in accordance with the user requirement.

m The display content of the name column on the Time Monitoring Review menu is only
for the reference that the actual name will be different in accordance with the client
requirement.
~

2.50 Counter monitoring review

Menu (29) Counter Monitoring Review 1

2.0perational Menu 2-]54

August 27, 20]0 Revision:2.0
I
/1 'I
/~I·/ CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

Menu (65) Counter Monitoring Review 2

I This Counter Monitoring Review menu provides the technician in repair for monitoring the
operation status of an initial counter, please do not change the setting value at random. The
description column will be giving the different name in accordance with the user requirement.
I The display content of the name column on the Counter Monitoring Review menu is
only for the reference that the actual name will be different in accordance with the
client requirement.

2.51 Production information record

I
I
I
Menu (26) Production Information Record
I 2.0perational Menu 2·155 is. 0.·.·. C·'.E··· 14001
9001 15.00.•'
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

2.51.1 Thefunction of this menu records the production time and the product quantities under the auto
modes that it must be login the user level of 4 or above just for displaying this menu in use and it
could be recording within US-set of the recent automation production information, the record
column is described as below:
A) MODAL: To record the mold no in use.
B) Drive Start: To record the start time of the shift in automatic production mode.
C) Drive End: To record the stoppage time of an automatic production mode that the
"0000/00/00 00:00" is represented the power outage situation under way
during the machine running.
D) Product Count: To record the produced modulo of this tracing time.
E) Defect Count: To record the defect part modulo of this tracing time.
F) Total Count: To record the machine grand total modulo.

2.51.2 ProductionInformation Record is described as below:

A) The explanation of the total power ON working time in use:

A,a) AAAAA: Display the grand total power ON time by "Hour".
Ab) BB: Display the grand total power ON time by "Minute".
A.c) SWI: To clear the grand total power ON time to zero.
B)
B.a)
The explanation ofthe automatic running time in use:
CCCCC: Display the grand total automatic running time by "Hour".
I
B.b) DD: Display the grand total automatic running time by "Minute".
B.c) SW2: To clear the grand total automatic running time to zero.
C) The explanation of the total motor RUN running time in use:
C.a) EEEEE: Display the grand total motor RUN running time by "Hour".
C.b) FF: Display the grand total motor RUN running time by "Minute".
C.c) SW3: To clear the grand total motor RUN running time to zero.

2.52 Temperature calibration record

I
Ie I' u
.r
)t
2 JlI) t!9 ID
~ <e III

Menu (54) Temperature Calibration Record

The Temperature Calibration menu provides the technician in repair for checking the
temperature control status.

2.0perational Menu 2·]56

..SO C·. ISO.·1
August 27, 20]0 Re\'ision:2.0
,"1. 'E. '
1:4IXJ.
I /~I-V CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
/1 ~
2.53 User choice information

I
I Menu (131) User Choice Information

It provides for the machine information and an applicable sequence setting on this menu, just

I !:I
to move the cursor in place and to key-in the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then

to confirm by the confirming key of to end the command.

I 2.53.1 Ex-work date setup

A) TTTTTTTT: Display the machine model on this machine.

I B) UUUUUUUU: Display the serial no on this machine.
C) VVVVV: Display the maximum clamping force on this machine.
D) aaaa: Display the Ex-work date within the unit of the "Year".
E) bb: Display the Ex-work date within the unit of the "Month ".
F) cc: Display the Ex-work date within the unit of the "Day".

2.53.2 Locallanguage & time scale setup

A) PP/QQ: It is applied to modify the current time within the unit of the "Hour" I
"Minute" that it is verified the domestic time to collocate with the controller or

!:I
a wrong time correction nowadays, please move the cursor to "SWITCH 3"

column after modifying the time by pressing down the key of to end

I B)
the command.
AAAAAAAA: It is applied to operate in coordination with the OS (Operating System)

!:I'
language setting in local after booting the computer, just to move the
I cursor in here by pressing down the key of later to turn the

2.0perational Menu 2-157 1$.0.·,.

9OOf' C·..E·' 1'4&01
....15.00
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

shuttle knob of by choice an intended language as

desired, then to confirm by the confirming key of I!l to end the

command after the usage selection, then to reboot the computer for this
setting language display in the every time.
2.53.3 PLCprogram update
It is used to update the PLC program if necessary, please fulfill the possibility of the PLC
program and/or the folder within an authorised code in advance from AP and copy them to the
"USB Devices" to the root path I direction via by the P.C. computer, then to insert the "USB
_ev.i~e.s" into the port for updating to the legal machine and to confirm by the confirming key of
lin.

iaiiiiII under the harmonized mode, its codes described as below:

A) SSSSS: It is a function selection within 2-mode of (1) ''No Backup" (2) "Save To USB"
to backup the old PLC program back to the "USB Devices", to prevent from an
error installation or has a wrong sequence for tracing to the old task.

!!:I
B) dddddddd: When updating the PLC program, it is the possibility of the filename

archives into the "USB Devices" just to press down the key of in

here, later to tum the shuttle knob of by choice the intended

I!:I
program filename as desired, then to confirm by the confirming key of

after selection, if there is no existed files over there, it will be

displaying the message of "PLX NAME" at that time.

!::I
C) SWITCH 4: It could be accessing to the update procedures, just to move the cursor in

here by pressing down the key of when there is a program name

to be selected from the "USB Devices" ("dddddddd" display is the right to

install the program demand), then to key-in the authorised code to fmish
updating the program on the machine.
If it is selected the "Save To USB" at "SSSSS", this program will be backup to the
"\\USB Disk\PlxBackUp" direction, please contact with AP if want to restore the
command.
2.53.4 Systemprogram update
It is used to update the system program if necessary, please fulfill the possibility of the BIN
files within an authorised code in advance from AP and copy them to the "USB Devices" to the root

to the legal machine and to confirm by the confirming key

its codes described as below:

Of,.,
path / direction via by the P.c. computer, then to insert the "USB Devices" into the port for updating

under the harmonized mode,

2.0perational Menu
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
2-158 C·E
1.0 ....·1;4001
9OOt· ISO
I CDC2000WIN
, . Operation Manual

I A) eeeeeeee: When updating the system program, the root direction of the BIN files
archives into the "USB Devices", if there is no existed files over there, it will
be displaying the message of "No Bin File" at that time.

I B) SWITCH 5: It could be accessing to the update procedures, just to move the cursor in

here by pressing down the key Of!J when there is a systemprogram

I to be selected from the "USB Devices" ("eeeeeeee" display is the right to

install the program demand), then to key-in the authorised code to finish
updating the program on the machine.
ffl/fi2: Display the current version of the SH & CE in the default system after loading.
Do not put an acquirable BIN files & its authorised code accesses to an impertinent
machine or load an unknown BIN files & its authorised code to the machine, else it
could be resulting a malfunction led to the fail-safe subject in the security.

2.53.5 Recordclear

A) SWITCH 1: It is a soft key to delete the whole records on the Parameter Modified

!I
Record menu, just to move the cursor in here by pressing down the key of
I if necessary. In order to avoid an error operation, please utilize

the "USB Devices" to backup the data from the Interface Setting menu.
B) SWITCH 2: It is a soft key to delete the whole records on the Malfunction Record

I!:I
menu, just to move the cursor in here by pressing down the key of

if necessary. In order to avoid an error operation, please utilize

~I!I
the "USB Devices" to backup the data from the Interface Setting menu.

Do not operate it at randomand be careful the handleby reason of the recovery in vain.
I 2.53.6 Speedreduce

ii
To move the cursor at "EE" column and to key the intended parameters within the

g:
for decele~~~:e :m:::~: ::::'~:::s t:~~:~:a::~s:I~:::~:g b:~h:f ~:~~:

II and entering the machinesetup function,if the user / operator want to cancel this function,

I please press down both of both of the keys

2.53.7 Hydraulicfluid oils control

II + on the computer panel.

I A) HHHHH: Display the current oils temperature of the hydraulic fluid oils in the oils
reservoir.
B) FFF: The high alarm tolerance setting of the hydraulic fluid oils in the oils reservoir.
C) GGG: It is the temperature setting starts to cool down the hydraulic fluid oils in the oils
reservoir. (Optional)

I 2.0perational Menu 2-159

August 27, 2010 Re\'ision:2.0

.CDC200owiN Operation Manual

D) J11: It is the temperature setting starts to preheat the low hydraulic fluid oils in the oils
reservoir by ending the temperature setting. (Optional)

2.53.8 Cooling water jacket control (Optional)

A) MMM: Display the current temperature of the cooling water jacket.

B) KKK: The high alarm tolerance setting of the cooling water jacket.
C) 11: It is the temperature setting starts to cool down the cooling water jacket.

2.54 User hardware option (Optional)

Menu (192) User Hardware Option

This menu is a module selection of the temperature control to be collocated with an optional
"Multi-point Temperature Control Unit" setting or the mold temperature control that it could be
connecting to on-line 4-group of the temperature control workstation with a maximum of 64 zones
of the mold temperature in total just for CDC2000WIN controller.

2.54.1 User Hardware Option code described os below

A) AA: It is the number setting for the group 0 workstation that it could be installed with the
maximum of IO-set of the temperature control module, each one is available to
carry out 2-zone of the mold temperature control from CHOI to CH20.
B) BB: It is the number setting for the group 1 workstation that it could be installed with the
maximum of lO-set of the temperature control module, each one is available to carry
out 2-zone of the mold temperature control from CH21 to CH420.
C) CC: It is the number setting for the group 2 workstation that it could be installed with the
maximum of 10-set of the temperature control module, each one is available to carry
out 2-zone of the mold temperature control from CH41 to CH60.
D) DO: It is the number setting for the group 3 workstation that it could be installed with the
maximum of 10-set of the temperature control module, each one is available to
carry out 2-zone of the mold temperature control from CH61 to CH64.

2.0perational Menu
August 27, 2010 Re\'ision:2.0
2-160 '.0 C"E' .SO
9001 '14001
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 2.54.2 Others spare alternative (Optional)

A) EEEEE: It is a function within 6-mode of an input point by "Reserve 1" for the specific

I purpose when the client is chosen an optional feature at that time, please vides
the user manual as appendix.
B) FFFFF: It is a function within 6-mode of an input point by "Reserve 2" for the specific

I purpose when the client is chosen an optional feature at that time, please vides
the user manual as appendix.
C) GGGGG: It is a function within 6-mode of an input point by "Reserve 3" for the specific

I purpose when the client is chosen an optional feature at that time, please vides
the user manual as appendix.
D) HHHHH: It is a function within 6-mode of an out point by "Reserve 1" for the specific
purpose when the client is chosen an optional feature at that time, please vides
the user manual as appendix.
E) JJJJJ: It is a function within 6-mode of an output point by "Reserve 2" for the specific
purpose when the client is chosen an optional feature at that time, please vides the
user manual as appendix.
F) KKKKK: It is a function within 6-mode of an output point by "Reserve 3" for the
specific purpose when the client is chosen an optional feature at that time,
please vides the user manual as appendix.

2.55 iChen network production management system (Optional)

I To utilize with the iChen management software for the efficient organization & control in the
production scheduling which could be improving the productivity and the production benefits. It is
I using an intranet network via by the server to collect the production conditions and information
progress from the machine acquiring the real-time motion status as per machine as well to pick up
the information for carrying out the monitor analysis that it is available for the remote production
I management through the internet network such as the production scheduling, the actual status of a
job production, the print report management and so on.
2.55.1 iChennetwork system login setting
I

I
I
I
Menu (122) iChen System

2.0perational Menu 2-161 ISO

$Mt·.
C.E..··14001
ISO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

It is possible to link up to the network by using this menu, then to join together with the
production management. It will be automatically connecting to the servo management system when
booting the computer, just to move the cursor for selecting the setting item of the network system

I!J
login page and to key-~ the intended parameter within the alphanumeric key, then to confirm by

confirming key of to end the command, the related information of this menu (122) iChen

System is described as below:

A) AAAAAA: It could be selecting 2-mode of (1) Disjoin or for the network

connection, just to tum the shuttle knob of then to confirm

by the confirming key of I!J to end the command after selection. It

will be displaying the icon of k~~

I at the left side of the common
display information column if the iChen system is successfully connecting I
or the icon of ifthe join is failed.
B) BBBBBB: It is the machine "Job Mode" selection key at present, please tum the

shuttle knob of for selecting the below 13-mode, then to

confirm by the confirming key of I!:I to end the command after

selection, so that it could be carrying out the monitor analysis for the
machine's efficiency in use and it will be displaying the machine production
status to the left side of the information column after confirming.
B.a) No Job: It is produced in operation under no production scheduling on the machine.
B.b) Work: It is produced in operation according to the production scheduling on the machine.
B.c) Change Color: It is a prototype test of the change color in operation on the machine.
B.d) Repair Mold: It lay in the shut-off machine of the mold repair on the machine.
B.e) Test Mold: It lay in the mold prototype test in operation on the machine.
B.f) Change Mold: It is proceeding with the mold change on the machine.
B.g) Transform Material: It is proceeding with the materials transformation on the machine.
B.h) Wait Material: It is waiting for the materials on the machine.
B.i) Wait Mold: It is waiting for the molds on the machine.
B.j) Mend Machine: It is the machine malfunction under the shut-off machine on the machine.
B.k) Stop Machine: It lay in no production status on the machine.
B.I) Adjust Machine: It is proceeding with the adjustable calibration on the machine.
B.m) Other: Others reason situation.
C)

by pressing down the Enter key of

address by itself from the network server.

m'
CCCC: It is a soft key to reconfirm the network IP address, to move the cursor in here

enable to acquire the local IP

2.0perational Menu
August 27, 20]0 Revision:2.0
2-]62 '.0.· C·.' E.·.14001
$Mt
II.S'
.• 00
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

D) DDDDDDDD: Display the machine model.

E) EEEEEEEE: Display the machine serial no.
F) Server IP: It is a defining IP address by the server itself when download the iChen
I management software, it shall not join to the network on-line if this setting
of the IP address is different from the server.
G) FFFFFFFF: Here is shown as the order number belongs to the job card via by the
server download.
H) GGGGGGGG: Here is shown as the mold no belongs to the production molds of the
job card on this machine via by the server download.
I I) WWWWW: Here is shown as the modulo of this job card demand via by the server
download.
1) XXXXX: Here is shown as the grand total modulo of this job card via by the server
download.
K) YYYYY: Here is shown as the modulo of the machine collocation with the job card
demand.
L) ZZZZZ: Here is shown as the grand total modulo of the machine collocation with the
job card demand.

I 2.55.2 The applicationfor the network production management system

I
I
Menu (233A) iChen Data
To press down the cursor keys for selecting the setting item of the network system login
page and to input the number or the character to modify the content, then to confirm by confirming
I key Of!!l to end the command, the related information of this menu (233A) iChen System is

described as below:

I!J
A) KK: It is a soft key to upload the mold formation data to the iChen server, just to move

I the cursor in here by pressing down the Enter key of for uploading the

formation data of the mold name at "LLLLLLLL" to the iChen server.

2.0perational Menu 2-163

August 27, 2010 Rel'ision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

B) LLLLLLLL: Display the produced mold name that it will be changing when download
the formation data in accordance with the alternative. I fit wants to upload
I
to the iChen server, just to move the cursor for carrying out the modification,

then to confirm by the confirming key of !!l to end the command

after fmishing.
C) MMMMMM: It is a soft key to download the mold formation from the iChen server
that it will be displaying the molds information after pressing down this
vide the below' menu, please utilize those keys of I
or to move the scroU cursor of the small

I!!J
sight-window for selecting the produced mold name as desired, then to

confirm by the confirming key of to end the download sequence

after choosing.

Menu (233B) iChen Data

D) NNNNNN: It is a soft key to download a job card list of the production management
from the iChen server that it will be displaying the job card list after
pressing down this vide the below display menu, please utilize those
keys of or to move the scroll cursor of the

I!:I
small sight-window for selecting the job card list as desired, then to

confirm by the confrrming key of to view the above menu (233B)

I
after choosing, then to follow up the operation of the third indent of C) to
end the download sequence.

2.0perational Menu 2-164

August 27, 2010 Rel'ision:2.0
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I
I
I
I

I Menu (233C) iChen Data

I
I
I
I
I
I

I
I
2.0perational Menu 2·165
August 27, 20] 0 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

3 The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages

3.1 Descriptions of the alarm messages

3.1.1 Alarm0900>DCVoltage Is Abnormal

It is probable that the external DC voltage was failed, please check the fuse at first, then to detect
the wirings in accordance with the electrical circuit.

3.1.2 Alarm0901>No Authorization PleaseLogin At First

The current user level of an authority is too low on this machine, please asks the administrator for
approval/embedded in your request.

3.1.3 Alarm0902>Front Safety Guard Limit Switch Is Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.4 Alarm0903>Rear Safety Guard Limit Switch Is Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.5 Alarm0904>Home Position ResetIs Completed

The position feedback mechanism is conftrmed the motion completely when carrying out the home
position reset.

3.1.6 Alarm0905>Ejector Backward Stroke Is Abnormal

Under the auto modes, the ejector backward did not fmish the movement within a stroke-inspection
time yet.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the ejector backward parameters on the menu (3) Ejector Setting
properly.
B) Please check the ejector position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened or not?
C) Please inspect the ejector hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the ejector stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value properly.

3.1.7 Alarm0906>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.8 Alarm0907>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.9 Alarm0908>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.10 Alarm0909>Barrel Temperature Is Under Pre-heat Mode

When selecting the pre-heat function at Keep mode on the menu (21) Barrel Temperature Setting,
this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen
[Remedy]: Please choice it at Heating mode that is so.

3.1.11 Alarm0910>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.12 Alarm0911>Preset Clamping ForceIs Over

When the pressure of The high-pressure cylinder is over than the default machine specification, this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3·]

August 27, 20]0 Revision:2.0
 CDC2000 WiN Operation Manual

I [Remedy]:
A) Please press down the mold open button to carry out the mold opening.
B) Please inspect or adjust the hydraulic coils system pressure whether it is over than the machine

I designed specification?
C) Please adjust the injection pressure properly.
D) Please calculate the relationship between the mold projective area and the injection pressure
whether it is exceeded the machine clamping tonnage?

3.1.13 Alarm0912>High-pressureCylinder Stroke Is Over

The distance of The high-pressure cylinder is over than the maximum mechanism stroke, it will be
cut off the pump motor at that time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please inspect and adjust the stroke protection devices whether it is working normally or not?
B) This alarm message will be cut off the pump motor no more restart and stop the all movements

I .
even, the release method by pressmg down those keys of ' ," II'
,+ "" at the same

time, just to tum ON the pump motor by pressing down the Motor Start key of after
I
finished, then to hold down the manual Mold Open button of [ ~_~ I till the alarm

I C)
message disappearing just so.
Please repeatedly adjust the mold thickness adjustment again.

3.1.14 Alarm0913>Lubrication Oils Tank Is Lower Level

During the toggle lubrication oils is in action, when the lubrication oils are lower than the oils level,
this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.

I [Remedy]: Please fill up within the new lubrication oils into the oils reservoir just so.

3.1.15 Alarm0914>Clamping Stroke Did Not Finish Yet

Under the manual mode, the split nut unlock did not fmish or the mold clamping not in the ending
I
I
position, if pressing down those manual keys among of the Carriage Forward [~I' ¢=:I
the

I Injection I ~ ..~
¢=J
.1 or the Plasticising [<1\\\\\111
~
buttons at this time, it is unable to carry out

those movements.
I [Remedy]: Please activate the mold opening or the mold clamping movement until the stroke in the
ending position just so.

I 3.1.16 Alarm0915>Don't Start-up Machine Under Inspection

Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.17 Alarm0916>Mold ThicknessMotor Is Overload

The overload protection devices are activated during the mold thickness adjustment, this alarm
message will be appearing on the top screen.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-2

August 27, 2010 Rel'ision:2.0

,CDC200owiN Operation Manual

[Remedy]:
A) Please push down the trigger of the thermal relay just so for the mold thickness adjustment
motor on the cabinet for releasing the alarm message.
B) Please check whether the current scale at the thermal relay is correct and detect the contact
node is normal or not?
C) Measure whether the current is working at the normal range? if the current is too high that it is
required to inspect the mold thickness adjustment mechanism or the mold thickness adjustment
induction motor.

3.1.18 Alarm0917>RearSafety Guard Is Not CloseYet

The rear safety guard is being opened to gain this alarm message; if it is happened when the mold
clamping is not in the ending position, the pump motor will be cut off and no more restart.

iii
[Remedy]: After confirming the following conditions, please press down the Cancel key of

on the computer panel under the manual mode.

A) Please close the rear safety guard just so and check whether it is certainly locked up.
B) Please inspect the rear safety guard mechanism whether it has the loosened phenomenon?
C) Check whether the input signal of the rear safety guard is getting at ON status?
D) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the rear safety guard are shorted circuit or have a
loosened condition?

3.1.19 Alarm0918>Front Safety Guard Is Not CloseYet

The system detected that the Front Safety Guard did not close under the following conditions; this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen. (I).At Mold Clamp (2).At Pump START
(3).Under the Home Position Reset mode, want to perform the clamp home position reset motion.

iii
[Remedy]: After confirming the following conditions, please press down the Cancel key of

on the computer panel under the manual mode.

A) Inspect whether the front safety guard just so and check whether it is certainly locked up.
B) Please inspect the front safety guard mechanism whether it has the loosened phenomenon?
C) Check whether the input signal of the front safety guard is getting at ON status?
D) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the front safety guard are shorted circuit or have a
loosened condition?

3.1.20 Alarm0919>Ejector Backward Limit Switch Failure Inspection

Under the auto modes, the ejector backward did not fmish the movement within a stroke-inspection
I
time yet.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the ejector backward parameters on the menu (3) Ejector Setting
properly.
B) Please check the ejector position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened or not?
C) Please inspect the Molds ejector Mechanism.
D) Please detect the proximity switch of the machine ejector backward and the return limit switch
of the molds ejector plate whether they are working normally?
E) Please inspect the ejector hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
F) Please verify or modify the stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value properly.

3.1.21 Alarm0920>Minimum Mold ThicknessStroke Is Over

The stroke of the mold thickness forward is over than the minimum mold height limit switch .

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-3 •80
toOf
('E 'SO
." 1:4001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I ,CDC200owiN Operation Manual
[Remedy]:
A) Please exchange this molds to the small-scale machine for the production if the actual mold
height is smaller than the minimum mold thickness of the machine specification (Please unload
the molds for the toggle machine, then to carry out the mold clamping to the ending position,
just to measure the distance between the fixed platen and the moving platen, if the display
value of "AAAA.A" is incorrect to compare with the measuring dimension on the menu (7)
Modal Thickness Adjustment, please go into the menu (15) Home Position Reset and modify
the value of "aaaa.a" to an actual value.
B) Please inspect whether the limit switch of the minimum mold thickness is damaged or has a

I loosen condition?
C) Please inspect whether the interrelated wirings of the limit switch for the minimum mold
thickness are broken or have a loosened condition?

I D) To press down the manual operation key of "Mold Thickness Backward" till the actual mold
height inward to the minimum mold thickness of the machine specification as soon as to
disappear the alarm message. If it is used to the hydraulic clamping machine, please press
down the Mold Open button for the mold opening till the actual position of the moving platen
bigger than the minimum mold thickness of the machine specification as soon as to disappear
the alarm message.

I 3.1.22 Alarm0921>Maximum Mold ThicknessStroke Is Over

The stroke of the mold thickness backward is over than the maximum mold height limit switch.

I [Remedy]
A) Please exchange this molds to the large-scale machine for the production if the actual mold
height is bigger than the maximum mold thickness of the machine specification (Please unload
the molds for the toggle machine, then to carry out the mold clamping to the ending position,
I just to measure the distance between the fixed platen and the moving platen, if the display
value of "AAAA.A" is incorrect to compare with the measuring dimension on the menu (7)
Modal Thickness Adjustment, please go into the menu (15) Home Position Reset and modify
the value of"aaaa.a" to an actual value.
B) Please inspect whether the limit switch of the maximum mold thickness is damaged or has a
loosen condition?
I C) Please inspect whether the interrelated wirings of the limit switch for the maximum mold
thickness are broken or have a loosened condition?
D) To press down the manual operation key of "Mold Thickness Forward" till the actual mold
I height outward to the maximum mold thickness of the machine specification as soon as to
disappear the alarm message.

3.1.23 Alarm0922>Mold ThicknessCounter Limit Switch Is Abnormal

When the mold thickness adjustment motor is in action, the input pulse of the mold thickness
counter is happened a wrong sequence that this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect whether the mold thickness counter limit switch function and the gear counter
response is correct?
B) Detect whether those wirings for the input pulse of the mold thickness counter are shorted
circuit or have a loosened condition?
C) Measure whether the current is working at the normal range during the mold thickness
adjustment motor in action? if the current is too high that it is required to inspect the mold
thickness adjustment mechanism or the mold thickness adjustment induction motor.
D) Check whether the setting range of the inspection time is normal? nevertheless, this time
I please do not change it too long at random; otherwise it will be caused the mold thickness
adjustment mechanism being damaged.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-4 ,so
M01··
CE. 14001
1$0
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

3.1.24 Alarm0923>lnverter Motor Motion Is Abnormal
The energy saving (V) series machine is happened an abnormal inverter alarm, please obey the
below operating descriptions to solve the probable malfunction cause of reason.
[Reason]: When the inverter had an abnormal alarm, its sight-window will be appearing the alarm
code, please look into the cause of reason and the remedy in the alarm code table of the
appendix in accordance with the SUT User Manual.
3.1.25 Alarm0924>Clamp Lubrication Oils Piping Is Leaking Or Block
When the clamp mechanism lubrication greases is in action, the lubrication motion did not fmish
within an inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and it is
represented that the oils piping had a clogged phenomenon.

II
[Remedy]: After confirming the following conditions, please press down the Cancel key of

on the computer panel under the manual mode.

A) Inspect whether the lubrication supply system has no greases or not? if yes, please replenish
the greases.
B) Maybe the oils piping is blocked or broken, please inspect & replace the damaged component
and make sure the oils piping is fastened certainly.
C) Check the related wirings of the input/output are shorted circuit or have a broken condition,
please detect and eliminate them if exists.
D) Maybe the monitoring time is setting too small, please modify the value properly.

3.1.26 Alarm0925>Hydraulic Fluid Oils Displacement Is Insufficient

When the oils level is too low in the oils reservoir.
[Remedy]:
A) Check whether the hydraulic fluid oils is insufficient in the oils reservoir? please fill up the
new oils if the hydraulic fluid oils is much less.
B) Check the related wirings of the input/output are shorted circuit or have a broken condition,
please detect and eliminate them if exists.

3.1.27 Alarm0926>Cut Off Power & Reboot The Computer

Please contact with the manufacturer.
3.1.28 Alarm0927>Hydraulic Pump Motor Is Overload
At Motor START or during the Motor RUN, it is detected the motor overload signal.
[Remedy]:

III
A) Please push down the trigger of the thermal relay for the pump motor, then to press down the

Cancel key of for releasing the alarm message after confirmed under the manual

mode.
B) Please inspect & repair the pump motor and the driven mechanism.
C) Detect the power wirings circuit, by reconnecting the broken wires and measure whether the
supply voltage is at the stable situation?
D) Inspect whether the tapping screw is loosened or the magnetic contactor has a worse quality?
please replace the magnetic contactor.
E) Measure whether the current of the pump motor is working at the standard criteria just to reset
by adjusting the current scale of the thermal relay properly.
F) Check whether the maximum system pressure of the hydraulic system is working with a
standard range?
3.1.29 Alarm0928>Motor Start But No Actuate Yet
The pump motor is START in action but not RUN yet, this alarm message will be appearing on the
top screen.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
3-5 tSO C ·E·
9001·· J'SO
. ·1,4001
I ~CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
3.1.30 Alarm0929>Hydraulic Fluid Oils Filter Is Clogged
The oils filter mesh is clogged, please clean or replace to new one.

3.1.31 Alarm0930>OilsCirculation Temperature Is Too Low

When the actual oils temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus its low tolerance.

I [Remedy]:
A) To close the cooling water supply system in the oils cooler temporarily and to turn ON the
pump motor rotation till the oils temperature arising to the reasonable range, then to operate
the machine.
B) Detect whether those wirings of the oils temperature thermocouple are shorted circuit or have a
loosened condition?
C) To decrease the low tolerance value of the oils temperature.

I 3.1.32 Alarm0931>OilsCirculation Temperature Is Too High

When the actual oils temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus high tolerance.
[Remedy]:

I A) To clean the cooling piping and review the cooling water whether it is clogged or not?
B) Detect whether those wirings of the oils temperature thermocouple are shorted circuit or have a
loosened condition?

I C) To increase the high tolerance value.

3.1.33 Alarm0932>Hydraulic Safety Valve Manipulating Inspection

I The hydraulic safety device is abnormal when closing the front safety guard; this alarm message
will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
I A) Please inspect & adjust whether the hydraulic safety valve and the safety guard interlocking
devices are abnormal?
B) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the hydraulic safety valve are broken or have a
I loosened condition?
C) Please inspect the hydraulic schematic loop.

3.1.34 Alarm0933>Split Nut Unlock Limit Switch Inspection

Please contact with the manufacturer.
I 3.1.35 Alarm0934>Auto Die ExchangeStall Limit Switch Inspection
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.36 Alarm0935>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.37 Alarm0936>High-pressureCylinder Limit Switch Inspection

Please contact with the manufacturer.
I 3.1.38 Alarm0937>High-pressureCylinder Stroke Is Abnormal
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.39 Alarm0938>Mold Installation Position Inspection

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-6

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

3.1.40 Alarm0939>Hydraulic Clutch Failure Inspection
It is detected an irregular motion from the hydraulic clutch system by itself if it had been installed
the hydraulic clutch system on the machine that it will be sending an abnormal signal to the IMM
and appearing this alarm message on the top screen, as well as to stop the mold open / mold clamp
motions when carrying out the mold opening / mold clamping movements on the IMM.
[Remedy]: Please detect the hydraulic clutch system and operate the IMM after completely
confirming no problem.

3.1.41 Alarm0940>Batch Production Target Is Completed

It will be appearing this alarm message on the top screen when the batch production is reaching to

iii
the setting value.

[Remedy]: Please switchover to the manual mode and press down the Cancel key of for

releasing the alarm message.

3.1.42 Alarm0941>Mold Clamp Limit Switch Inspection
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.43 Alarm0942>CorePulling Limit Switch Inspection

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.44 Alarm0943>Disc Plate Limit Switch Inspection

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.45 Alarm0944>Split Nut Action Is Abnormal

Under the auto modes, both of the split nut lock & unlock motions did not fmish the movement
within a stroke-inspection time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please adjust the proper split nut lock & unlock motion-parameters on the menu (150) Lock-up
Devices Setting.
B) Please check whether the split nut lock & unlock position feedback mechanism are fastened
certainly?
C) Inspect whether the split nut lock & unlock hydraulic valve are working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the stroke-inspection time of the split nut lock & unlock with a
reasonable value properly.

3.1.46 Alarm0945>Robot Did Not Return To TheHome Position

If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, when carrying out the mold clamping movement but the
robot arm did not return to the home position at that time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please inspect & adjust the robot ann pick-up mechanism.
B) Please detect whether the related wirings between the IMM and the robot devices are broken
or have a loosened condition?

3.1.47 Alarm0946>Robot Pick-up Foilure Inspection

If the ancillary robot devices are on-line under the auto modes, the robot arm did not return to the
home position for the product pick-up reconfirmation after finishing the recycle time counting.
[Remedy]:
A) Please inspect & adjust the robot arm pick-up mechanism.
B) Please adjust the recycle time with a reasonable value properly.
C) Please detect whether the related wirings between the IMM and the robot devices are broken
or have a loosened condition?

3. The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-7

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I ,CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 3.1.48 Alarm0947>Robot Production Reconfirmation Signal Error

When the photocell function is selected, the computer will be actuating the photocell detection
signal when it is getting at ON status after the mold open~g movement reachin~ ~o t~e e~ding
position under auto modes, this alarm message will be appeanng on the top screen If It still did not
get at ON status after fmishing one cycle.

II
[Remedy]: After confirming the following conditions, please press down the Cancel key of

I on the computer panel under the manual mode.

A) Check whether the photocell devices are out of order? if yes, please replace it.
B) If it is unnecessary or no uses the photocell function, please switchover OFF the photocell
function.

I C)
D)
Please adjust the photocell sensing area.
Please confirm whether the related wirings of the photocell devices are broken or have a
loosened condition?

I 3.1.49 Alarm0948>Photocell Plexi-window Is Being Covered

I Under the auto modes, if the system did not detect the photocell-sensing signal at ON status from
the injection finish to the mold opening during this period, it means that the photocell-transmitting
signal is abnormal and this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.

II
[Remedy]: After confirming the following conditions, please press down the Cancel key of
I on the computer panel under the manual mode.

I A) Confirm that there is no foreign object is remained in the discharge area or stuck on the
photocell devices?
B) Check whether the photocell devices are out of order? if yes, please replace it.
I C)
D)
Please adjust the photocell sensing area.
Detect whether those wirings of the photocell devices are shorted circuit or have a loosened
condition?
I 3.1.50 Alarm0949>ServoActuator IsAbnormal
Please contact with the manufacturer.
I 3.1.51 Alarm0950>Machine EmergencyStop Is In Action
When the IMM Emergency Stop Push Button by itself is being pressed down, this alarm message
I will be appearing on the top screen and cut otIthe pump motor rotation.

3.1.52 Alarm0951>ClampingStroke Did Not Finish Yet

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.53 Alarm0952>Split Nut LockupDistance Inspection

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.54 Alarm0953>Tie Bar Pitch Unmatch Position Failure Inspection

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.55 Alarm0954>Split Nut Limit Switch Failure Inspection

I This alarm message will be appearing under the following conditions.

A) The split nut lock is completed but the close confrrmation limit switch not in place.
B) The split nut unlock is completed but the open confrrmation limit switch not in place.

I 3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-8 ISO
900t C'E
ISO
",' 14001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

II
[Remedy]: After confrrming the following conditions, please press down the Cancel key of

on the computer panel under the manual mode.

A) Please check whether the split nut lock mechanism is fastened certainly?
B) Please check whether the split nut unlock mechanism is fastened certainly?
C) Inspect whether the split nut lock & unlock hydraulic valves are working normally?

3.1.56 Alarm0955>ACInverter Duty Motor IsAbnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.57 Alarm0956>Carriage Forward Limit Switch Inspection

Under the auto modes, the carriage forward did not inward to the adjustable position within a
stroke-inspection time; this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the proper carriage forward parameters on the menu (136) Carriage
Setting.
B) Please check whether the carriage forward position feedback mechanism is fastened certainly? if
it is used to the analog potentiometer, please check whether the carriage forward limit switch
feedback mechanism is fastened certainly?
C) Inspect whether the carriage forward hydraulic valve is working normally?
D) Please detect whether the interrelated wirings of the carriage forward are broken or have a
loosened condition?
E) Please verify or modify the carriage forward stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value
properly.

3.1.58 Alarm0957>Nozzle Guard Is Not CloseYet

When carrying out the injection, the plasticising, the melt decompression, the carriage forward or
the carriage backward movements, the nozzle guard did not close confirmation yet.

A)
II
[Remedy]: After confirming the following conditions, please press down the Cancel key of

on the computer panel under the manual mode.

Inspect whether the nozzle guard is closed certainly?

B) Check whether the input signal of the nozzle guard is getting at ON Status?
C) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the nozzle guard are broken or have a loosened
condition?

3.1.59 Alarm0958>NozzleOrifice Is Choke

Under the auto modes, the actual injection position did not reach the choke position within an
injection time.
[Remedy]:
A) Check whether the nozzle is clogged or not?
B) Inspect whether the nozzle temperature setting value is correct?
C) Detect whether the nozzle heater band is heating normally?
D) Please change the choke position with a reasonable value properly.
E) Please modify the injection formation conditions or arise the barrel temperature setting value.

3.1.60 Alarm0959>No Material Or Hopper Choke

Under the auto modes, the plasticising time is over than the cooling time.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
3-9 'S.
900", C·EISO
"1~1
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I [Remedy]:
A) Inspect whether the capacity of the material hopper is sufficient?
B) Check whether the barrel feeding throat or the hopper is clogged or not?

I C) Please adjust an appropriate plasticising D/A settings.

D) Please adjust the cooling time.

I 3.1.61 Alarm0960>Sajety Guard DevicesFailure Inspection

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.62 Alarm0961>PressureDetection Signal IsAbnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.63 Alarm0962>ScrewRPM Limit Switch Inspection

Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.64 Alarm0963>Automatic ExchangingMaterial Is In Action

Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.65 Alarm0964>ACInverter Duty Motor Is Overheating

Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.66 Alarm0965>Production Target Is Completed

If the '(~~B" of the 'r;~dY§'" is select by "Count" at but the of the
selected by "No Use" on the menu (159) Production Information, this alarm message WIll be
"iIF~"
is

I appearing on the top screen when the grand total good part quantity is reaching the setting value

II
under the automatic production.

I [Remedy]: Under the manual mode, to directly press down the Cancel key of

computer panel just for canceling the alarm message and resetting the grand total good
on the

part quantity to the zero.

I 3.1.67 Alarm0966>Deject Product TooMuch Inspection
If the '~ •• ' of the '~~R:Em" is select by "Count" on the menu (159) Production
I Information, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen when the grand total defect part
quantity is reaching the value under the automatic production.
[Remedy]: To select the of the '.(.,It;f' by "Count" to cancel the alarm message,
I then to reset the grand total quantities to the zero.

3.1.68 Alarm0967>CycleTime Is Too Long

The actual cycle time is over than the monitor alarm time setting under the auto modes.
[Remedy]:
A) Please increase the cycle time parameter setting on the menu (40) Spare Time Setting, this time
I is able to reset this alarm cyclic time referred to the capture time display of the cycle time on
the menu (16) Cycle Monitor Review vides the section of2.3.
B) Detect whether the each single action time is correct or has a change?

3.1.69 Alarm0968>High-pressureCylinder Did Not Return To TheHome Position

Please contact with the manufacturer.
I 3.1.70 Alarm0969>Plasticising Capacity Is Insufficient Or Materials Leaking
Under the auto modes, an actual injection position is smaller than the overfeed position during the
injection motion.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-10

toOt ('E·.
'$0 . .' .'t4l()01
1$0
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I
II
[Remedy]: After confirming the following conditions, please press down the Cancel key of

on the computer panel under the manual mode.

A) If the product is not become to the full saturation on the molds, please increase the plasticising
position on the menu (17) Plasticising I Decompression Setting.
B) If it has a leaking situation, please inspect whether the carriage forward proximity switch is in
place and readjust the holding-pressure setting on the menu (8) Injection Setting.
C) If the overfeed position is setting too big on the menu (8) Injection Setting, please reduce the
setting value.
D) Please check whether the nozzle touching sphere angle is suitable or not?

3.1.71 Alarm0970>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.72 Alarm0971>Clean-upForeign Objects Between Mold Halves

The mold clamping close to the low-pressure stroke, but the molds could not lock up or the stroke
did not switchover from the low-pressure stage to the high-pressure stage within a low-pressure
stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please check whether the molds have the products I foreign objects inside? if yes, please clean
the molds.
B) Please check or adjust the low-pressure stroke-inspection time on the menu (I) Mold Open I
Clamp Setting properly.
C) Please look up and adjust the low-pressure D/A parameters on the menu (1) Mold Open I
Clamp Setting properly.

3.1.73 Alarm0972>PleaseMaintain Injection Mechanism Within Greases

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.74 Alarm0973>Accumulator ChargeIs Abnormal

The accumulator charge is in action, the action time is over than the monitoring time setting.
[Remedy]:
A) Please check and adjust the accumulator charge pressure setting value with an appropriate
pressure properly.
B) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the accumulator charge pressure feedback devices
are shorted circuit or have a loosened condition?
C) Inspect whether the accumulator charge hydraulic valve is working normally?
D) Inspect whether the safety cock valve is working normally?

3.1.75 Alarm0974>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.76 Alarm0975>Opening Stroke Did Not Finish Yet

To carry out the ejector forward movement or the mold thickness adjustment motion, but the mold
opening is not completed yet; this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen, please _press

down the Cancel key of II and press down the manual Mold Open button of

to open the molds until reaching to the ending position just so.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-11 t.o
900t (..'E·· ....,400'1
1$."0
..·•.
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 3.1.77 Alarm0976>lnjection Lubrication Oils Piping Is Leaking Or Block

When an automatic grease devices is in action in the injection mechanism, the feedback device
confirmation signal is no change with an inspection time, please refer to the operating description
on the menu (41) Lubrication System Setting.

3.1.78 Alarm0977>SPARE

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.79 Alarm0978>Ejector Forward Stroke IsAbnormal

I Under the auto modes, the ejector forward did not finish the movement within a stroke-inspection
time.
[Remedy]:

I A) Please look up and adjust the ejector forward parameters on the menu (3) Ejector Setting
properly.
B) Please check the molds ejector mechanism.

I C) Please inspect the ejector hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?

D) Please verify or modify the stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value properly.

3.1.80 Alarm0979>SPARE
I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.81 Alarm0980>ColdStart Self-hierarchical Protection Is In Action

I The barrel temperature is not reaching to the setting or the screw protection time in booting the
barrel heating is not completely counting yet, the alarm message will be appearing on the top screen
if pressing down the following buttons among of the (1) Injection button (2) Plastic ising button &
I (3) Melt Decompression button.

I
[Remedy]:

A) Under the manual mode, just to press down the Cancel key of

panel.
II on the computer

I B) Waiting the barrel temperature heating up to the setting and the screw protection time counting
finish.

I 3.1.82 Alarm0981>Mold Height RequestIs Over Standard Criteria

Please contact with the manufacturer.
I 3.1.83 Alarm0982>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
I 3.1.84 Alarm0983>PleasePressDown Mold Clamp Key Until Alarm Disappearing
When the clamping encoder feedback signal is getting an interference or the others reasons failure.
[Remedy]: (Reserved)
A) Please redo the machine original point calibration function of the clamping position feedback
device.

I B) Detect whether the related wirings of the clamping digital encoder are broken or have a
loosened condition?
C) Please replace the clamping digital encoder.

I 3.1.85 Alarm0984>PleasePressDown Injection Key Until Alarm Disappearing

When the injection encoder feedback signal is getting an interference or the others reasons failure.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-12

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

[Remedy]:
A) Please redo the machine original point calibration function of the injection position feedback
device.
B) Detect whether the related wirings of the injection digital encoder are broken or have a
loosened condition?
C) Please replace the Injection Encoder.

3.1.86 Alarm0985>PleasePressDown Ejector Backward Key Until Alarm Disappearing

When the ejector encoder feedback signal is getting an interference or the others reasons failure.
[Remedy]:
A) Please redo the machine original point calibration function of the ejector position feedback
device.
B) Detect whether the related wirings of the ejector digital encoder are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please replace the Ejector Encoder.

3.1.87 Alarm0986>Ejector Position IsAbnormal/Jitter

When the mold clamp motion is in action, the current position of the ejector backward is over the
setting value of the "Ejector Backward 3 (Back.End)".
[Remedy]:
A) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the ejector position feedback devices are broken or
have a loosened condition?
B) Please inspect the ejector hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
C) Please check the ejector Position Feedback Mechanism whether it is fastened or not?
I
3.1.88 Alarm0987>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.89 Alarm0988>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.90 Alarm0989>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.91 Alarm0990>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
I
3.1.92 Alarm0991>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.93 Alafm0992>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.94 Alarm0993>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer,

3.1.95 Alarm0994>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.96 Alarm0995>Molds ejector Plate Did Not Return To The Home Position
When the mold clamp motion is in action, the molds ejector plate return confirmation signal is
abnormal.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-13 ISO ('E 1,-"..,.1
$CI01. ."2
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I coceooovi« Operation Manual

I [Remedy]: . . . .
A) Please check or replace the molds ejector plate return devices function .whether It ISworkmg
normally?

I B) Please inspect the molds ejector mechanism. .

C) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Mold's Ejector Plate Feedback Devices are
broken or have a loosened condition?

3.1.97 Alarm0996>Ejector Forward Limit Switch Is Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.98 Alarm0997>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.99 Alarm0998>Pneumatic PressureIs Insufficient

The supply of the pneumatic airs pressure is lower than the minimum working pressure.

I 3.1.100Alarm0999>3-PhaseVoltage IsAbsent
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.101Alarml000>Heating Complete
The barrel temperature is heating up to the setting temperature.

I 3.1.102Alarml00l>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.103Alarml002>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.104Alarml003>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.105Alarml004>Abnormal Return Signal During Mold Clamping Manipulating By Molds Heater

Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.106Alarml005>Mold Height RequestIs Over Standard Criteria

Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.107Alarml006>Master Ejector Backward Did Not Return To TheHome Position

When the mold clamp motion is in action, the machine ejector position is not return to the home
position.
I [Remedy]:
A) Please check the machine ejector return devices whether it is fastened normally?
B) Please inspect the machine ejector mechanism.

I C) Please inspect the machine ejector feedback device (potentiometer) and detect whether the
interrelated wirings are broken or have a loosened condition?
D) Please compare with the position of "TTT.T" at "Ejector Backward 3 (Back.End)" and the

I current position of "rrrr.r" on the menu (3) Ejector Setting, if the ejector has already returned to
the mechanism minimum position, but the current position of "rrrr.r" is bigger than 2.0 nun,
please go into the menu (15) Home Position Reset Menu to carry out the procedures of the

I ejector home position calibration, suppose that the position of "TTT.T" at "Ejector Backward 3
(Back. End)" is bigger than the current position of "rrrr.r" on the menu (3) Ejector Setting,
please modify the position of"TTT.T" and it should be smaller than the position of "rrrr.r".

I 3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-14 ,so ·C·E .
9OOt·... 1:S.•Q
14001
August 27, 2010 Revisioo:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

3. 1.108Alarml007>Slaver Ejector Backward Did Nat Return To The Home Position
When the mold clamp motion is in action, the slaver machine ejector position is not return to the
home position.
[Remedy]:
A) Please check the slaver machine ejector return devices whether it is fastened normally?
B) Please inspect the slaver machine ejector mechanism.
C) Please inspect the slaver machine ejector feedback device (potentiometer) and detect whether
the interrelated wirings are broken or have a loosened condition?
D) Please compare with the ending position at "Ejector Backward 3 (Back.End)" and the current
slaver position on the Slaver Ejector Setting menu, if the slaver ejector has already returned to
the mechanism minimum position, but the slaver current position is bigger than 2.0 mm, please
go into the Home Position Reset Menu (Dual-color) menu to carry out the procedures of the
slaver ejector home position calibration, suppose that the slaver ending position at "Ejector
Backward 3 (Back.End)" is bigger than the slaver current position on the Slaver Ejector
Setting menu, please modify the slaver ending position at "Ejector Backward 3 (Back.End)"
and it should be smaller than the slaver current position.

3.1.109Alarml008>Robot EnableEjector Forward Signal Is Abnormal

If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, the ejector forward motion is in action but the robot enable
ejector forward signal is getting at OFF status, this alarm message will be appearing on the top
screen.
[Remedy]: Detect whether the interrelated wirings are broken or have a loosened condition?

3.1.110Alarml009>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.111Alarm1010>Robot EnableMold Open/CloseSignal Is Abnormal

If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, the mold clamp motion is in action but the robot return
confirmation signal is getting at OFF status, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]: Detect whether the interrelated wirings are broken or have a loosened condition?

3.1.112Alarml0ll>Mold Clamp Is Occurred TheRobot Return Signal Abnormally

If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, the IMM is waiting the robot return signal for performing
the mold clamping movement; this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.

3.1.113Alarml012>SIaver NozzleGuard Is Not CloseYet

When carrying out the slaver the injection, the plasticising, the melt decompression, the carriage
forward or the carriage backward movements, the nozzle guard did not close confirmation yet.

II
[Remedy]: After confirming the following conditions, please press down the Cancel key of

on the computer panel under the manual mode.

A) Inspect whether the nozzle guard is closed certainly?

B) Check whether the input signal of the nozzle guard is getting at ON Status?
C) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the nozzle guard are broken or have a loosened
condition?

3.1.114SYSAlarm1013>NozzleZone (Tl Zone) ThermocoupleIs Broken

When the nozzle zone (TI) thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message will be
appearing on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the nozzle zone (TI) thermocouple whether it is damaged?

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-15 ••0 (···.E
9OOt· ~lQ
.. 1....,01
August 27,2010 Revisioo:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 3.1.115 SYSAlarm1014>2nd Zone Thermocouple Is Broken

When the 2nd zone (T2) thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message will be appearing
on the top screen and shut-offmachine at once.

I [Remedy]: Please detect or replace the 2nd zone (T2) thermocouple whether it is damaged?

3.1.116 SYSAlarm1015>3rd Zone Thermocouple Is Broken

I When the 3rd zone (T3) thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message will be appearing
on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the 3rd zone (T3) thermocouple whether it is damaged?

3.1.117 SYSAlarm1016>4th Zone Thermocouple Is Broken

When the 4thzone (T4) thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message will be appearing
on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the 4thzone (T4) thermocouple whether it is damaged?
3.1.118 SYSAlarm1017>5th Zone Thermocouple Is Broken
When the 5thzone (T5) thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message will be appearing
I on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the 5thzone (T5) thermocouple whether it is damaged?

I 3.1.119 SYSAlarm1018>6th Zone Thermocouple Is Broken

When the 6th zone (T6) thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message will be appearing
on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
I [Remedy]: Please detect or replace the 6thzone (T6) thermocouple whether it is damaged?

3.1.120SYSAlarm1019>7th Zone Thermocouple Is Broken

I When the 7thzone (T7) thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message will be appearing
on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the 7thzone (T7) thermocouple whether it is damaged?

3.1.121 SYSAlarm1020>Oils Temperature Zone Thermocouple Is Broken (Oils Temperature)

When the oils temperature zone thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message will be
I appearing on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the oils temperature thermocouple whether it is damaged?

I 3.1.122 SYSAlarm1021>Slaver Nozzle Zone (T9 Zone) Thermocouple Is Broken

When the DC series-slaver nozzle zone (T9) thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm
message will be appearing on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the DC series-slaver nozzle zone (T9) thermocouple whether it
is damaged?

I 3.1.123 SYSAlarm1022>Slaver 2nd Zone Thermocouple Is Broken

When the DC series-slaver 2nd zone (TIO) thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message
will be appearing on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
I [Remedy]: Please detect or replace the DC series-slaver 2nd zone (TIO) thermocouple whether it is
damaged?

3.1.124 SYSAlarm1023>Slaver 3rd Zone Thermocouple Is Broken

When the DC series-slaver 3rd zone (TIl) thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message
will be appearing on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.

I [Remedy]: Please detect or replace the DC series-slaver 3rd zone (Til) thermocouple whether it is
damaged?

3. The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
3-16
"1("'E'"
ISO 'SO
"14{)01

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

3.1.125 SYSAlarm1024>Slaver 4th Zone Thermocouple Is Broken
When the DC series-slaver 4th zone (TI2) thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message
will be appearing on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the DC series-slaver 4th zone (TI2) thermocouple whether it is
damaged?

3.1.126SYSAlarm1025>Slaver 5th Zone Thermocouple Is Broken

When the DC series-slaver 5thzone (TI3) thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message
will be appearing on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the DC series-slaver s" zone (T13) thermocouple whether it is
damaged?

3.1.127 SYSAlarm1026>Slaver 6th Zone Thermocouple Is Broken

When the DC series-slaver 6thzone (TI4) thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message
will be appearing on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the DC series-slaver 6th zone (TI4) thermocouple whether it is
damaged?

3.1.128 SYSAlarm1027>Slaver 7th Zone Thermocouple Is Broken

When the DC series-slaver ih zone (TI5) thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message
will be appearing on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the DC series-slaver 7thzone (TI5) thermocouple whether it is
damaged?

3.1.129 SYSAlarm1028>Cooling Water Jacket Thermocouple Is Broken

When the cooling water jacket thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message will be
appearing on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the cooling water jacket thermocouple whether it is damaged?

3.1.130SYSAlarm1029>Oils Temperature Zone Thermocouple Is Broken

When the oils temperature zone thermocouple has a broken situation, this alarm message will be
appearing on the top screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the oils temperature thermocouple whether it is damaged?
3.1.131 Alarm1030>Robot Enable Ejector Backward Signal Is Abnormal
If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, the ejector backward is in action but the robot enable
ejector backward signal is getting at OFF status, this alarm message will be appearing on the top
screen.
[Remedy]: Detect whether the interrelated wirings are broken or have a loosened condition? I
3.1.132 Alarm1031>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.133 Alarm1032>Synchronous Core In Stroke Is Smaller Than The Warning Position

If the synchronous core at mold clamp sequence is selected, the Core In did not finish the motion
before carrying out the clamping detection position.
[Remedy: Please check whether the Core In DIA and the clamping detection position parameters on
the menu (132) Core 1-4 Pulling Setting are setting properly?

3.1.134 SYSAlarm1033>Nozzle Zone (Tl Zone) Actual Temperature Is Too Low

To carry out the injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
nozzle zone (TI) temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the low tolerance, this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the movement at this time.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages

August 27,2010 Revision:2.0
3-17 (E,.,' 14001
'.0,, '"
'tOOt • ,,0,,,
.s,
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I [Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are workmg
.

normally and measure the heater bands are damaged?

I B) Please adjust the low tolerance value at the nozzle zone (TI) temperature. ..
C) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.135 SYSAlarm1034>2nd Zane Actual Temperature Is Tao Low

To carry out the injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
2nd zone (T2) temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the low tolerance, this

I alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the movement at this time.

[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally and measure the heater bands are damaged?
B) Please adjust the low tolerance value at the 2nd zone (T2) temperature.

I C) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.136SYSAlarm1035>3rd Zone Actual Temperature Is Too Low

I To carry out the injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
3rd zone (T3) temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the low tolerance, this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the movement at this time.

I [Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally and measure the heater bands are damaged?
B) Please adjust the low tolerance value at the 3rd zone (T3) temperature.
I C) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.137 SYSAlarm1036>4th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too Low

To carry out the injection, the plastic ising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
4th zone (T4) temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the low tolerance, this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the movement at this time.
I [Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally and measure the heater bands are damaged?
I B) Please adjust the low tolerance value at the 4thzone (T4) temperature.
C) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

I 3.1.138 SYSAlarm1037>5th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too Low

To carry out the injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
Sthzone (TS) temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the low tolerance, this
I alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally and measure the heater bands are damaged?
B) Please adjust the low tolerance value at the Sthzone (TS) temperature.
C) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.139 SYSAlarm1038>6th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too Low

To carry out the injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
I 6th zone (T6) thermocouple temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the low
tolerance, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the
movement at this time.
I 3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3·18
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN . .. . Operation Manual

[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
I
normally and measure the heater bands are damaged?
B) Please adjust the low tolerance value at the 6thzone (T6) thermocouple temperature.
C) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.140SYSAlarm1039>7th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too Low

To carry out the injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
7th zone (T7) temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the low tolerance, this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the movement at this time.

[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally and measure the heater bands are damaged?
B) Please adjust the low tolerance value at the 7thzone (T7) temperature.
C) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.141 Alarm1040>8th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too Low (Oils Temperature)

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.142 SYSAlarml041>Slaver Nozzle Zone (Tl Zone) Actual Temperature Is Too Low
To carry out the DC series-slaver injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements
when the actual nozzle zone (T9) temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the
low tolerance, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the
movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally and measure the heater bands are damaged?
B) Please adjust the low tolerance value at the DC series-slaver nozzle zone (T9) temperature.
C) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.143 SYSAlarm1042>Slaver 2nd Zone Actual Temperature Is Too Low

To carry out the DC series-slaver injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements
when the actual 2nd zone (TIO) temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the low
tolerance, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the
movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally and measure the heater bands are damaged?
B) Please adjust the low tolerance value at the DC series-slaver 2nd zone (TIO) temperature.
C) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.144SYSAlarml043>Slaver 3rd Zone Actual Temperature Is Too Low

To carry out the DC series-slaver injection, the plastic ising and the melt decompression movements
when the actual 3fd zone (Tll) temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the low
tolerance, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the
movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally and measure the heater bands are damaged?
B) Please adjust the low tolerance value at the DC series-slaver 3rd zone (TIl) temperature.
C) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
3-19
toot
.
C·.E
:.'.0 .. . 1400'1
ISO
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
3.1.145 SYSAlarm1044>Slaver 4th Zone Temperature Is Too Low
To carry out the DC series-slaver injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements
when the actual 4th zone (T12) temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the low

I tolerance, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the
movement at this time.
~~: .
I A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally and measure the heater bands are damaged?
B) Please adjust the low tolerance value at the DC series-slaver 4thzone (TI2) temperature.

I C) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.146 SYSAlarm1045>Slaver 5th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too Low

I To carry out the DC series-slaver injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements
when the actual Sthzone (TS) temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the low
tolerance, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the

I movement at this time.

[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working

I normally and measure the Heater Bands are damaged?

B) Please adjust the low tolerance value at the DC series-slaver Sthzone (Tl3) temperature.
C) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

I 3.1.147SYSAlarm1046>Slaver 6th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too Low

To carry out the DC series-slaver injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements
when the actual 6thzone (Tl4) temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the low
I tolerance, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the
movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
I A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally and measure the heater bands are damaged?
B) Please adjust the low tolerance value at the DC series-slaver 6thzone (TI4) temperature.
I C) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.148 SYSAlarm1047>Slaver 7th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too Low

To carry out the DC series-slaver injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements
when the actual 7thzone (TIS) temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the low
tolerance, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the
movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
I normally and measure the heater bands are damaged?
B) Please adjust the low tolerance value at the DC series-slaver 7thzone (TIS) temperature.
C) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

I 3.1.149 Alarm1048>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
I 3.1.150 Alarm1049>Oils Reservoir Actual Temperature Is Too Low
When the actual oils reservoir temperature is lower than the setting value, this alarm message will
be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the oils reservoir thermocouple.

I 3. The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-20 C'E
ISO ' "14001
MOt 1$0
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

3.1.151 Alarm1050>Ejector Limit Switch Check
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.152 Alarm1051>Air Ejector Limit Switch Check

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.153 Alarm1052>Air Core Limit Switch Check

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.154SYSAlarm1053>Nozzle Zone (T1 Zone) Actual Temperature Is Too High

To carry out the injection, the plastic ising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
nozzle zone (TI) temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the high tolerance, this
I
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are shorted
circuit (out of order)?
B) Measure the heater bands contact nodes whether they have a good grounding condition?
C) Please adjust the high tolerance value at the nozzle zone (TI) temperature.
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.155 SYSAlarm1054>2nd Zone Actual Temperature Is Too High

To carry out the injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
2nd zone (T2) temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the high tolerance, this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are shorted
circuit (out of order)?
B) Measure the heater bands contact nodes whether they have a good grounding condition?
C) Please adjust the high tolerance value at the 2nd zone (T2) temperature.
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?
I
3.1.156 SYSAlarm1055>3rd Zone Actual Temperature Is Too High
To carry out the injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
3rd zone (T3) temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the high tolerance, this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are shorted
circuit (out of order)?
B) Measure the heater bands contact nodes whether they have a good grounding condition?
C) Please adjust the high tolerance value at the 3rd zone (T3) temperature.
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.157 SYSAlarm1056>4th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too High

To carry out the injection, the plastic ising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
4th zone (T4) temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the high tolerance, this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are shorted
circuit (out of order)?
B) Measure the heater bands contact nodes whether they have a good grounding condition?
C) Please adjust the high tolerance value at the 4thzone (T4) temperature.
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.Tbe descriptions for the AJarm & Hinting Messages

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
3-21
9001 C 'E'
.so ',' . '14001
I'SO

I
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 3.1.158 SYSAlarm1057>5th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too High

To carry out the injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
5th zone (T5) temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the high tolerance, this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are shorted

I circuit (out of order)?

B) Measure the heater bands contact nodes whether they have a good grounding condition?
C) Please adjust the high tolerance value at the 5th zone (T5) temperature.
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.159 SYSAlarm1058>6th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too High

I To carry out the injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
6th zone (T6) temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the high tolerance, this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the movement at this time.

I [Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are shorted
circuit (out of order)?
B) Measure the heater bands contact nodes whether they have a good grounding condition?
I C) Please adjust the high tolerance value at the 6thzone (T6) temperature.
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

I 3.1.160 SYSAlarm1059>7th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too High

To carry out the injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
7th zone (T7) temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the high tolerance, this
I alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are shorted
I circuit (out of order)?
B) Measure the heater bands contact nodes whether they have a good grounding condition?
C) Please adjust the high tolerance value at the 7thzone (T7) temperature.
I D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.161 Alarm1060>8th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too High (Oils Temperature)

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.162 SYSAlarm1061>Slaver Nozzle Zone (T1 Zone) Actual Temperature Is Too High

I To carry out the DC series-slaver injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements
when the actual nozzle zone (T9) temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the
high tolerance, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the
I movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are shorted
I circuit (out of order)?
B) Measure the heater bands contact nodes whether they have a good grounding condition?
C) Please adjust the high tolerance value at the DC series-slaver nozzle zone (T9) temperature.
I D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?
3.1.163 SYSAlarm1062>SIaver 2nd Zone Actual Temperature Is Too High
To carry out the DC series-slaver injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements
I when the actual 2nd zone (Tl 0) temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the high
tolerance, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the
movement at this time.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-22 .SO C:E' 1'4001
$(lOt .....
UiO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

;CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are shorted
circuit (out of order)?
B) Measure the heater bands contact nodes whether they have a good grounding condition?
C) Please adjust the high tolerance value at the DC series-slaver 2nd zone (TIO) temperature.
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.164SYSAlarm1063>SIaver 3rd Zone Actual Temperature Is Too High

To carry out the DC series-slaver injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements
when the actual 3rd zone (TIl) temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the high
tolerance, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the
movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are shorted
circuit (out of order)?
B) Measure the heater bands contact nodes whether they have a good grounding condition?
C) Please adjust the high tolerance value at the DC series-slaver 3rd zone (TIl) temperature.
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.165 SYSAlarm1064>SIaver 4th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too High

To carry out the DC series-slaver injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements
when the actual 4th zone (TI2) temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the high
tolerance, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the
movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are shorted
circuit (out of order)?
I
B) Measure the heater bands contact nodes whether they have a good grounding condition?
C) Please adjust the high tolerance value at the DC series-slaver 4thzone (TI2) temperature.
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.166 SYSAlarm1065>SIaver 5th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too High

To carry out the DC series-slaver injection, the plastic ising and the melt decompression movements
when the actual 5thzone (T13) temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the high
tolerance, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the
movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are shorted
circuit (out of order)?
B) Measure the heater bands contact nodes whether they have a good grounding condition?
C) Please adjust the high tolerance value at the DC series-slaver 5thzone (T13) temperature.
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.167SYSAlarm1066>SIaver 6th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too High

To carry out the DC series-slaver injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements
when the actual 6th zone (TI4) temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the high
tolerance; this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the
movement at this time.

3. The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-23

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I ,CDC20ODWiN Operation Manual
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are shorted
circuit (out of order)?
B) Measure the heater bands contact nodes whether they have a good grounding condition?
C) Please adjust the high tolerance value at the DC series-slaver 6th zone (TI4) temperature.
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

I 3.1.168SYSAlarml067>Slaver7th Zone Actual Temperature Is Too High

To carry out the DC series-slaver injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements
when the actual 7th zone (TIS) temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the high
tolerance, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and impossible to do the
movement at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are shorted
circuit (out of order)?
B) Measure the heater bands contact nodes whether they have a good grounding condition?
C) Please adjust the high tolerance value at the DC series-slaver 7thzone (TIS) temperature.
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

I 3.1.169 Alarml 068>1 6th ZoneActual Temperature Is Too High (Cooling Water Jacket)
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.170Alarml069>Oils ReservoirActual Temperature Is Too High

When the actual oils reservoir temperature is higher than the setting value, this alarm message will ,
be appearing on the top screen.
I [Remedy]:
A) Check whether the cooling water supply system is working properly and clean the oils cooler?
B) Please detect or replace the oils reservoir thermocouple.
I 3.1.171Alarml070>Barrel Temperature Heating Did Not Switch ON
To carry out the i . the plasticising and the melt decompression movements, but the heating
I switch at is setting at OFF status, this alarm message will be appearing on the top
screen that it is impossible to actuate those movements at this time.
[Remedy]: To switch it the barrel temperature at Heating status.

3.1.172Alarml071>Cooling Water Jacket Temperature Is Too High

When the actual cooling water jacket temperature is higher than the setting value, this alarm
message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please check whether the cooling water supply system at the cooling water jacket is working
properly and clean the cooling water jacket?
B) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the cooling water jacket temperature are broken or
have a loosened condition?
I C) Please detect or replace the cooling water jacket thermocouple.

3.1.1 73 Alarml072>Accumulator Motor Is Overload

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.174SYSAlarml073>NozzleZone (Tl Zone) Heater Band Failure Detection

I When the nozzle zone (TI) temperature is at the Heating condition, but it could not gain the setting
temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and
shut-off machine at once.

I 3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-24 '$.0 .('E..
9OOt· 'S()
~4OG1
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally.
B) Check whether the fuse is burnt or not?
C) Measure whether the heater bands are damaged?
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.175SYSAlarml074>2ndZone Heater Band Failure Detection

When the 2nd zone (T2) temperature is at the heating condition, but it could not gain the setting
temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and
shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally.
B) Check whether the fuse is burnt or not?
C) Measure whether the heater bands are damaged?
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.176 SYSAlarml075>3rdZone Heater Band Failure Detection

When the 3rd zone (T3) temperature is at the heating condition, but it could not gain the setting
temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and
shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally.
B) Check whether the fuse is burnt or not?
C) Measure whether the heater bands are damaged?
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.177SYSAlarml076>4th Zone Heater Band Failure Detection

When the 4th zone (T4) temperature is at the heating condition, but it could not gain the setting
temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and
shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally.
B) Check whether the fuse is burnt or not?
C) Measure whether the heater bands are damaged?
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.178SYSAlarml077>5th Zone Heater Band Failure Detection

When the 5th zone (TS) temperature is at the heating condition, but it could not gain the setting
temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and
shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally.
B) Check whether the fuse is burnt or not?
C) Measure whether the heater bands are damaged?
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-25 C·,E·
'$0 ... ·~40i)1
MOf ISO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
3.1.179 SYSAlarm107B>6th Zone Heater Band Failure Detection
When the 6th zone (T6) temperature is at the heating condition, but it could not gain the setting
temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and
shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working

I normally.
B) Check whether the fuse is burnt or not?
C) Measure whether the heater bands are damaged?
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.1BOSYSAlarm1079>7th Zone Heater Band Failure Detection

I When the 7th zone (T7) temperature is at the heating condition, but it could not gain the setting
temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen and
shut-off machine at once.

I [Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally.

I B) Check whether the fuse is burnt or not?

C) Measure whether the heater bands are damaged?
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

I 3.1.1B1 SYSAlarm10BO>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.1B2 SYSAlarm10B1>Slaver Nozzle Zone (Tl Zone) Heater Band Failure Detection
When the DC series-slaver nozzle zone (T9) temperature is at the heating condition, but it could not
gain the setting temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top
I screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
I normally.
B) Check whether the fuse is burnt or not?
C) Measure whether the heater bands are damaged?
I D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.1B3 SYSAlarm10B2>Slaver 2nd Zone Heater Band Failure Detection

When the DC series-slaver 2nd zone (TIO) temperature is at the heating condition, but it could not
gain the setting temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top
screen and shut-off machine at once.
I [Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally.
I B) Check whether the fuse is burnt or not?
C) Measure whether the heater bands are damaged?
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.1B4 SYSAlarm1083>Slaver 3rd Zone Heater Band Failure Detection

I When the DC series-slaver 3rd zone (Tll) temperature is at the heating condition, but it could not
gain the setting temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top
screen and shut-off machine at once.

I 3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-26

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally.
B) Check whether the fuse is burnt or not?
C) Measure whether the heater bands are damaged?
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.1B5 SYSAlarm10B4>Slaver 4th Zone Heater Band Failure Detection

When the DC series-slaver 4th zone (TI2) temperature is at the heating condition, but it could not
gain the setting temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top
screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally.
B) Check whether the fuse is burnt or not?
C) Measure whether the heater bands are damaged?
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.1B6 SYSAlarm10B5>Slaver 5th Zone Heater Band Failure Detection

When the DC series-slaver 5th zone (T13) temperature is at the heating condition, but it could not
gain the setting temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top
screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally.
B) Check whether the fuse is burnt or not?
C) Measure whether the heater bands are damaged?
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.1B7 SYSAlarm10B6>Slaver 6th Zone Heater Band Failure Detection

When the DC series-slaver 6th zone (TI4) temperature is at the heating condition, but it could not
gain the setting temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top
screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally.
B) Check whether the fuse is burnt or not?
C) Measure whether the heater bands are damaged?
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?

3.1.1BB SYSAlarm10B7>Slaver 7th Zone Heater Band Failure Detection

When the DC series-slaver 7thzone (T 15) temperature is at the heating condition, but it could not
gain the setting temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top
screen and shut-off machine at once.
[Remedy]:
A) Please detect the magnetic contactor contact node & its function whether they are working
normally.
B) Check whether the fuse is burnt or not?
C) Measure whether the heater bands are damaged?
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?
3.1.1B9 Alarm10BB>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
3-27 ISO
9001
C·E ISO
. 141)0;1
I ,CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
3.1.190Alarm1089>DiscPlate Did Not Return To TheHome Position
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.191Alarm1090>Position Cylinder Did Not Inward To TheHome Position

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.192Alarm1091>Disc.Plate HasA Servo Motor Abnormal Alarm

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.193Alarm1092>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.194Alarm1093>ClampArea HasA Hydraulic Pedal Detection Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.195Alarm1094>ClampArea HasA Light Curtain Detection Abnormal

I When the safety guard is closed confirmation at the clamp mechanism, if it is detected the light
curtain abnormally at the clamping dangerous area at this time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please open the safety guard and make sure that there is no staff or the foreign objects over
there at the clamping dangerous area.
B) Please check the light curtain mechanism whether it is fastened or not?
I C) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the safety light curtain are broken or have a loosened
condition?

I 3.1.196Alarm1095>Position Cylinder Did Not Outward To TheHome Position

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.197Alarm1096>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.198Alarm1097>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.199Alarm1098>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.200Alarm1099>SlaverEjector Backward Stroke IsAbnormal

Under the auto modes, the DC series-slaver ejector backward did not fmish the motion within a
stroke-inspection time
I [Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the ejector backward parameters on the DC series-slaver Ejector
Setting menu properly.
I B) Please check the ejector position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened or not?
C) Please inspect the DC series-slaver ejector hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the DC series-slaver stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value

I properly.

3.1.201Alarmll00>Slaver Ejector Backward Is Abnormal Or Jitter In Action

The mold clamping is in action, the DC series-slaver ejector backward position is over the setting
value of the "Ejector Backward 3 (Back.End)".

I 3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-28 '.".0.. C·.E· 14001
90en .JS.~.·.:O
e-

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

[Remedy]:
a) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the DC series-slaver ejector position feedback
Devices are broken or have a loosened condition?
b) Please inspect the DC series-slaver ejector hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
c) Please check the DC series-slaver ejector position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened
or not?

3.1.202Alarm1101>Slaver Molds ejector Backward Did Not Return To The Home Position
The mold clamping is in action, the DC series-slaver molds ejector plate return confirmation signal
is abnormal.
[Remedy]:
A) Please check or replace the DC series-slaver molds ejector plate return devices function
whether it is working normally?
B) Please inspect the DC series-slaver molds ejector mechanism.
C) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the DC series-slaver moIds ejector plate feedback
devices are broken or have a loosened condition?

3.1.203Alarmll02>Slaver Ejector Forward Stroke Is Abnormal

Under the auto modes, the DC series-slaver ejector forward did not finish the movement within a
stroke-inspection time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the DC series-slaver ejector forward parameters on the Ejector
Setting Menu properly.
B) Please check the DC series-slaver molds ejector mechanism.
C) Please inspect the DC series-slaver ejector hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the DC series-slaver stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value
properly.

3.1.204Alarmll03>Slaver Ejector Backward Limit Switch Failure Inspection

Under the auto modes, the DC series-slaver ejector backward did not finish the motion within a
stroke-inspection time.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the proper parameters on the DC series-slaver Ejector Setting menu.
B) Please check the DC series-slaver ejector position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened
or Not?
C) Please inspect the DC series-slaver molds ejector mechanism.
D) Please detect both of the input signals at DC series-slaver ejector backward proximity switch
& DC series-slaver molds ejector plate return limit switch whether they are working properly?
E) Please inspect the DC series-slaver ejector hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
F) Please verify or modify the stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value on the DC
series-slaver Time Monitoring Menu properly.

3.1.205Alarmll 04>SlaverCarriage Forward Limit Switch Inspection

Under the auto modes, the DC series-slaver Carriage Forward did not inward to the locating
position within a stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the proper carriage forward parameters on the DC series-slaver
Carriage menu.
B) Please check whether the DC series-slaver carriage forward position feedback mechanism is
fastened certainly? if it is used to the Potentiometer, please check whether the DC series-slaver
carriage forward limit switch feedback mechanism is fastened certainly?
C) Inspect whether the DC series-slaver carriage forward hydraulic valve is working normally?

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-29

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I .CDC200owiN Operation Manual
D) Please detect whether the interrelated wirings of the DC series-slaver carriage forward are
broken or have a loosened condition?
E) Please verify or modify the carriage forward stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value on

I the DC series-slaver Carriage Setting menu properly.

3.1.206Alarmll05>Slaver NozzleOrifice Is Choke

I Under the auto modes, the actual slaver injection position did not reach the choke position within an
injection time.
[Remedy]:

I A) Check whether the slaver nozzle is clogged or not?

B) Inspect whether the salver nozzle temperature setting value is correct?
C) Detect whether the slaver nozzle heater band is heating normally?
D) Please change the slaver choke position with a reasonable value properly.
E) Please modify the slaver injection formation conditions or arise the barrel temperature setting
value.

3.1.207Alarmll06>Slaver Plasticising Capacity Is Insufficient Or Materials Leaking

Under the auto modes, an actual slaver injection position is smaller than the overfeed position
during the injection motion.
I
II
[Remedy]: After confirming the following conditions, please press down the Cancel key of

on the computer panel under the manual mode.

A) If the product is not become to the full saturation on the molds, please increase the plasticising
position on the slaver Plasticising / Decompression Setting menu.
I B) If it has a leaking situation, please inspect whether the slaver carriage forward proximity
switch is in place and readjust the slaver holding-pressure setting on the slaver Injection
Setting menu.
I C) If the overfeed position is setting too big on the slaver Injection Setting menu, please reduce
the setting value.
D) Please check whether the slaver nozzle touching sphere angle is suitable or not?
I 3.1.208Alarmll07>Slaver No Material Or Hopper Choke
Under the auto modes, the slaver plasticising time is over than the cooling time.
I [Remedy]:
A) Inspect whether the slaver capacity of the material hopper is sufficient?
B) Check whether the slaver barrel feeding throat or the hopper is clogged or not?
I C) Please adjust an appropriate slaver plasticising D/A settings.
D) Please adjust the slaver cooling time.

I 3.1.209Alarmll08>Slaver ColdStart Self-hierarchical Protection Is In Action

The DC series-slaver barrel temperature is not reaching to the setting or the screw protection time in
booting the barrel heating is not completely counting yet, the alarm message will be appearing on
I the top screen if pressing down the following buttons among of the (1) Injection button (2)
Plasticising button & (3) Melt Decompression button.

I
[Remedy]:

A) Under the manual mode, just to press down the Cancel key of II on the computer

I B)
panel.
Waiting the barrel temperature heating up to the setting and the screw protection time counting
fmish.

I 3.Tbe descriptions for tbe Alarm & Hinting Messages

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
3-30

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

3.1.210Alarmll09>Position Cylinder Limit Switch IsAbnormal
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.211Alarmll10>Position Cylinder Inward Stroke Is Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.212Alarmll11>Position Cylinder Outward Stroke Is Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer. I
3.1.213Alarml112>Disc Plate Stroke Is Abnormal
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.214Alarml113>High-pressure Cylinder Is Over Stroke

The high-pressure cylinder pre-fill motion is over the stroke, this alarm message will be appearing
on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please check the high-pressure cylinder stroke feedback mechanism whether it is fastened or
not?
B) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the high-pressure cylinder stroke feedback mechanism
are broken or have a loosened condition?
C) Please repeat the procedures of the mold thickness adjustment.

3.1.215Alarml114>Robot Enable Core lin Signal IsAbnormal

If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, the Core 1 In is in action but the robot enable Core 1 In is
getting at OFF status, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]: Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the robot enable Core 1 In are broken or have
a loosened condition?

3.1.216Alarml115>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.217Alarm1116>Robot Enable CorelOut Signal IsAbnormal

Ifthe ancillary robot devices are on-line, the Core lOut is in action but the robot enable Core lOut
is getting at OFF status, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]: Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the robot enable Core lOut are broken or
have a loosened condition?

3.1.218Alarml117>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.219Alarm1118>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.220Alarml119>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.221Alarm1120>Pneumatic Operated Guard Crashprooj Devices Is In Action

The pneumatic operated guard close is in action, the safety crashproof devices is abnormal, and this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please priority inspect whether there is any staff or the foreign objects at the safety guard close
area?
B) Please press down the pneumatic emergency stop pushbutton to cancel the motion.

3.Tbe descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-31 ,so CE··. I~O
toOt·· ..·14001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I •
CDC2000WIN Operation Manual
C) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the pneumatic operated guard are broken or have a
loosened condition?

I 3.1.222 Alarm1l21>Pneumatic
Please contact with the manufacturer.
Emergency Stop Button Is In Action

I 3.1.223 Alarm1122>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.224 Alarm1l23>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
3.1.225 Alarm1l24>Robot Enable Core 2 In Signal Is Abnormal
If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, the Core 2 In is in action but the robot enable Core 2 In is
getting at OFF status, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]: Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the robot enable Core 2 In are broken or have
a loosened condition?

3.1.226 Alarm1l25>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.227 Alarm1l26>Robot Enable Core 2 Out Signal Is Abnormal

I If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, the Core 2 Out is in action but the robot enable Core 2 Out
is getting at OFF status, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]: Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the robot enable Core 2 Out are broken or
have a loosened condition?

3.1.228 Alarm1l27>SPARE

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.229 Alarm1l28>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
I 3.1.230 Alarm1129>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.231 Alarm1130>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.232 Alarm1131>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.233 Alarm1l32>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.234 Alarm1133>SPARE
I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.235 Alarm1l34>SPARE
I Please contact with the manufacturer.
3.1.236 Alarm1135>SPARE

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.237 Alarm1l36>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-32

900. CE..
ISO . .. ··1'4001
150
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

;CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

3.1.238 Alarm1137>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.239 Alarm1138>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.240 Alarm1l39>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
3.1.241 Alarm1140>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
3.1.242 Alarm1l41>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.243 Alarm1142>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.244Alarm1143>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.245 Alarm1144>SPARE I
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.246 Alarm1l45>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.247 Alarml146>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
3.1.248 Alarm1l47>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.249 Alarmll48>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.250 Alarm1l49>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.251 Alarml150>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
3.1.252 Alarm1l51>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.253 Alarm1152>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.254 Alarm1l53>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.255 Alarm1l54>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
3.1.256 Alarm1155>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
3-33 ,$0 ·C· E···1·'.$0
toOt. . 4001
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 3.1.257Alarm1156>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.258Alarm1157>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.259Alarml158>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.260Alarm1159>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.261Alarml160>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.262Alarml161>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.263Alarm1162>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.264Alarm1163>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.265Alarml164>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.266Alarml165>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.267Alarml166>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.268Alarm1167>SPARE

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.269Alarm1168>SPARE

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.270Alarm1169>SPARE

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.271Alarm1170>Slaver Carriage Backward Failure Inspection

Please contact with the manufacturer.
I 3.1.272Alarml171>lnverter Motor 1Motion IsAbnormal
Please contact with the manufacturer.
I 3.1.273Alarm1172>lnverter Motor 2 Motion IsAbnormal
Please contact with the manufacturer.
I 3.1.274Alarm1173>lnverter Motor 3 Motion IsAbnormal
Please contact with the manufacturer.
I 3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-34 .so C·,E••..1..v01
9001··
~~.·.o
...
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

;CDC20'ODWiN Operation Manual

3.1.275Alarml174>lnverter Motor 4 Motion Is Abnormal
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.276 Alarm1175>lnverter Motor 5 Motion IsAbnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.277Alarm1176>lnverter Motor 6 Motion IsAbnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.278 Alarml177>lnverter Motor 7 Motion Is Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.279Alarm1178>lnverter Motor 8Motion Is Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.280Alarm1179>lnverter Motor 9 Motion Is Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.281Alarml180>lnverter Motor 10 Motion Is Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.282Alarm1181>lnverter Motor 11 Motion Is Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.283Alarm1182>lnverter Motor 12 Motion Is Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.284 Alarm1183>lnverter Motor 13 Motion Is Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.285Alarm1184>lnverter Motor 14 Motion Is Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.286 Alarm1185>lnverter Motor 15 Motion Is Abnormal

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.287Alarm1186>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.288Alarml187>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.289Alarml188>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.290Alarml189>Unscrew lin Stroke Failure Inspection

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.291Alarm1190>Unscrew 2 In Stroke Failure Inspection

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-35

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I ,CDC200QwiN Operation Manual
3.1.292Alarm1191>Corelin Stroke Failure Inspection
The lIfgl1lr~ililiD at Core 1 In is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time. function ~ill be
converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 1 In did not finish the

I motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the Core 1 In parameters on the menu (132) Core 1-4 Pulling Setting

I properly.
B) Please check the Core 1 In position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 1 In are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 1 In hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the Core 1 In stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value properly.

I 3.1.293 Alarm1192>Core21n Stroke Failure Inspection

The 11I1.~iJliI at Core 2 In is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be

I converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 2 In did not fmish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:

I A) Please look up and adjust the Core 2 In parameters on the menu (132) Core 1-4 Pulling Setting
properly.
B) Please check the Core 2 In position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 2 In are broken or have a loosened
I condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 2 In hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the Core 2 In stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value properly.
I 3.1.294Alarm1193>Core31n Stroke Failure Inspection
The !liit!t[~~ilfldql at Core 3 In is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be
I converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 3 In did not finish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the Core 3 In parameters on the menu (132) Core 1-4 Pulling Setting
properly.
B) Please check the Core 3 In position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
I detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 3 In are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 3 In hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
I D) Please verify or modify the Core 3 In stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value properly.

3.1.295Alarm1194>Core4 In Stroke Failure Inspection

I The ~Jlw:~~IIiD at Core 4 In is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be
converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 4 In did not finish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the Core 4 In parameters on the menu (132) Core 1-4 Pulling Setting
properly.
I B) Please check the Core 4 In position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 4 In are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 4 In hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the Core 4 In stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value properly.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-36 '.50
900..
C· E.· 14001
l59
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

,CDC200owiN Operation Manual

3.1.296Alarm1195>Core5 In Stroke Failure Inspection
The ~,~~ at Core 5 In is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be
converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 5 In did not fmish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the Core 5 In parameters on the menu (135) Core 5-8 Pulling Setting
properly.
B) Please check the Core 5 In position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 5 In are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 5 In hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the Core 5 In stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value properly.

3.1.297Alarm1196>Core 6 In Stroke Failure Inspection

The l.~iIIlemJJ at Core 6 In is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be
converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 6 In did not finish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the Core 6 In parameters on the menu (135) Core 5-8 Pulling Setting
properly.
B) Please check the Core 6 In position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 6 In are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 6 In hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the Core 6 In stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value properly.

3.1.298Alarm1197>Core 71n Stroke Failure Inspection

The iiIl~~~lW~¢~ at Core 7 In is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be
converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 7 In did not fmish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the Core 7 In parameters on the menu (135) Core 5-8 Pulling Setting
properly.
B) Please check the Core 7 In position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 7 In are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 7 In hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the Core 7 In stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value properly.

3.1.299Alarm1198>Core8 In Stroke Failure Inspection

The [~.mgjl§slIi. at Core 8 In is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be
converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 7 In did not fmish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the Core 8 In parameters on the menu (135) Core 5-8 Pulling Setting
properly,
B) Please check the Core 8 In position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 8 In are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 8 In hydraulic valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the Core 8 In stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value properly.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages

August 27, 2010 Re\'ision:2.0
3-37 "0
9001··. CE·
.I$Q
14001
I CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

I 3.1.300Alarml199>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.301Alarm1200>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.302Alarm1201>Core1Pulling Limit Switch Inspection

The l~lISilfS§ln at Core 1 In & Core lOut are selected by "Limit Switch", if both of the
Core 1 In & Core 1 Out limit switches are getting at ON statuses simultaneously, this alarm
message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]: Please check both of the Core 1 In & Core 1 Out position feedback mechanisms whether
they are fastened certainly and detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 1 In &

I Core lOut are broken or have a loosened condition?

3.1.303Alarm1202>Core2 Pulling Limit Switch Inspection

iiBlI~ltiI~ at Core 2 In & Core 2 Out are selected by "Limit Switch", if both of the
I The
Core 2 In & Core 2 Out limit switches are getting at ON statuses simultaneously, this alarm
message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]: Please check both of the Core 2 In & Core 2 Out position feedback mechanisms whether
they are fastened certainly and detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 2 In &
Core 2 Out are broken or have a loosened condition?

I 3.1.304Alarm1203>Core3 Pulling Limit Switch Inspection

The If~~ai~tm at Core 3 In & Core 3 Out are selected by "Limit Switch", if both of the
Core 3 In & Core 3 Out limit switches are getting at ON statuses simultaneously, this alarm
I message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]: Please check both of the Core 3 In & Core 3 Out position feedback mechanisms whether
they are fastened certainly and detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 3 In &
Core 3 Out are broken or have a loosened condition?

3.1.305Alarm1204>Core4 Pulling Limit Switch Inspection

I The Elll~~II~1i'_ at Core 4 In & Core 4 Out are selected by "Limit Switch", if both of the
Core 4 In & Core 4 Out limit switches are getting at ON statuses simultaneously, this alarm
message will be appearing on the top screen.
I [Remedy]: Please check both of the Core 4 In & Core 4 Out position feedback mechanisms whether
they are fastened certainly and detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 4 In &
Core 4 Out are broken or have a loosened condition?

3.1.306Alarm1205>Core5 Pulling Limit Switch Inspection

The !I~(~'if!cm at Core 5 In & Core 5 Out are selected by "Limit Switch", if both of the
I Core 5 In & Core 5 Out limit switches are getting at ON statuses simultaneously, this alarm
message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]: Please check both of the Core 5 In & Core 5 Out position feedback mechanisms whether
I they are fastened certainly and detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 5 In &
Core 5 Out are broken or have a loosened condition?
3.1.307Alarm1206>Core6 Pulling Limit Switch Inspection
I The fi)l'111tIl~~~ at Core 6 In & Core 6 Out are selected by "Limit Switch", if both of the
Core 6 In & Core 6 Out limit switches are getting at ON statuses simultaneously, this alarm
message will be appearing on the top screen.
I [Remedy]: Please check both of the Core 6 In & Core 6 Out position feedback mechanisms whether
they are fastened certainly and detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 6 In &
Core 6 Out are broken or have a loosened condition?

3.The descriptions for the AJarm & Hinting Messages 3-38 .ao ..
MOt CE..140Ct1
.180
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

3.1.308Alarm1207>Core 7 Pulling Limit Switch Inspection
The £1I'~1grss~~~p'Ji.qat Core 7 In & Core 7 Out are selected by "Limit Switch", if both of the
Core 7 In & Core 7 Out limit switches are getting at ON statuses simultaneously, this alarm
message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]: Please check both of the Core 7 In & Core 7 Out position feedback mechanisms whether
they are fastened certainly and detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 7 In &
Core 7 Out are broken or have a loosened condition?

3.1.309Alarm1208>Core8 Pulling Limit Switch Inspection

The litalla_ at Core 8 In and the Core 8 Out are selected by "Limit Switch", if both of
the Core 8 In and the Core 8 Out limit switches are getting at ON statuses simultaneously, this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]: Please check both of the Core 8 In and the Core 8 Out position feedback mechanisms
whether they are fastened certainly and detect whether the interrelated wirings of the
Core 8 In and the Core 8 Out are broken or have a loosened condition?

3.1.310Alarm1209>Unscrew 1Out Stroke Foilure Inspection

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.311Alarm1210>Unscrew 2 Out Stroke Failure Inspection

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.312Alarm121l>Core 1Out Stroke Failure Inspection

The .. at Core lOut is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be
converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 1 Out did not finish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the Core 1 Out parameters on the menu (132) Core 1-4 Pulling
Setting properly.
B) Please check the Core 1 Out position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core lOut are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core lOut Hydraulic Valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the Core lOut stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value
properly.

3.1.313Alarm1212>Core2 Out Stroke Failure Inspection

The ~~~ at Core 2 Out is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be
converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 2 Out did not finish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the Core 2 Out parameters on the menu (132) Core 1-4 Pulling
Setting properly.
B) Please check the Core 2 Out position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 2 Out are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 2 Out Hydraulic Valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the Core 2 Out stroke-inspection time properly.
3.1.314 Alarm1213>Core3 Out Stroke Failure Inspection
The ~.£I~~' at Core 3 Out is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be
converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 3 Out did not finish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
3-39 ,.0
9OOf.
C.· .•.·E·· .. J:$O.
14001
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I [Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the Core 3 Out parameters on the menu (132) Core 1-4 Pulling
Setting properly.

I B) Please check the Core 3 Out position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 3 Out are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 3 Out Hydraulic Valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the Core 3 Out stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value
properly.

3.1.315Alarm1214>Core4 Out Stroke Failure Inspection

The ... . .. at Core 4 Out is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be

I convertil1g into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 4 Out did not finish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:

I A) Please look up and adjust the Core 4 Out parameters on the menu (132) Core 1-4 Pulling
Setting properly.
B) Please check the Core 4 Out position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 4 Out are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 4 Out Hydraulic Valve whether it is working normally?

I D) Please verify or modify the Core 4 Out stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value
properly.

I 3.1.316Alarm1215>Core5 Out Stroke Failure Inspection

The m:.-_mrtil1 at Core 5 Out is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be
converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 5 Out did not fmish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
I [Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the Core 5 Out parameters on the menu (135) Core 5-8 Pulling
Setting properly.
B) Please check the Core 5 Out position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 5 Out are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 5 Out Hydraulic Valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the Core 5 Out stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value
properly.
I 3.1.317Alarm1216>Core6 Out Stroke Failure Inspection
The ..•.•. at Core 6 Out is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be
converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 6 Out did not finish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
I A) Please look up and adjust the Core 6 Out parameters on the menu (135) Core 5-8 Pulling
Setting properly.
B) Please check the Core 6 Out position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
I detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 6 Out are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 6 Out Hydraulic Valve whether it is working normally?
I D) Please verify or modify the Core 6 Out stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value
properly.

I 3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-40

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

.CDC200owiN Operation Manual

3.1.318Alarm1217>Core 7 Out Stroke Failure Inspection
The ~~g at Core 7 Out is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be
converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 7 Out did not finish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the Core 7 Out parameters on the menu (135) Core 5-8 Pulling
Setting properly.
B) Please check the Core 7 Out position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 7 Out are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 7 Out Hydraulic Valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the Core 7 Out stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value
properly.

3.1.319Alarm1218>Core8'Out Stroke Failure Inspection

The ~§i1lEllttB at Core 8 Out is selected by "Limit Switch", its action time function will be
converting into a stroke-inspection time purpose at that time. If the Core 8 Out did not fmish the
motion within this stroke-inspection time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]:
A) Please look up and adjust the Core 8 Out parameters on the menu (135) Core 5-8 Pulling
Setting properly.
B) Please check the Core 8 Out position feedback mechanism whether it is fastened certainly and
detect whether the interrelated wirings of the Core 8 Out are broken or have a loosened
condition?
C) Please inspect the Core 8 Out Hydraulic Valve whether it is working normally?
D) Please verify or modify the Core 8 Out stroke-inspection time with a reasonable value
properly.

3.1.320Alarm1219>Has To CloseTheCore Option While Doing TheModal ThicknessAdjustment

When switchover to the Modal Thickness Adjustment menu, but it is used to the core options, this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]: Please inspect the current molds core position conditions and switch at OFF status if the
position is normal and not need to use the core pulling function at that time, otherwise, it shall not
carry out the mold thickness adjustment motion.

3.1.321Alarm1220>Heater Band Failure Detection

When those IMM heater bands are at the Heating condition, but it could not gain the setting
temperature within a constant time, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen that it is
shown as the grand alarm message.

3.1.322Alarm1221>Barrel Temperature Thermocouple Is Broken

When those IMM thermocouples have a broken situation, this alarm message will be appearing on
the top screen that it is shown as the grand alarm message.

3.1.323Alarm1222>Actual Barrel Temperature Is Too High

To carry out the injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
IMM barrel temperature is higher than the computer setting value plus the high tolerance, this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen that it is impossible to do those movements and
it is shown as the grand alarm message.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
3-41
toOl· CE
ISO .. ·14001
ISO
I CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 3.1.324Alarm1223>Actual Barrel Temperature Is Tao Low

To carry out the injection, the plasticising and the melt decompression movements when the actual
IMM barrel temperature is lower than the computer setting value minus the low tolerance, this

I alarm message will be appearing on the top screen that it is impossible to do those movements and
it is shown as the grand alarm message.

I 3.1.325 Alarm1224>Front Insulation Plate Safety Guard Is Not Close Yet

Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.326 Alarm1225>Rear Insulation Plate Safety Guard Is Not Close Yet

Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.327 Alarm1226>Hydraulic
Please contact with the manufacturer.
Fluid Oils Level Is Too Low

I 3.1.328 Alarm1227>Injection
Please contact with the manufacturer.
Safety Guard Is Not Close Yet

I
3.1.329 Alarm1228>Rear Safety Guord Limit Switch Failure Inspection
It is detected the 2-set of the limit switches interlocking hierarchy abnormally with an inspection
time when closing the rear safety guard, please reopen the rear safety guard to cancel the alarm
message just so.
A) Please inspect the rear safety guard mechanism whether it has the loosened phenomenon?
B) Check whether the input signal of the rear safety guard is getting at ON status?
C) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the rear safety guard are shorted circuit or have a
I loosened condition?

3.1.330 Alarm1229>Front Safety Guard Limit Switch Foilure Inspection SPARE

I It is detected the 2-set of the limit switches interlocking hierarchy abnormally with an inspection
time when closing the front safety guard, please reopen the rear safety guard to cancel the alarm
message just so.
I A) Please inspect the front safety guard mechanism whether it has the loosened phenomenon?
B) Check whether the input signal of the front safety guard is getting at ON status?
C) Detect whether the interrelated wirings of the front safety guard are shorted circuit or have a
loosened condition?

3.1.331 Alarm1230>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.332 Alarm1231>SPARE

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.333 Alarm1232>SPARE

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.334 Alarm1233>SPARE

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.335 Alarm1234>SPARE

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.336 Alarm1235>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
I 3. The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-42
August 27, 2010 Rel'ision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

3.1.337 Alarm1236>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.338 Alorm1237>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.339 Alarm1238>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.340 Alarm1239>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.341 Alarm1240>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.342 Alarm1241>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.343 Alarm1242>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.344 Alarm1243>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer. I
3.1.345 Alarm1244>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.346 Alarm1245>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.347 Alarm1246>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
I
3.1.348 Alarm1247>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.349 Alarm1248>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.350 Alarm1249>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.351 Alarm1250>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.352 Alarm1251>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
3.1.353 Alarm1252>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
3.1.354 Alarm1253>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-43

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 3.1.355 Aiarm12S4>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.356 Aiarm1255>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.357 Aiarm1256>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.358 Alarm1257>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.359 Alarm1258>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.360 Alarm1259>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.361 Alarm1260>SPARE
I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.362 Alarm1261>SPARE
I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.363 Alarm1262>SPARE
I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.364 Alarm1263>SPARE

I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.365 Aiarm1264>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.366 Alarm1265>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.367 Alarm1266>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.368 Alarm1267>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

I 3.1.369 Alarm1268>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.370 Alarm1269>SPARE
I Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.371 Alarm1270>Hot Runner 1st-Group Thermocouple Is Broken

I The hot runner 1st group thermocouples have a broken situation.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the hot runner I st group thermocouples whether they are damaged?

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-44 $.0
..•
· (. E...II.S'.'0 '.'
MOt· .: 14001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

~CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

3.1.372 Alarm1271>Hot Runner 2nd-Group Thermocouple Is Broken
The hot runner 2nd group thermocouples have a broken situation.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the hot runner 2ndgroup thermocouples whether they are damaged?

3.1.373 Alarm1272>Hot Runner 3rd-Group Thermocouple Is Broken

The hot runner 3rd group thermocouples have a broken situation.
[Remedy]: Please detect or replace the hot runner 3rd group thermocouples whether they are damaged?

3.1.374Alarm1273>Plasticising Dosage Is Not Complete Yet

If the plasticising stroke is not reaching to the ending position when selecting the auto modes, this
alarm message will be appearing on the top screen that it is impossible to run the auto modes.
[Remedy]: Please switchover to the manual mode to cancel the alarm message just so, then to press

down the manual Plasticising button of I I

<1\\i\\\I!J
~
until reaching to the plasticising

ending position.

3.1.375 Alarm1274>Slaver Plasticising Dosage Is Not Complete Yet

If the slaver plasticising stroke is not reaching to the ending position when selecting the auto modes,
this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen that it is impossible to run the auto modes.
[Remedy]: Please switchover to the manual mode to cancel the alarm message just so, then to press

down the manual Plasticising button of [~ I until reaching to the salver

plastic ising ending position.

3.1.376Aiarm1275>iChen Product Count Setup Is Not Select Work Yet

Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.377 Alarm1276>SPARE
Please contact with the manufacturer.
3.1.378 Alarm1277>Lower Oils Temperature Gain Heater Pre-heating In Action
Please contact with the manufacturer.

3.1.379 Alarm1278>Motor START But Not RUN Yet

The pump motor is START in action but not finish RUN yet that this alarm message will be
automatically disappearing until waiting to run the pump motor normally.

3.1.380Alarm1279>Synchronous Motion Has A Wrong Parameter Setting

The synchronous function is selected, it is under the same set of the proportional control in the
hydraulic system, but provides for the multi-set of the synchronous motions selection in use at the
same time.
[Remedy]: Please inspect the synchronous motions selection.

3.1.381 Alarm1280>Lower Oils Temperature Gain Pump Pre-heating In Action

The current oils reservoir temperature is too low, just to perform the pump pre-heat hierarchy that
this alarm message will be automatically disappearing after fmishing the pre-heat.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-45

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I CDC20DOWiN Operation Manual

I 3.1.382Alarm1281>Hydraulic Fluid Oils Temperature Is TooLow

The current oils reservoir temperature is too low; this alarm message will be appearing on the top
screen.

I [Remedy]: Please carry out the pump pre-heat hierarchy.

3.1.383Alarm1282>Motor RUNConfirm Signal IsAbnormal

I After the pump motor RUN fmish then the motor RUN normal feedback signal disappeared.

3.1.384Alarm1283>Sl Linear Calibration 0/ A Output

I The system is carrying out the speed linear 1 calibration subtitle display.

3.1.385Alarm1284>S2Linear Calibration 0/A Output

I The system is carrying out the speed linear 2 calibration subtitle display.

3.1.386Alarm1285>S3Linear Calibration 0/A Output

I The system is carrying out the speed linear 3 calibration subtitle display.

3.1.387Alarm1286>S4Linear Calibration O/A Output

The system is carrying out the speed linear 4 calibration subtitle display.
I 3.1.388Alarm1287>S5Linear Calibration 0/A Output
The system is carrying out the speed linear 5 calibration subtitle display.
I 3.1.389Alarm1288>S6Linear Calibration O/A Output
The system is carrying out the speed linear 6 calibration subtitle display.

3.1.390Alarm1289>S7Linear Calibration 0/A Output

The system is carrying out the speed linear 7 calibration subtitle display.

3.1.391Alarm1290>S8Linear Calibration 0/A Output

The system is carrying out the speed linear 8 calibration subtitle display.
I 3.1.392Alarm1291>IS1Linear Calibration 0/A Output
The system is carrying out the injection speed linear 1 calibration subtitle display.
I 3.1.393Alarm1292>IS2Linear Calibration 0/ A Output
The system is carrying out the injection speed linear 2 calibration subtitle display.

3.1.394Alarm1293>P1 Linear Calibration O/A Output

The system is carrying out the pressure linear 1 calibration subtitle display.
I 3.1.395Alarm1294>P2 Linear Calibration O/A Output
The system is carrying out the pressure linear 2 calibration subtitle display.
I 3.1.396Alarm1295>P3Linear Calibration 0/A Output
The system is carrying out the pressure linear 3 calibration subtitle display.
I 3.1.397Alarm1296>B1 Linear Calibration O/A Output
The system is carrying out the plasticising back-pressure linear 1 calibration subtitle display.
I 3.1.398Alarm1297>B2 Linear Calibration 0/A Output
The system is carrying out the plasticising back-pressure linear 2 calibration subtitle display.
I 3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-46
August 27, 2010 Re\'ision:2.0

CDC200QwiN Operation Manual

3.1.399Alarm1298>RPM1 Linear Calibration 0/A Output
The system is carrying out the plasticising RPM linearl calibration subtitle display.

3.1.400Alarm1299>RPM2 Linear Calibration 0/A Output

The system is carrying out the plasticising RPM linear 2 calibration subtitle display.

3.2 Multi-point Temperature Control Unit Alarm Messages

3.2.1 ModalCtrl Communication Interruption

The communication is interrupted between the CDC2000WIN controller and the "Multi-point
Temperature Control Unit".
[Remedy]:
A) Detect whether the IPCP of the "MUlti-point Temperature Control Unit" is correct?
B) Detect whether the interrelated wirings are shorted circuit or have a loosened condition?

3.2.2 ModalCtrl ## Actual Temperature Is Too High

When the actual ## zone temperature of the "MUlti-point Temperature Control Unit" is higher than
the computer setting value plus the high tolerance at CH## zone, this message will be appearing on
the top screen.
[Remedy]: The mark of"##" is represented the present mold temperature zone in everywhere.
A) Please detect the heating output device (contactor or SSR) of this zone whether the contact
point is shorted circuit or out of order.
B) To measure those contact nodes of the heater bars at this zone whether they have a good
grounding condition?
C) Check whether the mold heating output device & the thermocouple input terminal are used to
the same temperature zone?
D) Please adjust the high tolerance at this zone (CH##) temperature.

3.2.3 ModalCtrl ## Actual Temperature Is Too Low

When the actual ## zone temperature of the "Multi-point Temperature Control Unit" is lower than
the computer setting value minus the low tolerance at CH## zone, this message will be appearing
on the top screen.
A) Please detect the heating output device (contactor or SSR) function whether it is normal?
B) To measure the heater bars whether they are damaged?
C) Detect whether those wirings of the power heating output are broken or have a loosened
condition?
D) Please detect the thermocouple whether it is shorted circuit or has an abnormal situation?
E) Please adjust the low tolerance at CH## zone temperature.
3.2.4 ModalCtrl ## Thermocouple Is Broken
When the ## zone thermocouple of the "MUlti-point Temperature Control Unit" is broken, this
message will be appearing on the top screen.
[Remedy]: Please detect and replace the ## zone thermocouple of the "Multi-point Temperature
Control Unit" whether had been damaged?

3.3 Descriptions of the Hinting Messages

3.3.1 Message1300>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.2 Message1301>OiscPlate Stroke Is Completed

When the DC series Disc Plate motion is completed, the computer will be appearing this hinting
message on the top screen.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
3-47
"0 CE
9001·.. 'SO
i~1
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual
3.3.3 Message1302>PositionCylinder Inward Stroke Is Completed
When the DC series Position Cylinder Inward is completed, the computer will be appearing this
hinting message on the top screen.

3.3.4 Message1303>PositionCylinder Outward Stroke Is Completed

When the DC series Position Cylinder Outward is completed, the computer will be appearing this

I hinting message on the top screen.

3.3.5 Message1304>MoldClampStroke Is Completed

I Under the manual mode, just to display the hinting message if the mold clamping movement is

reaching to the ending position by pressing down the manual Mold Clamp button of [ ~ ].
I
I 3.3.6 Message1305>MoldOpen Stroke Is Completed
Under the manual mode, just to display the hinting message if the mold opening movement is

reaching to the ending position by pressing down the manual Mold Open button of [ ~~ ].

I 3.3.7 Message1306>EjectorForward Stroke Is Completed

I
Under the manual mode, just to display the hinting message if the ejector forward movement is

I reaching to the ending position by pressing down the manual Ejector Forward button of [ ~
r::::::::>
I 3.3.8 Message1307>EjectorBackward Stroke Is Completed
Under the manual mode, just to display the hinting message if the ejector backward movement is

I reaching to the ending position by pressing down the manual Ejector Backward button of [ ~ ]

I 3.3.9 Message1308>PlasticisingStroke Is Completed

Under the manual mode, just to display the hinting message if the PlastiCi'j~ii;rrt is reaching
I to the ending position by pressing down the manual Plastic ising button of ~

3.3.10 Message1309>Melt DecompressionStroke Is Completed

reachingto the ending position by pressing down the manual Melt Decompression button of

3.3.11 Message1310>SlaverEjector Forward Stroke Is Completed

I~~I·
Under the manual mode, just to display the hinting message if the melt decompression movement is

It is a hinting message display.

3.3.12 Message1311>SlaverEjector Backward Stroke Is Completed

It is a hinting message display.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-48

lOOt C'E 14-(}01
ISO ... '$0
August 27,2010 Revision:2.0

CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

3.3.13 Message1312>SlaverPlasticising Stroke Is Completed
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.14 Message1313>SlaverMelt DecompressionStroke Is Completed

It is a hinting message display.

3.3.15 Message1314>AutoPurge Is In Action

When carrying out the "Auto Purge" foe changing color sequences by the operator under the
manual mode, the computer will be appearing this hinting message on the top screen.

3.3.16 Message1315>SlaverAuto Purge Is In Action

It is a hinting message display.

3.3.17 Message1316>PleaseRestart Safety Guard Hierarchy Under Semi-auto Mode

After finishing one cycle under the semi-auto mode, the computer is waiting the operator to open
the front safety guard for taking out the products, then to close it once time, this hinting message
will be appearing on the top screen.

3.3.18 Message1317>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.19 Message1318>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.20 Message1319>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.21 Message1320>Waiting Robot Enable Ejector Forward Signal

If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, the IMM is waiting the robot enable ejector forward
signal for performing the ejector forward motion; this alarm message will be appearing on the top
screen.

3.3.22 Message1321>Waiting Robot Enable Ejector Backward Signal

If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, the IMM is waiting the robot enable ejector backward signal
for performing the ejector backward motion; this alarm message will be appearing on the top
screen.

3.3.23 Message1322>Waiting Robot Enable Corelin Signal

If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, the IMM is waiting the Robot Enable Core 1 In signal for
performing the Core 1 In motion, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.

3.3.24 Message1323>Waiting Robot Enable CorelOut Signal

If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, the IMM is waiting the Robot Enable Core lOut signal
for performing the Core lOut motion, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.

3.3.25 Message1324>Waiting Robot Enable Core2 In Signal

If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, the IMM is waiting the Robot Enable Core 2 In signal for
performing the Core 2 In motion, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.

3.3.26 Message1325>Waiting Robot Enable Core2 Out Signal

If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, the IMM is waiting the Robot Enable Core 2 Out signal
for performing the Core 2 Out motion, this alarm message will be appearing on the top screen.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
3-49 C·E
tso . ·14~1
1001·· ISO
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 3.3.27 Message1326>Waiting Far Robot Devices Return To The Hame Pasition

If the ancillary robot devices are on-line, the IMM is waiting the robot return signal; the computer
will be appearing this hinting message on the top screen.

3.3.28 Message1327>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.29 Message1328>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.30 Message1329>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.31 Message1330>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.32 Message1331>Waiting For An External Cantrol Ejector Backward Signal

It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.33 Message1332>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.34 Message1333>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.35 Message1334>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.36 Message1335>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.37 Message1336>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.38 Message1337>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.39 Message1338>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.40 Message1339>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.41 Message1340>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.42 Message1341>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.43 Message1342>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.The descriptions for the Alarm

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
& Hinting Messages 3-50 .C'E. 1;4t).(f1
' •. 0.· .
toOt ..I'S.0
I

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

3.3.44 Messagel343>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.45 Messagel344>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.46 Message1345>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.47 Message1346>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.48 Message1347>SPARE
It is a hinting message display. I
3.3.49 Message1348>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.50 Message1349>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.51 Message1350>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.52 Message1351>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.53 Message1352>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.54 Message1353>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.55 Message13S4>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.56 Message1355>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.57 Message1356>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.58 Message1357>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.59 Message1358>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.
3.3.60 Message1359>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.
3.3.61 Message1360>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-51

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I
,JI~ ,CDC200DWiN Operation Manual

I 3.3.62 Message1361>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.63 Message1362>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.64 Message1363>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.65 Message1364>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.66 Message1365>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.67 Message1366>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.68 Message1367>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.69 Message1368>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.70 Message1369>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.71 Message1370>PleasePressDown Mold Open Key Till End

It is a hinting message display.

3.3.72 Message1371>PleaseUnload Mold ThenReset Clamp To Zero

I!l
If it is carrying out the clamp mechanism reset motion for the hydraulic clamping series machine, it

will be appearing this message by pressing down the Enter key of for resetting the home

position at first time.

3.3.73 Message1372>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.74 Message1373>ClampPeriodical Maintenance Target Is Completed, PleaseMaintain

When the clamp periodical maintenance target is reaching to the setting, the computer will be
appearing this hinting message on the top screen, please refer to the Lubrication System Setting menu.

3.3.75 Message1374>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.76 Message1375>SPARE
It is a hinting message display.

I 3.3.77 Message1376>PleaseMaintain Injection Mechanism Within Greases

It is a hinting message display.

I 3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3·52 "0 ·C·E··
MOl··· ISO
. ·,4001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

3.3.78 Message1377>lnjection Periodical Maintenance Target Is Completed, PleaseMaintain
It is a hinting message display.

3.3.79 Message1378>MachinePeriodical Maintenance Target Is Completed, PleaseMaintain

The machine periodical maintenance date is reaching to the setting that the computer will be
appearing this hinting message on the top screen, please refer to the Periodical Maintenance Setting
menu.

3.3.80 Message1379>lnjection (A) Minimum PressureHome Position ResetIs In Action

It is a hinting message display.

3.3.81 Message1380>lnjection (A) Maximum PressureHome Position ResetIs In Action

It is a hinting message display.

3.3.82 Message1381>ClampPeriodical GreasesMaintenance Is In Action

It is a hinting message display.

3.3.83 Message1382>lnjection Periodical GreasesMaintenance Is In Action

It is a hinting message display.

3.3.84 Message1383>Mold ThicknessAdjustment Is In Action

When doing the molds exchange on the machine, the operator is carrying out the mold thickness
adjustment sequences, this hinting message will be appearing on the top screen.

3.3.85 Message1384>Automatic Clamping ForceAdjustment Complete

After finishing the mold thickness adjustment sequences, this hinting message will be appearing on
the top screen.

3.3.86 Message1385>Automatic Mold Clamping ForceAdjustment Is In Action

When doing the molds exchange on the machine, the operator is carrying out the mold clamping
force adjustment sequences, this hinting message will be appearing on the top screen.

3.3.87 Message1386>Mold Clamp Home Position ResetIs In Action

When the operator is holding down the corresponding soft key of "~~IDI" by "Mold
Clamp" for carrying out the clamp mechanism minimum stroke calibration motion on the menu (15)
Home Position Reset Menu, please refer to the menu operating description in the section of2.46.

3.3.88 Message1387>Mold Open Home Position Is In Action

When the operator is holding down the corresponding soft key of 'attiocrill!Li(~" by "Mold
Open" for carrying out the clamp mechanism maximum stroke calibration motion on the menu (15)
Home Position Reset Menu, please refer to the menu operating description in the section of2.46.

3.3.89 Message1388>lnjection Home Position Is In Action

When the operator is holding down the corresponding soft key of "lI!im1fh'ltUiI" by "Injection"
for carrying out the injection mechanism minimum stroke calibration motion on the menu (15)
Home Position Reset Menu, please refer to the menu operating description in the section of2.46.

3.3.90 Message1389>Melt DecompressionHome Position Is In Action

When the operator is holding down the corresponding soft key of "~1E" by "Suck
Back" for carrying out the injection mechanism maximum stroke calibration motion on the menu
(15) Home Position Reset Menu, please refer to the menu operating description in the section of
2.46.

3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3·53

August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 ;CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I 3.3.91 Message1390>EjectorForward Home Position Is In Action

When the operator is holding down the corresponding soft key of
. .. ~~_.,
"lIIt~9i"
by "EJe.
__.. ...71"" :w •

FWD" for carrying out the ejector mechanism maximum stroke calibration motion on the menu (15)

I Home Position Reset Menu, please refer to the menu operating description in the section of2.46.

3.3.92 Message1391>EjectorBackward Home Position Is In Action

"ij.~!I_"
I When the operator is holding down the corresponding soft key of by "Eje.
BWD" for carrying out the ejector mechanism minimum stroke calibration motion on the menu (15)
Home Position Reset Menu, please refer to the menu operating description in the section of2.46.

I 3.3.93 Message1392>CarriageForward Home Position Is In Action

When the operator is holding down the corresponding soft key of "ImlI:I'flB.~'
by "Car.

I FWD" for carrying out the carriage mechanism minimum stroke calibration motion on the menu (15)
Home Position Reset Menu, please refer to the menu operating description in the section of 2.46.

I 3.3.94 Message1393>CarriageBackward Home Position Is In Action

When the operator is holding down the corresponding soft key of by "Car.
BWD" for carrying out the carriage mechanism maximum stroke calibration motion on the menu
"gr__ jIII"

I (15) Home Position Reset Menu, please refer to the menu operating description in the section of
2.46.

3.3.95 Message1394>SlaverInjection Home Position Is In Action

I It is a hinting message display.

3.3.96 Message1395>SlaverMelt DecompressionHome Position Is In Action

It is a hinting message display.

3.3.97 Message1396>SlaverEjector Forward Home Position Is In Action

I It is a hinting message display.

3.3.98 Message1397>SlaverEjector Backward Home Position Is In Action

I It is a hinting message display.

3.3.99 Message1398>SlaverCarriage Forward Home Position Is In Action

I It is a hinting message display.

3.3.100Message1399>SlaverCarriage Backward Home Position Is In Action

I It is a hinting message display.

I
I
3.The descriptions for the Alarm & Hinting Messages 3-54
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

4 Appendix

4.1 AC Inverterauxiliary explanation

Reason: It is represented as the alarm messages of the AC Inverter for the V-series machines when
the trouble shooting is happened, please obey the below operating description to eliminate
I
the probable malfunction cause.
r---------------------~

SEL key Data Display Unit

(or MODE) (3-Alphanumric)

DOWN key SET key

(or ENT)

Figure: PMC (Power Motion Controller) panel

[Remedy]: please obey the below operating description to eliminate the probable malfunction cause.

A) View the operation of the alarm code indication.

Aa) When the trouble shooting is occurred on the V series machines, it will be displaying the alarm
code on the sight-window of the data display unit, please view the reason from the list of the
alarm code in the next indent of (8).
Ab) Holding down both keys of 'UP J + 'DOWN J simultaneously on the PMC panel about 2
seconds or above (vides the figure) for switchover to the "Alarm Mode". Ifpressing down the
, SEL J key to return back to the "Common Mode".
A.c) It will be displaying the definition alarm code of 'AOO J on the PMC panel after converting
into the "Alarm Mode" that it is the latest record of the alarm code, if pressing down the
r SEL J key, it will be displaying the memory for an abnormal alarm number nowadays in the
alarm code of' AOOJ and the times of the putting in the power electricity at that time by
alternately demonstrated. For example: If it is shown as the alarm code of 'E 17J means
r Motor electronic thermal J having 151 times of the putting in the power electricity, it will be
alternately displaying as 'E 17J ~ '151 J on the data display unit.
Ad) When it is shown as r AOOJ on the data display unit under the "Alarm Mode", it could be
reviewing the previous alarm code of r AOOJby pressing down the 'UP J key once time, since
the latest alarm code of r AOOJ to trace the past alarm condition, if pressing down the 'SEL J

List of the alarm code

-~~~
key, it will do the same to confirm the alarm conditions this moment.

IPMP motor output has an over force conditions.

1) Motor rotation is unstable or has a high
or the vibration.
I) To replace oils.
2) To reduce the loading force, or to reconfirm
start-up time and to inspect the hydraulic
valve in the outlet port of the pump.
Pump has a reserved condition in virtue of 3) To reconfirm the collocation of the start
Inverter output has an
overload. in company with the hydraulic loop and to
EIO abnormal output of
3) An excessive inertia affect turns the pump the load of an inertia affect.
the over current
protection action
a vacuum status. 4) To inspect the coupling mechanism whether it
The connections of the pump/motor links swing. loosened or to replace the motor or pump.
Motor is shorted circuit or a worse grounding. 5) To detect the shorted circuit and the zroundinzl
Encoder's failure or the PMC controller is line in the motor.
of order. 6) Please detect the wiring circuit or contact
in ofAP.

4'Appendix 4-1 '.0 (.'.E·.. ISO

9001·..• 14001
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
 CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

I To replace the hydraulic

To reduce the loading force, or to reconfirm
IMaximum rated current is over via by the detected
start-up time and to inspect the hydraulic

I I) Motor rotation is unstable.

Pump has a reserved condition in virtue of
overload.
3)
valve in the outlet port of the pump.
To reconfirm the collocation of the start
in company with the hydraulic loop and to
3) An excessive inertia affect turns the pump the load of an inertia affect.
Ell overcurrent

I a vacuum status.
4) The connections of the pump'motor links swing.
5) Motor is shorted circuit or a worse grounding.
4)

5)
To inspect the coupling mechanism whether it
loosened or to replace the motor or pump.
To detect the shorted circuit and the
6) Encoder's failure or the PMC controller is
line in the motor.

I of order. 6) Please detect the wiring circuit or contact

in ofAP.

The actual motor rotation is over the rated value.

I El2 Overspeed
1) Pump has a reserved condition in virtue of
overload.
2) An excessive inertia affect turns the pump
a vacuum status.

I 3) Encoder's failure.

output current of the regenerative brake is

rated value.

I El3 Regenerative brake

overcurrent
1) The regenerative brake is shorted circuit or .
resistance is too small.
The

I El4
Regenerative brake
overload protection
action

I El5 Undervoltage

I El6 Overvoltage

wire is broken in the electrical circuit.

E21 Motor is broken wire is broken in the electrical circuit.

I E24

To inspect the hydraulic piping and the ovenoacn

E27 run and to contact with in charge of AP.

I is detected a

detect the transducer cable and wires.

Input command is not in line within the
Motor RUN is detect the inverter wires phase or to contact
RUN rotation over 2 seconds.
E31 abnormal charge of AP.
Motor
Motor stor
Motor thermistor is detect the motor thermistor wires or to
Motor thermistor is wrong wires and the
E40 broken or shorted
thermistor wiring is broken or shorted circuit in charge of AP.
circuit.
bad connection.

4-2
4'Appendix
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0

:CDC2000wiN Operation Manual

To inspect radiating fin

CgIJliil.CUI dust on the cabinet circulation fan or adjust
threshold value of the fin thermostat temperature,
as well as to reconfirm the load output capacity and
to contact with in of AP

E64 Moto dry operation is is increased. To inspect the oils filling in the pump suction
abnormal The lack of oils reservoir is dropped down or or to carry out the exhausting airs work.
inhale the airs.
E91 contact with in charge of AP.

E92 EEPROM data is impossible to write. contact with in charge of AP.

E93 EEPROM service address data error. contact with in charge of AP.

E94 contact with in charge of AP.

E95 contact with in charge of AP.

inspect the cooling fan inside the inverter.

LSO

L60 force is over the rating range. contact with in charge of AP.

4'Appendix 4-3
1001 C'E
'so . ..' 1:4001
'SO
August 27, 2010 Revision:2.0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4130.6513 I